JP2023024813A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes display control means capable of displaying a reservation icon image indicating the number of reservations on a display screen. The display control means can execute an icon display performance for displaying icon images indicating the same object as an object indicated by the reservation icon image on the display screen for predetermined numbers regardless of the number of the reservations.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of displaying a pending icon image indicating the number of pending on a display screen,
The display control means can execute an icon display effect in which a predetermined number of icon images representing the same object as the object represented by the pending icon image are displayed on the display screen regardless of the number of pending.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
The display control means is capable of executing the icon display effect multiple times during one variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 3]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
The display control means changes the display color of the icon image displayed in the icon display effect a plurality of times during one variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
The display control means switches from a display state in which the suspended icon image is displayed to a non-display state in which the suspended icon image is not displayed during execution of the icon display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4,
The display control means is configured such that at least one icon image among a predetermined number of icon images displayed in the icon display effect is equal to or larger than the image size of the pending icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern horizontal arrangement effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern horizontal arrangement effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern side-by-side effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design reverse movement production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol reverse movement production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol reverse movement production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design warp production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design warp production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design warp production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design movement production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design movement production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design movement production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect change fluctuation production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode change fluctuation effect B; It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect change fluctuation|variation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design change production A and B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design change production C and D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design change production|presentation E. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character pop-out effect 1; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character pop-out effect 2; It is a figure for demonstrating number pattern change production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining pending icon shielding effects A and B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon shielding effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining pending icon shielding effects D and E; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon image display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon image display effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining icon-shaped area rendering A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining icon-shaped area rendering B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon-shaped area effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon continuous change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon continuous change effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon continuous change effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the design change update production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design change update production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design change update production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a hit expectation degree suggestion effect 1; It is a figure for demonstrating the hit expectation degree suggestion production|presentation 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit expectation degree suggestion production|presentation 3. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon change effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation button operation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation button operation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation button operation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a battle character selection effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a battle character selection effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a battle character selection effect C; FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained; FIG. 11 is a second diagram for explaining the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. FIG. 11 is a third diagram for explaining the display performance of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an expectation-increasing item effect 1; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation-increasing item effect 2; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an expectation-increasing item effect 3; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a numerical total effect 1; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining numerical total effects 2, 3, and 4; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a numerical total effect 5; It is a figure for demonstrating the reservation look-ahead effect 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending look-ahead effect 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending look-ahead effect 3; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a decorative portion arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion; 4 is a schematic diagram of a first movable accessory 14. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a fixed winning device 19. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a ball-entering suggestion production 1; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining ball-entering suggestion productions 2, 3, and 4; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining ball-entering suggestion productions 5, 6, and 7;

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, A select button 68, a frame movable body 69, an audio button 55, and a brightness button 56 are provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, movable frame bodies 69 (also referred to as movable frame accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60 . The movable frame body 69 normally rests at a retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and moves (extends) from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. ) and stop at a position where the handle 60 is touched. The frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate vertically and horizontally according to the effect. The sword member 65 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like. The select button 68 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and to the left of the performance button 63, and is composed of an upper button, a right button, a lower button, and a left button. It is operated (pressed) by the player when changing the , or when changing various parameters related to the effect. The volume button 55 is an operation unit arranged near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and between the select button 68 and the performance button 63, and is composed of a volume down button and a volume up button. It is operated (pressed) by the player when raising or lowering the level. The brightness button 56 is an operation unit which is arranged between the select button 68 and the effect button 63 and on the front side of the volume button 55, and is composed of a brightness down button and a brightness up button, and is used to raise the brightness level. It is operated (pressed) by the player when it is lowered.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decorative body 10, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed prize. A device (navel) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, and a second big winning device (second attacker) 36 , a large winning opening opening start opening 17 , a general winning opening 27 (ordinary winning opening 27 ), an out opening 16 and indicators 40 .

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper part of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a suspended digested image display area (the suspended display area) in which the suspended digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The pending icon 9C may also be simply called a pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" or "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("extraction of special figure suspension" described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. can rest in any advanced position in front of the The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom at the advanced position.

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the center decoration body 10 corresponding to the lower portion of the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left portion of the center decorative body 10 corresponding to the lower left portion of the image display device 7 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) and the hit determination.

Here, the "lottery for special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big hit is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or permits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not have to include the big winning opening opening start opening 17 .

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize winning port 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. In the case of a failure, a failure pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the game machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the 2 major winning opening sensor 35a, V area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning hole sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning hole 29 . The electric tooth solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tooth 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control of the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 , the second movable accessory 15 and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and operates according to the motion pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The volume button detection switch 55a detects that the volume button 55 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the volume button 55 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the volume button detection switch 55 a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108 . The brightness button detection switch 56a detects that the brightness button 56 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the brightness button 56 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the brightness button detection switch 56 a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, and is driven according to a signal from the relay board 108, so that the effect button 63 can be vibrated. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. When the select button 68 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the select button detection switch 68 a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108 . A sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been detected is also connected to the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A ceiling flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, and a time saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information described above do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, as the initial state of the counters, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Ceiling production counter, overnight production counter, probability variable production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is maintained without being cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the late-night production counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The overnight performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the game machine 1, and 0 is set as an initial state. Information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the power tube 22 is opened three times with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second for 1 time at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “big wins” and “losses” as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H~14H, 21H big hits correspond to "V passage scheduled big hits (probability variable big hits)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage scheduled jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 15R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed after the jackpot game is completed. It's becoming That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, after the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a low probability base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" appears to be in a normal high probability low base state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is A high-probability-low base state with a high probability becomes a latent state (variable latent probability state), and it is difficult for the player to discern the variable latent probability state. That is, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" Low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high-base state) after the jackpot game, and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” time-saving end The later low-probability-low base state and the high-probability-low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is in the high-probability-high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot”. "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are such that, in the high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. ends with "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability-high base state, after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) special symbol variable display is executed High-probability low base state (latent probability variable state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low-probability base state is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, in the low-probability base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. As for the initial value of the flag, the ceiling flag is "1", ie, "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", ie, "OFF". The initial value of status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V area sensor detection process (step S106), reserved ball The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether it is a time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3" and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (step S1408) are the same in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). When the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "100" is set to the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. In the game state designation command, information about the current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability variable state, probability variable counter value, time saving state, time saving counter value, etc.) include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of variations of special symbols executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the prescribed number of revolutions. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has passed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set to the time saving counter as the number of times of saving time (number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this processing ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, , the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning to the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the prescribed number of rotations until b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the variable probability flag is OFF, when the game hits 500 times, it enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information about the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of number of pending balls]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command to the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag , ceiling counter, etc.) are stored in the sub-RAM 94 . Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time reduction effect counter, probability variable effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) during time reduction is set in a time reduction performance counter, the number of remaining fluctuations in probability variation is set in a probability variation performance counter, and the remaining variation frequency until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability variations, and the number of ceilings. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as pre-reading production pattern information in each of the 1st to 4th storage areas corresponding to the 1st to 4th special figures 2 reserved and the area corresponding to the variation. It is FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number, and performs the prefetch effect by referring to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93. It determines whether or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and when the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes the game state information indicating the current game state, the pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of probability variation (number of games), the number of remaining fluctuations during time saving, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations after turning on the power, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game This is a process for displaying the number of times of change and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation performance counter at the time of probability variation. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number of times based on the value of the time saving production counter during time saving.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the overnight performance counter stores the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from power-on by, for example, incrementing an overnight effect counter each time a variable effect end command is received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH1 (eg TH1=10) is below TH2 (eg TH2=200). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the RAM clear has not been performed. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Moreover, the effect control microcomputer 91 may turn off the display representing the value of the ceiling effect counter and the chance image again when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH4 (eg, TH4=100). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter as described above based on the value of the overnight effect counter, or may determine based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. good too. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (eg, TH6=100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (eg, TH7=70). When , the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (eg, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number and stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and causes the image display device 7 to display it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above process.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the image display device 7 (step S5006). . On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above process.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processes, the image control microcomputer 101 reads predetermined images specified by various commands from the ROM 103 and causes the image display device 7 to display them, in addition to the commands described above. For example, when receiving an opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and causes the image display device 7 to display it. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7 . Further, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the image display device 7, and this processing is finished.

9. Movement of Movable Body and Display Effect of Sub Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. do In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.

46A and 46B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying movement modes of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and the lower end thereof is located near the lower end of the image display device 7 . The upper end and lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). At the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the whole may be stored and difficult to be seen. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 . It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable accessory 14 may be formed with a decorative portion, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops in front of the image display device 7 (front surface) so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stand still.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable accessory 69. As shown in FIG. The movable frame accessory 69 is composed of a pair of plate-like members arranged on both left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right direction. The two members are formed of flexible members, and are configured so that one major surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60 . As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the direction of approaching the handle 60, i.e., move closer to each other. It can rest at the touching position (second aspect). The movable frame accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so as to change from the second mode to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display rendering example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the like. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect example.

The decorative pattern side-by-side effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative pattern side-by-side effect is executed during a decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern side-by-side effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern side-by-side production A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side effect A. FIG. The decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is a presentation in which two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are changed in combination in the lateral direction (horizontal direction). 51 (A) ~ (F) shows an example of 1 variation of special figure variation, and 51 (G) ~ (L) shows another example of 1 variation.

In the decorative pattern side-by-side effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high-speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement so that they can be visually recognized, and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, as shown by the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 51(B). It moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in order from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and then stopped at "3". At this time, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern array being changed, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a (the same applies after the temporary stop display). Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative design 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative design 8C are aligned horizontally on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. "3" of 8R is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of left decorative design 8L and "3" of middle decorative design 8C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which had been stop-displayed in the upper stage of the display screen 7a, moves downward again, and is again stopped-displayed in the lower stage of the display screen 7a. . As a result, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern in the upper part of the display screen 7a. The "3" of 8L is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of the middle decorative design 8C and "3" of the right decorative design 8R). In this way, the combination of two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R arranged in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) changes (Fig. 51(C) is the first time, Fig. 51(D) 2nd time) is executed, it suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has been stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a changes again (moves downward again). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, "3" in the upper left decorative pattern 8L of the display screen 7a, "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C in the middle of the display screen 7a, and "3" in the lower right decorative pattern 8R in the display screen 7a are , lined up diagonally in a row, and "333" hits.

FIGS. 51(G)-(L) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 51(A)-(F). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in order from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and then stopped at "3". . At this time, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a, and "3" of the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a. Here too, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern array being changed, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the middle stage of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative design 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative design 8C are aligned horizontally in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design in the upper section of the display screen 7a. "3" of 8R is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of left decorative design 8L and "3" of middle decorative design 8C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(I), "3" of the middle decorative symbol 8C stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the display screen 7a and "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a are displayed. 3” move downward together again, and are again stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern in the middle part of the display screen 7a. The "3" of 8L is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of the middle decorative design 8C and "3" of the right decorative design 8R). In this way, the combination of two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R arranged in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) changes (Fig. 51(H) is the first time, Fig. 51(I) 2nd time) is executed, it suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(J), "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has been stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a changes again (moves downward again). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. After the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L "3" moves downward again and is stopped and displayed again at the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L, "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C, and "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R in the lower row of the display screen 7a are arranged in a horizontal line and hit "333". .

[Decorative pattern side-by-side production B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is a presentation in which two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are changed in combination in the lateral direction (horizontal direction).

In the decorative pattern side-by-side production B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high speed variation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement so that they can be visually recognized, and framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, like the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 52(B). It moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in order from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and then stop display (temporary stop display) at "3". hereinafter the same). At this time, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern array being changed, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative design 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative design 8C are aligned horizontally on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. "3" of 8R is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of left decorative design 8L and "3" of middle decorative design 8C).

Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(C). That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C may stop at the middle or lower stage of the display screen 7a in addition to the upper stage. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stop-displayed with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, "333" is a jackpot on the diagonal line. On the other hand, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages (eg, FIG. 52(I)), it is fixed and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the horizontal line (horizontal line) is the same as one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. line), a re-variation effect of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the other decorative pattern (here, the right decorative pattern 8R) not aligned with the horizontal line is executed as a chance effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52(C), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are the same due to the stop display of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Since the numbers are arranged in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the remaining decorative designs (right decorative design 8R) that are not arranged are changed again.

After the right decorative design 8R changes again in FIG. 52(D), the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 52(E). Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(E). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or middle of the display screen 7a in addition to the bottom. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative symbol 8R stops displaying "3" on the upper row, it becomes a big hit of "333" on the horizontal line (FIG. 52(J)). On the other hand, if the right decorative symbol 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages (eg, FIG. 52(K)), it will be fixed and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(E), the display is stopped on a line (horizontal line) that is the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C and that is different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. In this case, one of the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C moves downward again as a chance effect, and is aligned with the right decorative design 8R, and the other changes again.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52(E), when "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the lower stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward again as shown in FIG. 52(F). , is stopped at the bottom. As a result, two of the three decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R) are arranged horizontally with the same number, as shown in FIG. 52(G). , and the remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbols 8L) that are not aligned are re-varied.

After the left decorative design 8L changes again in FIG. 52(G), the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 52(H). Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the jackpot of "333" is announced. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(H). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may stop at the top or middle of the display screen 7a in addition to the bottom. In addition, the left decorative design 8L may be stop-displayed with a number different from that of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. As an example, when the left decorative symbol 8L stops displaying "4" in the lower row, it is determined and stopped when "433" is missed on the horizontal line (FIG. 52(L)).

FIG. 52(I) shows a state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the middle stage of the display screen 7a with "4" after FIG. 52(B). In this case, since two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have the same number and are not arranged in the horizontal direction, the misalignment results in a definite stop.

FIG. 52(J) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as "3" on the upper stage of the display screen 7a after FIG. 52(D). In this case, "333" is a big hit on the horizontal line.

FIG. 52(K) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as "4" on the upper stage of the display screen 7a after FIG. 52(D). In this case, the definite stop occurs when the position "334" is missed on the horizontal line.

FIG. 52(L) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as "3" on the lower stage of the display screen 7a after FIG. 52(G). In this case, the definite stop occurs when "433" is missed on the horizontal line.

[Decorative pattern side-by-side production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is a presentation in which two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are changed in combination in the lateral direction (horizontal direction). Figure 53 (A) ~ (F) shows an example of one variation of special figure variation, Figure 53 (G) ~ (L) shows another example of one variation.

In the decorative pattern side-by-side effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during the low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement so as to be visually recognizable, and framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, like the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 53(B). It moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern array being changed, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in order from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display, and then stop display (temporary stop display) at "3". hereinafter the same). At this time, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are both stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the horizontal direction on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C during variable display is , and the other two decorative designs ("3" of the left decorative design 8L and "3" of the right decorative design 8R) are not aligned in the horizontal direction. The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(C). In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a in addition to the middle. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stop-displayed with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the middle decorative pattern 8C, "333" is a jackpot of "333" on the upper horizontal line. On the other hand, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle and lower stages, it is determined to stop when it is lost. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(C), a horizontal line (horizontal line) having the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R and different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, that is, In the case of stop display in the middle stage or the lower stage, one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward again as a chance performance, and is aligned with the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the other moves again.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(C), when "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, as shown in FIG. ) moves downward again and is stopped in the middle row. As a result, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are arranged in the horizontal direction with the same number, as shown in FIG. 53(E). , and the remaining decorative symbols (right decorative symbols 8R) that are not aligned are re-varied.

After the right decorative design 8R changes again in FIG. 53(E), the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53(F). Here, "3" is stopped and displayed. This results in a jackpot of "333" on the horizontal line. Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(F). In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a in addition to the middle. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop and display with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. For example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages, it will be fixed and stopped. On the other hand, when the number "3" is the same as that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the line (horizontal line) different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, as a chance effect, One of the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C is moved again, aligned with the right decorative design 8R, and the other is moved again.

FIGS. 53(G)-(L) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 53(A)-(F). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 53(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) decelerate at the same time and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, after which "3" is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a. Here too, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern array being changed, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. In FIG. 53(G), on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are arranged in the lateral direction (horizontal direction). The symbol 8R is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative symbols ("3" of the left decorative symbol 8L and "3" of the middle decorative symbol 8C).

Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. be. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C may stop at the middle or lower stage in addition to the upper stage of the display screen 7a. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stop-displayed with different numbers, and may be stop-displayed at different vertical positions. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed with numbers different from each other, they are fixed and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same lateral line (horizontal line), three decorative patterns are displayed as a chance effect. 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed again, suggesting that the probability of winning is high (eg, 30%). As two of the three decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R, combinations other than the combination of the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C may be stopped and displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped to display two decorations. Since the patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) are arranged in the horizontal direction with the same number, as shown in FIG. This suggests a high probability of winning (eg, 30%).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) decelerate at the same time and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, after which "3" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(I), in the middle stage of the display screen 7a, "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the lateral direction (horizontal direction). The design 8L is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of the middle decorative design 8C and "3" of the right decorative design 8R).

Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(I). be. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle, upper or lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with different numbers, and may be stopped and displayed at different positions in the vertical direction. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with mutually different numbers, they are fixed and stopped at a loss. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(I), when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same lateral line (horizontal line), as a chance effect (second time). The three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change again, suggesting that the probability of winning is high (for example, 60%). As two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, combinations other than the combination of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(I), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped to display two decorations. Since the patterns (the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged in the horizontal direction with the same number, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changed again as shown in FIG. This effect for the second time suggests that the expectation of winning is even higher (for example, 60).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(K), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) decelerate at the same time and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, after which "3" is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(K), on the lower stage of the display screen 7a, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the lateral direction (horizontal direction). The pattern 8C is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative patterns (“3” of the left decorative pattern 8L and “3” of the right decorative pattern 8R).

Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. be. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle or upper part of the display screen 7a in addition to the lower part. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with different numbers, and may be stopped and displayed at different vertical positions. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with numbers different from each other, they are fixed and stopped at a loss. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(K), when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same lateral line (horizontal line), a chance effect (third time) is performed. The remaining one decorative pattern (here, middle decorative pattern 8C) which is not changed again is stop-displayed with the same number pattern (here, "3") as the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a big win. As two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, combinations other than the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(K), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a stopped state to display the two decorative patterns. Since the patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged in the horizontal direction with the same number, the third chance effect is performed, as shown in FIG. be done.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern side-by-side production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are arranged horizontally on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is the middle decorative pattern. 8C and a first effect in which they are not aligned horizontally, and as shown in FIG. 51(D), after the first effect, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are horizontally aligned A second effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are not arranged in the horizontal direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52(C), (F), FIGS. 53(C), and (D).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(C), in the first effect, the middle decorative symbol 8C temporarily stops at the upper stage of the display screen 7a and is horizontally aligned with the left decorative symbol 8L. As shown in FIG. 51(D), in the second effect, after the temporary stop, it moves in the fluctuation direction (downward), temporarily stops again at the lower stage of the display screen 7a, and is horizontal with the right decorative pattern 8R. line up in the direction According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52(C), (F), FIGS. 53(C), and (D).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(D), in the first production, the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuating, and as shown in FIG. 52(F), in the second production, , the right decorative pattern R is temporarily stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 53(B) and (D).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped, represent the same number "3". there is According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern side-by-side effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the decorative pattern side-by-side effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. Also, the configuration of the decorative pattern side-by-side productions A to C is an example, and some of the productions may not be provided.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern side-by-side performances A to C, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number "3". However, in the side-by-side decorative design effects A to C, at least one of the middle decorative design 8C, the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R may temporarily stop with a different number.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern side-by-side performances A to C, the movement or temporary stop timing of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be replaced with the movement or temporary stop timing of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the movement or temporary stop timing of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be replaced with the movement or temporary stop timing of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, the movement and temporary stop timing of the left decorative pattern 8L may be replaced with the movement and temporary stop timing of the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern representing one number,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern representing one number,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern representing one number,
The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are arranged in the first direction on the display means, and the third decorative pattern is arranged in the first direction along with the first decorative pattern. A first production in a state not lined up along
After the first effect, the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are arranged along the first direction, and the second decorative pattern is aligned with the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern. A second effect in which they are not aligned along one direction, and
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first effect, the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the first position of the display means and horizontally aligned with the second decorative pattern,
In the second effect, after the temporary stop, move in the changing direction, temporarily stop again at the second position of the display means, and line up horizontally with the third decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first production, the third decorative pattern is fluctuating,
In the second production, the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design each represent the same number,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative pattern reverse movement effect is executed during the decorative pattern fluctuation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern reverse movement effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol reverse movement effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern reverse movement effect, two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are temporarily stopped, and one or more decorative patterns among them are kept displayed. After moving in the opposite direction (upward direction) to the fluctuation direction (downward direction), it stops at a position different from the first temporary stop position. 54 (A) ~ (D) shows an example of 1 variation of special figure variation, and 54 (E) ~ (H) shows another example of 1 variation. FIGS. 54(I) to (L) show yet another example of one variation.

In the decorative symbol reverse movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement so that they can be visually recognized, and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, as shown by the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 55(D). It moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are decelerated at the same time from the high-speed fluctuation display. The display changes to a low speed, and then the stop display (temporary stop display) of "3" is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern array being changed, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The right decorative pattern 8R maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are aligned in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) on the lower stage of the display screen 7a, and are displayed in a variable manner. The right decorative design 8R is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative designs ("3" of the left decorative design 8L and "3" of the middle decorative design 8C).

As shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed at the same time. It is suggested that the degree-suggestion effect is executed. The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop.

FIG. 54(C) shows an example of the expectation degree suggestion effect. In the expectation suggesting effect, one or more of the two decorative patterns stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower or middle stage of the display screen 7a is displayed while maintaining the change direction (downward). Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests a higher chance of winning. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. It is suggested that when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), the expected win rate is 50%.

In FIG. 54(C), two of the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) that are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower stage of the display screen 7a are kept displayed. while moving in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward). Two decorative designs (the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected win rate in the variation is 50% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2, and the amount of movement is two steps (lower stage→upper stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and then stop display (temporary stop display) at "3" on the upper part of the display screen 7a. be done. As a result, the upper stage of the display screen 7a is confirmed and stopped in the state of the big win "333", and the big win is notified.

Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(D). In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle or lower part of the display screen 7a in addition to the upper part. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop and display with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages, it is determined to stop when it is lost. Then, when the number "3" is the same as that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the vertical direction is different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the middle row and the lower row). , as a chance effect, a re-variation effect is executed for one of the three decorative patterns in which the horizontal lines are not aligned (here, the right decorative pattern 8R).

FIGS. 54(E) to (H) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 54(A) to (D). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) decelerate at the same time and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) of "3" is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed at the same time, suggesting that the expectation suggesting effect is executed. . The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop. In the expectation suggesting effect, one or more of the two decorative patterns stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower or middle stage of the display screen 7a is displayed while maintaining the change direction (downward). Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests a higher chance of winning. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. It is suggested that when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), the expected win rate is 50%.

After FIG. 54(B), in FIG. 54(E), one of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) which is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower stage of the display screen 7a. One decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern 8C) moves in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while maintaining the display. One decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern 8C) is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected win rate in this variation is 20% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1, and the amount of movement is one step (lower stage→middle stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(F), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and then stop display (temporary stop display) at "3" on the middle stage of the display screen 7a. be done. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the display screen 7a.

Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(F). In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a in addition to the middle. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop and display with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages, it is determined to stop when it is lost. The number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the vertical direction is the same as one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the middle row or the lower row). In this case, as a chance effect, a re-variation effect is executed for one of the three decorative patterns in which the horizontal lines are not aligned (here, the left decorative pattern 8L).

That is, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the middle row, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative pattern 8C and Since the right decorative symbols 8R) are arranged in the horizontal direction with the same number, as shown in FIG.

After the left decorative design 8L changes again in FIG. 54(G), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 54(H). Here, "4" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the deviation of "433" is reported. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(H). In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L may stop at the upper or lower stage in addition to the middle stage of the display screen 7a. In addition, the left decorative design 8L may be stop-displayed with the same number as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. As an example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed as "3" in the middle row, it is determined and stopped with a big win of "333" on the horizontal line.

FIGS. 54(I) to (L) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 54(A) to (D). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) decelerate at the same time and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) of "3" is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed at the same time, suggesting that the expectation suggesting effect is executed. . The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop. In the expectation suggesting effect, one or more of the two decorative patterns stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower or middle stage of the display screen 7a is displayed while maintaining the change direction (downward). Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests a higher chance of winning. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. It is suggested that when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), the expected win rate is 50%.

After FIG. 54(B), in FIG. 54(I), one of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) which is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower stage of the display screen 7a. One decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) moves in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while maintaining the display. One decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected win rate in this variation is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (lower stage→upper stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and then stop display (temporary stop display) at "3" on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. be done. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are horizontally aligned on the upper stage of the display screen 7a.

Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(J). In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle or lower part of the display screen 7a in addition to the upper part. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop and display with a number different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages, it is determined to stop when it is lost. The number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the vertical direction is the same as one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, upper or lower). In this case, as a chance effect, a re-variation effect is executed for one of the three decorative patterns in which the horizontal lines are not aligned (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C).

That is, as shown in FIG. 54(J), when "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the upper row, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (left decorative pattern 8L and Since the right decorative symbols 8R) are arranged in the horizontal direction with the same numbers, as shown in FIG. 54(K), the rest of the decorative symbols (middle decorative symbols 8C) that are not aligned are changed again.

After the middle decorative design 8C is changed again in FIG. 54(K), as shown in FIG. 54(L), the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. Here, "4" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the deviation of "343" is reported. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(L). That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C may stop at the middle or lower stage of the display screen 7a in addition to the upper stage. Further, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stop-displayed with the same number as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "3" is stop-displayed in the upper stage of the middle decorative pattern 8C, it is determined and stopped with a big win of "333" on the horizontal line.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol reverse movement effect B. FIG. In the decorative pattern reverse movement effect, two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are temporarily stopped, and one or more decorative patterns among them are kept displayed. After moving in the opposite direction (upward direction) to the fluctuation direction (downward direction), it stops at a position different from the first temporary stop position. 55 (A) ~ (G) shows an example of 1 variation of special figure variation, and 55 (H) ~ (J) shows another example of 1 variation. FIGS. 55(K) to (L) show yet another example of one variation.

In the decorative symbol reverse movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are vertical lines indicating that each pattern is difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement so that they can be visually recognized, and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, as shown by the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 55(D). It moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are decelerated at the same time from the high-speed fluctuation display. It becomes a low-speed variable display, and then stops display (temporary stop display) at "3" on the upper part of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern arrangement during fluctuation, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned horizontally on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. , and the other two decorative patterns (“3” of the left decorative pattern 8L and “3” of the right decorative pattern 8R) are not aligned in the horizontal direction.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed at the same time. It is suggested that the degree-suggestion effect is executed. The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop.

FIGS. 55(C) and 55(D) show an example of the expectation degree suggesting effect. In the expectation suggesting effect, one or more of the two decorative patterns stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower or middle stage of the display screen 7a is displayed while maintaining the change direction (downward). Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests a higher chance of winning. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. It is suggested that when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), the expected win rate is 50%.

When the expectation suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 55(C), first, two decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right The symbol 8R) moves in the changing direction (downward) while maintaining the display, and stops at the lower stage. Here, when the expectation degree suggesting effect is started, the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are moved downward by two stages, but there are cases in which a different mode is used. That is, there are cases where one decorative pattern is moved downward, and there are cases where it is moved downward by one step. When the number of decorative symbols moving downward is one, it is suggested that the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0 or 1, not 2, and the number of decorative symbols moving upward When is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement becomes one step. In other words, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win is either not suggested or 20%. In FIG. 55(C), the two decorative patterns have moved two steps downward, suggesting that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is either none, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50%.

In FIG. 55(D), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) out of two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower stage of the display screen 7a ) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. One decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. The timing at which one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) moves is the same as the timing at which "3" frames in the medium decorative pattern 8C during low speed fluctuation, and the timing at which it reaches the middle stage is also the same. This effect suggests that the expected win rate in this variation is 20% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (lower stage→middle stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that is fluctuating at a low speed and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R that has moved upward stop at the middle stage of the display screen 7a at the same timing. Is displayed. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the display screen 7a. In this way, the three decorative patterns are the same number "3", two of them are horizontally aligned, and one decorative pattern is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative patterns. In this case, as a chance effect, a re-variation effect is executed for one of the three decorative patterns in which the horizontal lines are not aligned (here, the left decorative pattern 8L).

That is, as shown in FIG. 55(E), two of the three decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R) are arranged horizontally with the same number, As shown in FIG. 55(F), the remaining decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) that are not aligned are changed again.

After the left decorative design 8L changes again in FIG. 55(F), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 55(G). Here, "4" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the deviation of "433" is reported. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 55(G). In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a in addition to the middle. In addition, the left decorative design 8L may be stop-displayed with the same number as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. As an example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed as "3" in the middle row, it is determined and stopped with a big hit of "333" on the horizontal line.

FIGS. 55(H) to (J) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 55(A) to (G). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) of "3" is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the horizontal direction on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C during variable display is , and the other two decorative designs ("3" of the left decorative design 8L and "3" of the right decorative design 8R) are not aligned in the horizontal direction. Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed at the same time, suggesting that the expectation suggesting effect is executed. . The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop. In the expectation suggesting effect, one or more of the two decorative patterns stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower or middle stage of the display screen 7a is displayed while maintaining the change direction (downward). Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests a higher chance of winning. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. It is suggested that when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), the expected win rate is 50%.

When the expectation suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 55(H), first, two decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right One decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) among the patterns 8R) moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) while maintaining the display, and stops at the lower stage. Here, when the expectation level suggesting effect is started, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is moved downward by two stages, but there are cases in which a different mode is used. That is, there are cases where two decorative patterns are moved downward, and there are cases where only one step is moved downward. If the number of decorative symbols moving downward is one, it is suggested that the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0 or 1, not 2, and the number of decorative symbols moving upward When is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement becomes one step. In other words, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win is either not suggested or 20%. In FIG. 55(H), one decorative pattern has moved two steps downward, so that the expectation of a big win is either not suggested, or is suggested to be 20% or 30%.

In FIG. 55(I), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) that is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a is displayed in the direction opposite to the changing direction (downward) while maintaining the display. (upward). One decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected win rate in this variation is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (lower stage → upper stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(J), "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C which is fluctuating at low speed and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R which has moved upward stop at the upper stage of the display screen 7a at the same timing. Is displayed. As a result, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are aligned horizontally in the upper stage of the display screen 7a in a displaced manner of "343" and fixed and stopped.

FIGS. 55(K) to (L) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 55(A) to (G). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) of "3" is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the horizontal direction on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C during variable display is , and the other two decorative designs ("3" of the left decorative design 8L and "3" of the right decorative design 8R) are not aligned in the horizontal direction. Two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed at the same time, suggesting that the expectation suggesting effect is executed. . The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop. In the expectation suggesting effect, one or more of the two decorative patterns stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower or middle stage of the display screen 7a is displayed while maintaining the change direction (downward). Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests a higher chance of winning. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. It is suggested that when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), the expected win rate is 50%.

When the expectation suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 55(C), first, two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative The symbol 8R) moves in the changing direction (downward) while maintaining the display, and stops at the lower stage. Here, when the expectation suggesting effect is started, the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are assumed to move downward by two stages, but there are cases in which a different mode is used. That is, there are cases where one decorative pattern is moved downward, and there are cases where it is moved downward by one step. If the number of decorative symbols moving downward is one, it is suggested that the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0 or 1, not 2, and the number of decorative symbols moving upward When is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement becomes one step. In other words, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win is either not suggested or 20%. In FIG. 55(C), the two decorative patterns have been moved down by two steps, suggesting that the degree of expectation for the big win is either none, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50%.

After FIG. 55(C), in FIG. 55(K), two of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower stage of the display screen 7a are displayed. One decorative pattern moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while maintaining the display. Two decorative designs (left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected win rate in the variation is 50% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2, and the amount of movement is two steps (lower stage→upper stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(L), "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C during low speed fluctuation and "3" of the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) that have moved upward. are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a at the same timing. As a result, the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are aligned horizontally in the upper stage of the display screen 7a in the winning mode of "333" and fixed and stopped.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol reverse movement effect C. FIG. In the decorative pattern reverse movement effect, two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are temporarily stopped, and one or more decorative patterns among them are kept displayed. After moving in the opposite direction (upward direction) to the fluctuation direction (downward direction), it stops at a position different from the first temporary stop position. 56 (A) ~ (F) shows an example of 1 variation of special figure variation, and 56 (G) ~ (L) shows another example of 1 variation.

In the decorative symbol reverse movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, and framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, like the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 56(D). It moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are simultaneously decelerated from the high-speed fluctuation display. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) at "3" on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at "3" on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. (temporary stop display). Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a. When one of the decorative patterns of "123456789" stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a in each pattern arrangement during fluctuation, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative design 8L and the "3" of the right decorative design 8R are arranged in an oblique direction, and the middle decorative design 8C during variable display is replaced by the other two decorative designs (the left decorative design). "3" of 8L and "3" of right decorative pattern 8R) are not arranged diagonally.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed at the same time. It is suggested that the degree-suggestion effect is executed. The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop.

FIG. 56(C) shows an example of the expectation degree suggestion effect. In the expectation suggesting effect, when one or more decorative symbols move in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while maintaining the display, it is suggested that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one stage (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 50%.

When the expectation suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56(C), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) that is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a is maintained. while moving in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward). One decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected win rate in this variation is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1, and the amount of movement is two steps (lower stage → upper stage)).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 56(D) and (E), "3" which came in the frame with the medium decorative pattern 8C during the low speed fluctuation and two decorative patterns (temporary stop display) displayed in the upper row ( The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are horizontally aligned and moved downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(F), three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. As a result, the game stops at the big hit of "333" on the horizontal line.

FIGS. 56(G)-(L) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 56(A)-(F). In another one variation, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) decelerate at the same time and fluctuate at high speed. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped (temporarily stopped) at "4" in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed at "6" in the middle of the display screen 7a. A stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R maintains the state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "6" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are aligned in the horizontal direction in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R during variable display is , and the other two decorative patterns (“4” in the left decorative pattern 8L and “6” in the middle decorative pattern 8C) are not horizontally aligned.

As shown in FIG. 56(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped at the same time to indicate the degree of expectation. It is suggested that the rendition is executed. The expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit in the change is suggested by the number and amount of movement of the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of change after the temporary stop.

FIG. 56(H) shows an example of the expectation degree suggestion effect. In the expectation suggesting effect, when one or more decorative symbols move in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while maintaining the display, it is suggested that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the suggested degree of expectation for winning differs. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one stage (for example, from the lower stage to the middle stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is two and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage→upper stage), it is suggested that the expected win rate is 50%.

When the expectation suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56(H), two decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C) which are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle of the display screen 7a are displayed. ) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Two decorative designs (the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected win rate in this variation is 40% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2, and the amount of movement is one step (middle to upper)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), "4" which has come in the frame with the right decorative pattern 8R which is fluctuating at low speed, and two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern "4" of 8L and "6" of middle decorative pattern 8C) are horizontally aligned and moved downward. Then, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a with "464". As a result, only the middle decorative pattern 8C has a different number from the other two decorative patterns, so the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed again.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(J), when the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed again, the second expectation suggesting effect is started. Specifically, while "4" of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the lower stage of the display screen 7a is displayed, the change direction (lower direction) in the opposite direction (upward). Two decorative designs (left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected win rate in the variation is 50% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2, and the amount of movement is two stages (middle stage → upper stage)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(K), "4" which came in the frame with the middle decorative pattern 8C during low speed fluctuation and the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern "4" of 8L and "4" of middle decorative pattern 8C) are horizontally aligned and moved downward. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(L), three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a with "444". As a result, the big win is definitely displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative symbol reverse movement effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the display screen 7a displays two of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern). 8C) is temporarily stopped at the lower stage of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. One or more decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) out of (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) are displayed in the opposite direction (upward direction) to the fluctuation direction (downward direction) while maintaining the display. , and then stop at a position (upper stage of the display screen 7a) different from the lower stage of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 54(E), (I), FIGS. 55(D), (I), (K), FIGS. 56(C), (H), and (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the first effect, one of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not temporarily stopped at the lower stage of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R is moving in the changing direction (downward), and as shown in FIGS. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after continuously moving in the fluctuation direction (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Figures 54 (B) (E), (B) (I), Figures 55 (B) to (D), (B) (H) (I), (B) (C) (K), Figure 56 (B) ), (C), (G), (H), (I), and (J).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55(B), in the first effect, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped on the upper stage of the display screen 7a are It is in a reach mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 56(I) and 56(J).

[Modification]
A modification of the decorative symbol reverse movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. Also, the configuration of the decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C is an example, and some of the effects may not be provided.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol reverse movement performances A to C, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number "3". However, in the decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C, at least one of the middle decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L, and the right decorative symbol 8R may temporarily stop with a different number.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol reverse movement performances A to C, the decorative symbols that move in the direction opposite to the direction of variation may change their patterns. For example, the decorative pattern that moves in the direction opposite to the direction of variation may change in color or may change in size.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing a winner,
a first effect in which a plurality of decorative patterns of the set of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at a specific position on the display means;
After the first effect, at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols temporarily stopped at the specific position moves in a direction opposite to the direction of fluctuation while maintaining display, and then moves to the specific position. A second effect that stops at a position different from the
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the first effect, among the set of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols that are not temporarily stopped at the specific position are moving in the direction of fluctuation,
In the second effect, the decorative symbols moving in the varying direction in the first effect are temporarily stopped after continuously moving in the varying direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the first effect, the decorative pattern stopped at the specific position is in a reach mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern warp effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative pattern warp effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern warp effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern warp effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol warp effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern warp effect, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the fluctuating direction (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the reached part, and the display screen 7a is displayed. From the second area, the part of the decorative pattern that has reached the first area and disappeared appears in order. Figure 57 (A) ~ (I) shows an example of one variation of the special figure variation, Figure 57 (J) ~ (L) shows another example of one variation.

In the decorative symbol warp effect A, first, as shown in FIG. A lower area LE is displayed. Therefore, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are different in horizontal position (shifted from each other). The upper area UE and the lower area LE may be entirely identifiable from other parts by color or the like, or may not be identifiable in outline. Here, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are identifiable by their colors and patterns. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) from the upper region UE and enters the frame. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It represents a variable display (special figure fluctuation), and informs the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, a plurality of numerical patterns are arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement and displayed so as to be visually recognizable during variable display, and framed in from the upper side of the display screen 7a. to move downward and out of the frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 57(C), when the lowest number pattern "7" in the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, The display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see). Then, the parts that have disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (parts that have become difficult to see) appear in order from the upper area UE. Here, two parts that have disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (parts that have become difficult to see) appear from the upper area UE. One of the two becomes the left decorative design 8L and the other becomes the right decorative design 8R. In FIG. 57(C), the lower half of "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in turn), and reaches the lower area LE and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the decorative pattern 8C appears in order from the upper area UE. Two parts corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appear from the upper region UE, one being the left decorative pattern 8L and the other being the right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward while the same number patterns are horizontally arranged.

In FIG. 57(D), the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has disappeared after reaching the lower region LE, appears as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in order from the upper region UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to move downward in the pattern row, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward while the same number patterns are horizontally arranged.

In FIG. 57(E), the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has disappeared after reaching the lower region LE, appears as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in order from the upper region UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to move downward in the pattern row, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward while the same number patterns are horizontally arranged.

In FIG. 57(F), the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of the "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has disappeared after reaching the lower region LE, appears as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in order from the upper region UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to move downward in the pattern row, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward while the same number patterns are horizontally arranged.

In FIG. 57(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in order of "76543219", the number following "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, and "9" is the last number in the pattern row. It is patterned. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, the "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), as shown in FIG. 57(G). Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved and displayed in the order of "76543219". After the middle decorative design 8C is not displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at "1". Here, as shown in FIG. 57(H), when one number pattern out of "76543219" in each pattern arrangement temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. This results in a "1 1" reach mode.

After that, in FIG. 57(H), the middle decorative design 8C is displayed again in a state of being changed in the reach state where the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are "1". After that, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped (temporary stop display) when "1" is displayed, and the jackpot mode of "111" is established, and the game is fixed and stopped.

FIGS. 57(J) to (L) show examples of one variation different from FIGS. 57(A) to (I). In another variation, first, FIGS. 57(A) to (E) described above are performed. After FIG. 57(E), FIG. 57(J) to (L) are executed. In FIG. 57(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in order of "7654321987", the number following "7" in the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, and "7" is the last number in the pattern row. It is patterned. When the pattern row of the decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. Become. After the middle decorative design 8C is not displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at "8". Here, as shown in FIG. 57(K), when one number pattern of "123456789" is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a in each pattern arrangement, display of other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. This results in a reach mode of "8 8".

After that, in FIG. 57(K), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are in the reach state of "8", and the middle decorative design 8C is displayed again in a changed state. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped (temporary stop display) when "8" is displayed, and the jackpot mode of "888" is established, and the game is fixed and stopped.
[Decorative pattern warp effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol warp effect B. FIG. In the decorative pattern warp effect, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the fluctuating direction (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the reached part, and the display screen 7a is displayed. From the second area, the part of the decorative pattern that has reached the first area and disappeared appears in order.

In the decorative symbol warp effect B, first, as shown in FIG. A lower area LE is displayed. Therefore, the upper region UE and the lower region LE are different in horizontal position (shifted from each other). The upper area UE and the lower area LE may be entirely identifiable from other parts by color or the like, or may not be identifiable in outline. Here, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are identifiable by their colors and patterns. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) from the upper area UE and enters the frame.

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. A variable display (special figure fluctuation) is represented, and a special figure lottery result is notified by a set of stop display of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, a plurality of numerical patterns are arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement and displayed so as to be visually recognizable during variable display, and framed in from the upper side of the display screen 7a. to move downward and out of the frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), when the lowermost number pattern "7" in the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, The display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see). Then, the parts that have disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (parts that have become difficult to see) appear in order from the upper area UE. Here, one part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (a part that has become difficult to see) appears near the center of the upper area UE. This becomes the middle decorative pattern 8C. In FIG. 57(B), the lower half of "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and the left side where the display disappears after reaching the lower area LE. The lower half of "7" of the decorative pattern 8L appears in order from the upper area UE. A part corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears one from the vicinity of the center of the upper region UE and becomes the middle decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 58(C), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has disappeared after reaching the lower region LE, appears as the middle decorative pattern 8C in order from the upper region UE. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward and reaches the lower region LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) in order from the reached portion. Then, the parts that have disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (parts that have become difficult to see) appear in order from the upper area UE. Here, one part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (a part that has become difficult to see) appears near the right side of the upper area UE. This is the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58(C), the lower end of "6" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (it becomes difficult to see in turn), and the middle decorative pattern where the display disappears when reaching the lower area LE The lower end of "6" of 8C emerges from the upper area UE. A part corresponding to the lower end of "6" of the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears one near the right side of the upper region UE and becomes a right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward.

In FIG. 58(D), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has disappeared after reaching the lower region LE, appears as the middle decorative pattern 8C in order from the upper region UE. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward and reaches the lower region LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) in order from the reached portion. Then, the parts that have disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (parts that have become difficult to see) appear in order from the upper area UE. Here, one part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (a part that has become difficult to see) appears near the right side of the upper area UE. This is the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58(D), "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears (in turn becomes difficult to see), and the middle decorative pattern 8C that reaches the lower area LE and disappears is displayed. "4" emerges from the upper area UE. "4" of the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears one from the vicinity of the right side of the upper region UE and becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and when the number pattern reaches the lower region LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE.

In FIG. 58(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in order of "76543219", the number following "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L is not displayed, and "9" is the last number in the pattern row. It is patterned. When the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), as shown in FIG. 58(F). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is not displayed.

After that, in FIG. 58(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the order of "76543219" in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. , "9" is the last number pattern. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, as shown in FIG. ), as shown in FIG. 58(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed.

In FIG. 58(I), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the order of "76543219" like the other two decorative patterns 8L and 8C, and the number following "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R is not displayed. , "9" is the last number symbol in the symbol row. When the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, as shown in FIG. ), as shown in FIG. 58(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. As a result, none of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in the form of a jackpot of "888" from the state where they are not displayed.

[Decorative pattern warp effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol warp effect C. FIG. In the decorative pattern warp effect, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the fluctuating direction (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the reached part, and the display screen 7a is displayed. From the second area, the part of the decorative pattern that has reached the first area and disappeared appears in order. FIGS. 59A to 59I show an example of the decorative pattern warp effect C, and FIGS. 59J to 59L show other example modes.

In the decorative symbol warp effect C, unlike the decorative symbol warp effect A (FIG. 57) and the decorative symbol warp effect B (FIG. 58), the visible upper area UE and lower area LE are not displayed. Instead, a lower left area EL1, an upper left area EL2, a lower right area ER1, an upper right area ER2, a lower middle area EC1, and an upper middle area EC2 are set in which the entire area is difficult to distinguish from other areas. Hereinafter, the upper left area EL2, the upper right area ER2, and the upper middle area EC2 will also be collectively referred to as "upper areas EL2, EC2, and ER2," and the lower left area EL1, the lower right area ER1, and the lower middle area EC1 will be collectively referred to as the "lower area EL1, EL2, and EC2." Also referred to as EC1, ER1. Since a background image or the like is displayed in these areas indistinguishably from other areas of the display screen 7a, the player cannot distinguish between the inside and outside of the areas. Although these regions are described here as rectangular, the shape of the regions can be any shape. The upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 are different in horizontal position (shifted from each other). As shown in FIG. 59(A), during the special figure fluctuation, the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the fluctuation direction (downward) from the upper end of the display screen 7a and enters the frame. .

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. A variable display (special figure fluctuation) is represented, and a special figure lottery result is notified by a set of stop display of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, a plurality of numerical patterns are arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement and displayed so as to be visually recognizable during variable display, and framed in from the upper side of the display screen 7a. to move downward and out of the frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), when the lowermost number pattern "7" in the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, The display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portion that has disappeared after reaching the lower left area EL1 (the portion that has become difficult to see) appears in sequence from the upper left area EL2 and moves downward. The number pattern appearing from the upper left area EL2 is also the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, the left decorative patterns 8L are displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(B), the lower half of "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the decorative pattern 8L appears in order from the upper left area EL2. A portion corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears from the upper left area EL2 and becomes the second row of the left decorative pattern 8L.

In FIG. 59(C), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1, and the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has disappeared after reaching the lower left area EL1, appears in order from the upper left area EL2. The right decorative pattern 8R moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) and enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), when the lowermost number pattern "7" in the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the bottom right area ER1 of the display screen 7a, the reached portion The display disappears in order from (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portion that has disappeared after reaching the lower right region ER1 (the portion that has become difficult to see) appears in order from the upper right region ER2 and moves downward. The number pattern appearing from the upper right area ER2 is also the right decorative pattern 8R. That is, the right decorative patterns 8R are displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(D), the lower half of "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and reaches the lower right area ER1 and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears in order from the upper right area ER2. A portion corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears from the upper right region ER2 and becomes the second row of the right decorative pattern 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) and enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1, the display disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and reaches the lower left area EL1. Then, the lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has disappeared appears in order from the upper left area EL2.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), when the lowermost number pattern "7" in the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle and lower area EC1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the reached portion The display disappears in order from (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portion that has disappeared after reaching the middle-lower region EC1 (the portion that has become difficult to see) appears in order from the middle-upper region EC2 and moves downward. The number pattern appearing from the middle upper region EC2 is also the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, the middle decorative patterns 8C are displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(E), the lower half of "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle and lower region EC1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and reaches the middle and lower region EC1 and disappears. In addition, the lower half of "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears in order from the middle upper region EC2. A part corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the middle upper region EC2 and becomes the second row of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, the lower half of "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1, and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower right area ER1. The lower half of "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which has disappeared after reaching , appears in order from the upper right area ER2. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the order of "76543219", the number following "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L is not displayed, and "9" is the last number pattern in the pattern row. When the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and then appears in order from the upper left area EL2. It becomes only the left decorative pattern 8L.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "1". Here, in the pattern array included in the left decorative pattern 8L, when one of the number patterns "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern array disappears. Here, as shown in the previous FIG. 59(E), the lower half of the "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), and the upper left area EL2 When the lower half of "1" appears from , the display is switched, and "1" is temporarily stopped. That is, in this case, the number pattern that reaches the lower left area EL1 and the lower part disappears and the lower part appears from the upper left area EL2 becomes the number pattern that is stopped and displayed. . The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, the lower half of the "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1, and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower right area ER1. The lower half of "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which has disappeared after reaching , appears in order from the upper right region ER2. The pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C also continues to move downward, and the lower half of "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle and lower area EC1, and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in turn), and the middle and lower area EC1. The lower half of "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C whose display disappears after reaching , appears in order from the middle upper region EC2.

As shown in FIG. 59(G), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in order of "76543219", the number following "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R is not displayed, and "9" is the highest in the pattern row. It is the last number pattern. When the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, the "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and appears in order from the upper right area ER2. Only the rear right decorative pattern 8R is left. The pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle and lower area EC1, and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see in order), and the middle and lower area EC1. The lower half of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C whose display disappears after reaching , appears in order from the middle upper region EC2. The left decorative pattern 8L continues to be temporarily stopped at "1".

As shown in FIG. 59(H), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9". Here, in the pattern array included in the right decorative pattern 8R, when one number pattern of "76543219" is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a, display of other number patterns in the pattern array disappears. Here, as shown in the previous FIG. 59(G), the lower end of "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1 and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see sequentially), and the upper right area When the lower end of "9" appears from ER2, the display is switched and "9" is temporarily stopped. That is, here, the numerical symbols that reach the lower right area ER1, the lower part of the display disappears, and the lower part of the figure appears from the upper right area ER2, and the number symbols that are stopped and displayed. Become. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "2". Here, in the pattern array included in the middle decorative pattern 8C, when one of the number patterns "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern array disappears. Here, as shown in the previous FIG. 59(G), the lower end of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle and lower region EC1 and the display disappears (becomes difficult to see sequentially), and the middle and upper When the lower end portion of "2" appears from the region EC2, the display is switched, and "2" is temporarily stopped. That is, in this case, the numerical symbols that have reached the middle-lower area EC1, the display of the lower side disappears, and the lower-side part has appeared from the middle-upper area EC2 are stopped and displayed. becomes. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the "129" deviation mode.

FIG. 59(I) shows another example of the decorative pattern warp effect C. FIG. In FIGS. 59A to 59I, the upper end of the lower left area EL1 is positioned below the lower end of the upper left area EL2. Similarly, the upper end of the lower right region ER1 is positioned below the lower end of the upper right region ER2, and the upper end of the lower middle region EC1 is positioned lower than the lower end of the upper middle region EC2. However, as shown in FIG. 59I, the upper end of the lower left area EL1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the upper left area EL2. Similarly, the upper end of the lower right region ER1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the upper right region ER2, and the upper end of the middle lower region EC1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the middle upper region EC2.

59(J) to (L) show another example of the decorative pattern warp effect C. FIG. In FIGS. 59A to 59I, when the number patterns of the pattern rows (design arrays) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the lower regions EL1, EC1, and ER1 of the lower portion of the display screen 7a, The display disappears in order, and the disappeared portions appear in order from the upper areas EL2, EC2, and ER2. However, as shown in FIGS. 59(J) to (L), the number patterns in the pattern rows (design arrays) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R do not reach the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the lower part of the display screen 7a. There may be a time lag between the disappearance of the display and the appearance of the upper areas EL2, EC2, and ER2. Further, the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 and the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 may have different positions in the vertical direction. Also, the movement speed when reaching the upper areas EL2, EC2, and ER2 may differ from the movement speed when appearing from the lower areas EL1, EC1, and ER1 and moving downward.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern warp effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(C), it is possible to execute an effect of displaying a symbol row in which a plurality of middle decorative symbols 8C are arranged along the fluctuation direction on the display screen 7a, When one of the middle decorative patterns 8C included in the pattern row moving in the changing direction reaches the lower area LE of the display screen 7a, a first effect in which the display disappears in order from the reached part, and the upper part of the display screen 7a. A second effect can be performed in which the parts of the middle decorative pattern 8C that have reached the lower area LE and disappeared from the area UE appear in order. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58(B) and 59(B).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59A, the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 are displaced from each other in the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. In the lower area LE and the upper area UE in FIGS. 57(A) and 58(A), the part of the lower area LE where the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the part of the upper area UE where the decorative pattern appears are different. Horizontal positions are offset from each other. Therefore, if these parts are defined as a lower area LE and an upper area UE, it can be said that the lower area LE and the upper area UE are displaced from each other in the horizontal direction.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57A, the lower area LE is located below the upper area UE in the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58(A) and 59(A).

[Modification]
A modification of the decorative pattern warp effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are all identifiable by their colors and patterns. However, the upper area UE and the lower area LE may be arranged such that the inside and outside of the area cannot be identified. Also, the upper area UE and the lower area LE may be distinguished only by their outlines, and the same background image may be displayed inside the area as outside the area. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative symbol warp effect C.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the edge where the decorative pattern disappears in the lower area LE and the edge where the decorative pattern appears in the upper area UE extend in the horizontal direction. However, these edges may extend in directions intersecting the horizontal direction. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative symbol warp effect C.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol warp effects A and B, the lower area LE and the upper area UE have been explained as being a part of the fixed area of the display screen 7a. However, the positions of the lower area LE and the upper area UE on the display screen 7a may be changed, and the sizes of the areas may be changed. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative symbol warp effect C.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The display means is capable of executing an effect of displaying a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are arranged along the variation direction,
a first effect in which, when the decorative symbols included in the symbol row moving in the varying direction reach a first region of the display means, the display disappears in order from the reached portion;
a second effect in which parts of the decorative pattern that have reached the first area and disappeared appear in order from the second area of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The first region and the second region are horizontally shifted from each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the vertical direction, the first region is positioned below the second region,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol moving effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. This decorative design moving effect is executed while the decorative design is fluctuating. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative symbol movement effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern moving effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative symbol displayed on the display screen 7a moves in the first direction and the second part moves in the second direction. 60(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative symbol moving effect A, and FIGS. 60(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative symbol moving effect A.

In the first example of the decorative symbol movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed through the variation start effect. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the pending icon and the variable icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As the "8" symbol stops, a line L passing through the center of the "8" symbol and extending from the upper left to the lower right is displayed. A line L separates the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60(C) to 60(E), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The symbol part movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction and the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction. Here, the first part B1 moves in the upper right direction (first direction) away from the line L, and the second part B2 moves in the lower left direction (second direction) away from the line L.

FIG. 60(C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increase. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

FIG. 60(D) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

FIG. 60(E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 are gradually slowed down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update effect is a effect in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the object of the pattern part movement effect. Here, a "4" pattern is displayed instead of the divided "8" pattern. As a result, the reach mode is formed together with the "4" symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L.

In the second example of the decorative symbol movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed through the variation start effect. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the pending icon and the variable icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As the "8" symbol stops, a line L passing through the center of the "8" symbol and extending from the upper left to the lower right is displayed. A line L separates the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60(I) to 60(K), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The symbol part movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction and the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction. Here, the first portion B1 of the right decorative pattern 8R moves in the lower right direction (first direction) along the line L, and the second portion B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R moves in the upper left direction (second direction) along the line L. direction).

FIG. 60(I) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increase. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

FIG. 60(J) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

FIG. 60(K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 are gradually slowed down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update effect is a effect in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the object of the pattern part movement effect. Here, a "4" pattern is displayed instead of the divided "8" pattern. As a result, the reach mode is formed together with the "4" symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L.

[Decorative pattern moving effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative symbol displayed on the display screen 7a moves in the first direction and the second part moves in the second direction. 61(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative symbol moving effect B, and FIGS. 61(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative symbol moving effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the decorative symbol movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed through the variation start effect. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the pending icon and the variable icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the ready-to-win mode is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L stopped at the "4" symbol. With the stop of the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" design is made for each of the "4" design as the left decorative design 8L and the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R. line L is displayed. A line L separates the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(C) to 61(E), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The symbol part movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction and the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first portion B1 moves rightward along the line L (first direction), and the second portion B2 moves leftward along the line L ( second direction).

FIG. 61(C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increase. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

FIG. 61(D) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

FIG. 61(E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 are gradually slowed down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update effect is a effect in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the object of the pattern part movement effect. Here, instead of the divided "4" symbols, "5" symbols are displayed. As a result, the ready-to-win mode with the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-win mode with the "4" symbol.

In the second example of the decorative symbol movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed through the variation start effect. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the pending icon and the variable icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the ready-to-win mode is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L stopped at the "4" symbol. With the stop of the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" design is made for each of the "4" design as the left decorative design 8L and the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R. A vertical line L1 and a vertical line L2 passing through the center of the "4" symbol are displayed. The lines L1 and L2 divide the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3 and the fourth part B4 of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(I) to 61(K), a symbol part movement effect is executed. In the pattern part movement effect, the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction, the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction, the third part of the decorative pattern moves in the third direction, and the decorative pattern moves. This is an effect in which the fourth part of moves in the fourth direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first portion B1 moves in the upper left direction (first direction) away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2, and the second portion B2 moves along the line L1 and The third portion B3 moves in the upper right direction (third direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and the fourth portion B4 moves away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2. It moves in the lower left direction (fourth direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2.

FIG. 61(I) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first portion B1, the second portion B2, the third portion B3, and the fourth portion B4 gradually increase. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1, the second portion B2, the third portion B3, and the fourth portion B4 are the same.

FIG. 61(J) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speed of the first portion B1, the second portion B2, the third portion B3, and the fourth portion B4 is maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1, the second portion B2, the third portion B3, and the fourth portion B4 are the same.

FIG. 61(K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 are gradually slowed down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first portion B1, the second portion B2, the third portion B3, and the fourth portion B4 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update effect is a effect in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the object of the pattern part movement effect. Here, instead of the divided "4" symbols, "5" symbols are displayed. As a result, the ready-to-win mode with the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-win mode with the "4" symbol.

[Decorative pattern moving effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative symbol displayed on the display screen 7a moves in the first direction and the second part moves in the second direction. 62(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative symbol movement effect C, and FIGS. 62(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative symbol movement effect C.

In the first example of the decorative symbol movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed through the fluctuation start effect. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the pending icon and the variable icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the ready-to-win mode is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L stopped at the "4" symbol. With the stop of the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" design is made for each of the "4" design as the left decorative design 8L and the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R. line L is displayed. The first part P and the second part Q of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned symmetrically with respect to the line L.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(C) to (E), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The symbol part movement effect is an effect in which the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction and the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the point P (first portion) moves rightward (first direction) along the line L, and the point Q (second portion) moves along the line L. , to the left (second direction).

FIG. 62(C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, the display is performed such that the moving speed of the point P and the point Q gradually increases. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the points P and Q are the same.

FIG. 62(D) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, the display is performed such that the moving speeds of the points P and Q are maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the points P and Q are the same.

FIG. 62(E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, a display is performed in which the moving speeds of the points P and Q are gradually slowed down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the points P and Q are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update effect is a effect in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the object of the pattern part movement effect. Here, instead of the divided "4" symbols, "5" symbols are displayed. As a result, the ready-to-win mode with the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-win mode with the "4" symbol.

In the second example of the decorative symbol movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed through the variation start effect. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the pending icon and the variable icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the ready-to-win mode is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L stopped at the "4" symbol. With the stop of the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" design is made for each of the "4" design as the left decorative design 8L and the "4" design as the right decorative design 8R. A vertical line L1 and a vertical line L2 passing through the center of the "4" symbol are displayed. Point P (first part), point Q (second part), point R (third part), and point S (fourth part) of left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R correspond to lines L1 and L2. in a symmetrical position.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(I) to 62(K), a symbol part movement effect is executed. In the pattern part movement effect, the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction, the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction, the third part of the decorative pattern moves in the third direction, and the decorative pattern moves. This is an effect in which the fourth part of moves in the fourth direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the point P (first part) moves in the upper left direction (first direction) so as to move away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2, and the point Q (second portion) moves in the lower right direction (second direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and the point R (third portion) moves in the upper right direction (third direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2. , and the point S (fourth portion) moves in the lower left direction (fourth direction) away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2.

FIG. 62(I) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the points P, Q, R, and S gradually increase. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the points P, Q, R, and S are the same.

FIG. 62(J) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of points P, Q, R, and S are maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the points P, Q, R, and S are the same.

FIG. 62(K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the points P, Q, R, and S are gradually slowed down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the points P, Q, R, and S are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update effect is a effect in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the object of the pattern part movement effect. Here, instead of the divided "4" symbols, "5" symbols are displayed. As a result, the ready-to-win mode with the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-win mode with the "4" symbol.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol movement effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first portion B1 (point P) of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a and the second portion B1 (point Q) of the decorative pattern other than the first portion are It is possible to execute a pattern part movement effect (movement effect) that moves in another direction (FIGS. 60 (C) to (E), FIGS. 60 (I) to (K), FIGS. FIGS. 61(I)-(K), FIGS. 62(C)-(E), FIGS. 62(I)-(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel effect using the decorative pattern, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to "a production|presentation execution means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) is on one side of the line L (lines L1, L2) passing through the center of the decorative pattern, and the second part B2 (point Q) is 60(C)-(E), FIGS. 60(I)-(K), FIGS. 61(C)-(E), FIG. 61( I)-(K), FIGS. 62(C)-(E), and FIGS. 62(I)-(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel effect using the decorative pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) is moved in the first direction, and the same distance as the moving distance of the first part B1 (point P) is moved in the direction opposite to the first direction. It is possible to execute a pattern part movement effect (vs. movement effect) to move the second part B2 (point Q) (FIGS. 60(C) to (E), FIGS. 60(I) to (K), FIG. 61(C ) to (E), FIGS. 61(I) to (K), FIGS. 62(C) to (E), and FIGS. 62(I) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel effect using the decorative pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the magnitude of the acceleration, which is the differential of the moving speed of the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) in the pattern part movement effect (vs. movement effect), is the same. The first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) are moved so that According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel effect using the decorative pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the decorative symbol movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) that is the object of the pattern part movement effect is divided. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the point P and the point Q (the point P, the point Q, the point R, and the point S) may be moved without dividing the decorative pattern. In order not to divide, for example, it is conceivable that the decorative pattern is expanded or contracted in accordance with the movement of the point P and the point Q (the point P, the point Q, the point R, and the point S).

[Modification 2]
In the symbol part movement effect of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part (point Q) are configured to move in the in-plane direction of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, an effect of moving the first part and the second part in the out-of-plane direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a) may be employed. For example, it is conceivable to enlarge and reduce a part of the decorative pattern according to the movement of the point P and the point Q (the point P, the point Q, the point R, and the point S) back and forth.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the lines L1 (lines L1 and L2) are displayed so as to show how the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) is divided. Alternatively, the predetermined line may not be displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed only during a specific period of the symbol part movement effect.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the first portion B1 (point P) and the second portion B2 (point Q) of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) move away from each other (FIGS. 60(C)-(E), 60 (I) ~ (K), Figures 61 (C) ~ (E), Figures 61 (I) ~ (K), Figures 62 (C) ~ (E), Figures 62 (I) ~ (K)), After that, another pattern was displayed in place of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) that was the object of the pattern part movement effect (Fig. 60(F), Fig. 60(L), Fig. 61(F), Fig. 61(L), FIG. 62(F), FIG. 62(L)). On the other hand, the first portion B1 (point P) and the second portion B2 (point Q) of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) move away from each other, move closer to each other, and then move away from each other. You may perform the production|presentation of leaving|separating and approaching, such as moving like this. For example, in the first example of the decorative symbol movement effect A, FIG. 60 (C)→(D)→(E)→(D)→(C)→(D)→(E)→ You may execute such a production. At this time, in addition to the above configuration (FIG. 60(E)→(F)) in which the "4" pattern is displayed after moving away from each other, the divided decorative patterns 8R again constitute the "8" pattern after approaching each other. 60 (C)→(B)). In the latter case, the reach state may not be formed, and the result may be unbalanced.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect of decorative symbols on a display screen,
The effect execution means can execute a movement effect in which a first portion of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen and a second portion of the decorative pattern other than the first portion move in different directions. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The first portion is on one side of a line passing through the center of the decorative pattern, and the second portion is on the other side of the line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
The effect executing means moves the first part in a first direction and moves the second part in a direction opposite to the first direction by the same distance as the moving distance of the first part. is executable to
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
The effect execution means moves the first part and the second part so that the magnitude of acceleration, which is the differential of the movement speed of the first part and the second part in the pair movement effect, is the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The effect execution means targets a plurality of decorative patterns, and executes the moving effect in synchronization with the plurality of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
The effect execution means moves the first portion, which has moved in the first direction, in the second direction after the pair movement effect, and moves the first portion in the second direction by the same distance as the moving distance of the first portion. It is possible to execute a continuation-to-movement effect of moving the moved second part in the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Mode change fluctuation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. This mode change variation effect is executed in conjunction with the decorative symbol variation start effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Aspect change fluctuation production A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the aspect change fluctuation effect A. FIG. In the aspect change variation effect, all the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a are changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols are changed to the second aspect. It is an effect that changes from to the third mode and starts the fluctuation.

In the mode change variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a character display effect is executed. The character display effect is a effect of displaying an ally character on the screen. Here, an ally character CRA overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C is not visible (visible). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are partially covered with the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change effect is a effect of changing all the decorative symbols in a plurality of rows from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the modes of the left, middle and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The middle decorative pattern 8C is invisible by the ally character CRA. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are partially covered with the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a character non-display effect is executed. The character non-display effect is a effect for hiding the ally character. Here, the ally character CRA is hidden, and left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. The mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a 7-segment display mode (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(E) and (F), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols in a predetermined row move in the horizontal direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves rightward as indicated by arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves leftward as indicated by arrow Y2.

In FIG. 63(E), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and approach the "7" design as the middle decorative design 8C. In FIG. 63(F), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R further move in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and overlap the "7" design as the middle decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a middle symbol change effect (second change effect) is executed. The middle pattern change production is a production that changes the mode of the middle decoration pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from the 7-segment display mode (second mode) to the simple display mode (third mode). The middle decorative design 8C overlaps the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, and is displayed on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(H) and (I), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols in a predetermined row move in the horizontal direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward as indicated by arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward as indicated by arrow Y2.

In FIG. 63(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and are separated from the "7" design as the middle decorative design 8C. In FIG. 63(I), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move further in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and are further separated from the "7" design as the middle decorative design 8C to the normal display position (FIG. 63). (D)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(J) to (L), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of rows of decorative symbols start to change.
In FIG. 63(J), the left decorative pattern 8L has started to fluctuate. The left decorative pattern 8L becomes transparent or semi-transparent after the fluctuation starts. In FIG. 63(K), the right decorative pattern 8R has started to fluctuate. The right decorative pattern 8R becomes transparent or semi-transparent after the fluctuation starts. In FIG. 63(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C has started to change. The middle decorative pattern 8C becomes transparent or translucent display after the fluctuation starts.

In FIGS. 63(J) to (L), the variation is started in the order of the left decorative design 8L→right decorative design 8R→middle decorative design 8C, but the variation may be started in any order. For example, the variation may be started in the order of left decorative design 8L→middle decorative design 8C→right decorative design 8R. Further, for example, the variation may be started in the order of right decorative design 8R→middle decorative design 8C→left decorative design 8L. Also, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may start to change in parallel. The phrase “in parallel” is intended to include the case where the fluctuations are started at the same time as well as the case where the fluctuations are started with a slight delay.

[Aspect change fluctuation effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining mode change fluctuation effect B. FIG. In the aspect change variation production, all the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a are changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols are changed to the second aspect. It is an effect that changes from to the third mode and starts the fluctuation.

In the mode change variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64B and 64C, a character movement effect is executed. The character movement effect is a effect in which an ally character moves on the screen. A production using animation may be used. In FIG. 64B, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After that, the ally character CRA moves upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y, and is gradually enlarged. In FIG. 64(C), the teammate character CRA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A line image SG saying "It's hot" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

In the character movement effect, all of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are hidden. In other words, during the character movement effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change effect is a effect of changing all the decorative symbols in a plurality of rows from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the modes of the left, middle and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The middle decorative design 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the left and right decorative designs 8L and 8R, and the middle decorative design 8C partially covers the right decorative design 8R. The left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed slightly inside the normal display position (FIG. 64(H)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a middle symbol reduction effect is executed. The middle pattern reduction production is a production in which the middle decorative pattern is gradually reduced and displayed. Here, the "7" pattern is reduced as the middle decorative pattern 8C of the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C has a larger size than the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a middle symbol change effect (second change effect) is executed. The middle pattern change production is a production that changes the mode of the middle decoration pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from the 7-segment display mode (second mode) to the simple display mode (third mode). The middle decorative pattern 8C has a larger size than the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a middle symbol reduction effect is executed. The middle pattern reduction production is a production in which the middle decorative pattern is gradually reduced and displayed. Here, the "7" pattern is reduced as the middle decorative pattern 8C of the simple display mode (third mode). At this stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C has the same size as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols in a predetermined row move in the horizontal direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward as indicated by arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward as indicated by arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(I) to (K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of rows of decorative symbols start to change.
In FIG. 64(I), the left decorative pattern 8L has started to fluctuate. The left decorative pattern 8L becomes transparent or semi-transparent after the fluctuation starts. In FIG. 64(J), the right decorative pattern 8R has started to fluctuate. The right decorative pattern 8R becomes transparent or semi-transparent after the fluctuation starts. In FIG. 64(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C has started to change. The middle decorative pattern 8C becomes transparent or translucent display after the fluctuation starts.

In FIGS. 64(I) to (K), the variation is started in the order of the left decorative design 8L→right decorative design 8R→middle decorative design 8C, but the variation may be started in any order. For example, the variation may be started in the order of left decorative design 8L→middle decorative design 8C→right decorative design 8R. Further, for example, the variation may be started in the order of right decorative design 8R→middle decorative design 8C→left decorative design 8L. Also, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may start to change in parallel. The phrase “in parallel” is intended to include the case where the fluctuations are started at the same time as well as the case where the fluctuations are started with a slight delay.

[Aspect change fluctuation effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the aspect change fluctuation effect C. FIG. In the aspect change variation production, all the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a are changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols are changed to the second aspect. It is an effect that changes from to the third mode and starts the fluctuation.

In the mode change variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65B and 65C, a character movement effect is executed. The character movement effect is a effect in which an ally character moves on the screen. A production using animation may be used. In FIG. 65B, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After that, the ally character CRA moves upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y, and is gradually enlarged. In FIG. 65(C), the teammate character CRA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A line image SG saying "It's hot" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

In the character movement effect, all of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are hidden. In other words, during the character movement effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change effect is a effect of changing all the decorative symbols in a plurality of rows from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the modes of the left, middle and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The middle decorative design 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the left and right decorative designs 8L and 8R, and the middle decorative design 8C partially covers the right decorative design 8R. The left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed slightly inside the normal display position (FIG. 64(H)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(E) and 65(F), a middle symbol reduction effect is executed. The middle pattern reduction production is a production in which the middle decorative pattern is gradually reduced and displayed. In FIG. 65(E), the "7" pattern is reduced as the middle decorative pattern 8C of the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C has a larger size than the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In FIG. 65(F), the "7" pattern is further reduced as the middle decorative pattern 8C of the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C has the same size as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a middle symbol change effect (second change effect) is executed. The middle pattern change production is a production that changes the mode of the middle decoration pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from the 7-segment display mode (second mode) to the simple display mode (third mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative symbol movement effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols in a predetermined row move in the horizontal direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward as indicated by arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward as indicated by arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), a middle symbol change effect is executed. The middle pattern change production is a production that changes the mode of the middle decoration pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from the simple display mode (third mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(J) to (L), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of rows of decorative symbols start to change.
In FIG. 65(J), the left decorative pattern 8L has started to fluctuate. The left decorative pattern 8L becomes transparent or semi-transparent after the fluctuation starts. In FIG. 65(K), the right decorative pattern 8R has started to fluctuate. The right decorative pattern 8R becomes transparent or semi-transparent after the fluctuation starts. In FIG. 65(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C has started to change. The middle decorative pattern 8C becomes transparent or translucent display after the fluctuation starts.

In FIGS. 65(J) to (L), the variation is started in the order of the left decorative design 8L→right decorative design 8R→middle decorative design 8C, but the variation may be started in any order. For example, the variation may be started in the order of left decorative design 8L→middle decorative design 8C→right decorative design 8R. Further, for example, the variation may be started in the order of right decorative design 8R→middle decorative design 8C→left decorative design 8L. Also, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may start to change in parallel. The phrase “in parallel” is intended to include the case where the fluctuations are started at the same time as well as the case where the fluctuations are started with a slight delay.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the aspect change variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a mode change effect for changing all of the plurality of columns of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). (First change effect) is executed (Fig. 63(C), Fig. 64(D), Fig. 65(D)), and thereafter, the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of multiple rows is started (Fig. 63 (J)-(L), FIGS. 64(I)-(K), and FIGS. 65(J)-(L)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbols is novel, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to "a production|presentation execution means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after executing the mode change effect (first change effect), before starting the variable effect of the plurality of rows of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols A middle pattern change effect (second change effect) is executed to change the decorative pattern 8C from the 7-segment display mode (second mode) to the simple display mode (third mode) (Fig. 63 (G), Fig. 64 (F) , FIG. 65(G)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbols is novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in at least one of the 7-segment display mode (second mode) and the simple display mode (third mode), the middle decorative pattern 8C is attached to the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in adjacent rows. A part of them is overlapped and displayed (Fig. 63(G), Fig. 64(D), Fig. 65(D)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbols is novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character display effect ( 63(B)(C)) and character movement effects (FIGS. 64(B)(C), 65(B)(C)) are performed. According to this configuration, the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbols is novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the aspect change variation effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the speech image SG saying "It's hot" is displayed in the character movement effect to indicate the degree of expectation for the big win, but the information indicating the degree of expectation for the big win may not be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the middle decorative design 8C has changed (Fig. 63(G), Fig. 64(F), Fig. 65(G)). Instead of the middle decorative design 8C, the left decorative design 8L or the right decorative design 8R may be changed. Further, two of the left, middle, right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed, or three decorative patterns may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, character display effects (FIGS. 63B and 63C) and character movement effects (FIGS. 64B and 64C, and FIGS. 65B and 65C) are performed. At this time, only one image of the ally character CRA is displayed. On the other hand, an effect may be provided in which a plurality of specific images are displayed. At this time, the effect may be such that the number of specific images gradually increases.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect of decorative symbols on a display screen,
The effect executing means executes a first changing effect for changing all the stationary and displayed plural rows of decorative symbols from the first mode to the second mode, and then starts the variable effect of the plural rows of decorative symbols. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
After the execution of the first change effect, the effect executing means changes the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols from the second mode to the second mode before starting the variable effect of the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Execute a second change effect that changes to 3 modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In at least one of the second mode and the third mode, the decorative designs of the predetermined row are displayed partially overlapping the decorative designs of the adjacent rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an invisible effect that makes the decorative pattern difficult to see in accordance with the change in the mode of the decorative pattern accompanying the first change effect or the second change effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. This decorative pattern change effect is executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern change effect A]
66(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the decorative symbol change effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol change effect A is an effect in which the decorative symbol changes during the variable effect, and the variable display and stop display are performed. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In executing the decorative pattern change effect A, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, the numerals of the numeric image representing the content of each decorative pattern are represented by Arabic numerals (hereinafter referred to as Arabic numerals), Roman numerals (hereinafter referred to as Roman numerals), and Chinese numerals. It is possible to change to three types of display modes, namely, a mode represented in large letters (hereinafter referred to as a mode in large letters).

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the variable performance is assumed to take over the display mode of the decorative symbols fixed and stopped displayed after the end of the variable performance executed immediately before. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in the Roman mode after the end of the variable performance, and each of them is fixed and stopped, the variable performance to be executed next is determined. The display mode of each decorative design at the start is such that the left decorative design 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative design 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative design 8R is in the Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable effect. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, it is possible to change the display mode from the roman mode to the large letter mode from the decorative pattern framed in the transition to the decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by the respective decorative patterns are aligned with "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in the decorative patterns displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative patterns after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement will be "123 辆伍Riku Lacquer 獌玖", From the next lap onwards, it will be ``Ichi-ni-san, fu-riku lacquer-swapping.'' Further, for example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols can be changed from the large font mode to the Arabic mode. As described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when the finalized stop is performed after the end of the previous variable effect. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, if it changes to a large character mode and is confirmed and stopped, the pattern array that is displayed in the next fluctuation production continues with "lacquer 捌玖", and from the next round "Ichino San 肆 伍 lacquer It becomes "Sakuku".

Furthermore, the decorative design may be configured by combining a number image representing the content of the decorative design and a character image. In this case, the display mode may be changed in addition to or instead of the display mode of the numeric image. For example, as display modes of the character image, there are a facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces left. The display mode is arbitrarily changed at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that after the end of the variable performance that was executed before this variable performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode. The explanation will be continued assuming that the result of the figure lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R undergo deceleration fluctuations. Note that the order from high-speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display is switched from the high-speed variation display to the deceleration variation display in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are displayed by deceleration variation, the display mode of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is It changes from Arabic style to Roman style. Here, in the left decorative design 8L, the display mode of the decorative design representing "7" changes from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode, and all the decorative designs to be framed thereafter are in the Roman mode. In addition, in the right decorative design 8R, the display mode of the decorative design representing "4" changes from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode, and all the decorative designs to be framed after this change to the Roman mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern representing "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R may be the Roman mode at the time of frame-in, or the Arabic mode. The mode may change to the Roman mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are displayed by deceleration variation, the display mode of the left decorative design 8L is changed from the Roman style to the large style. change to Here, in the left decorative design 8L, the display mode of the decorative design representing "1" changes from the Roman mode to the large-character mode, and all the decorative designs to be framed thereafter are in the large-character mode. The display mode of the decorative design representing "1" in the left decorative design 8L may be in the large font mode at the time of frame-in, or may be changed from the Roman mode to the large-character mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which have been displayed in slowdown variation, are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed to represent "3" in the large font style, "5" in the Arabic style, and "9" in the Roman style, respectively. . The order in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped may be set arbitrarily. For example, the deceleration fluctuation display is completed and the temporary stop display is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs temporarily stopped in the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. The display mode changes accordingly. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol representing "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol 8L changes from the large font mode to the Arabic mode, and the right decorative symbol 8R represents "9" temporarily stopped and displayed. The display mode of the decorative design changes from the Roman mode to the Arabic mode. After that, the variable performance is finished, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The display example of the decorative symbol change effect A has been described above. By adopting a configuration capable of executing the decorative pattern change effect A, the display mode of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed during the deceleration fluctuation display or the temporary stop display. As a result, it is possible to amuse the player with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable performance, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Decorative pattern change effect B]
66(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative symbol change effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern change effect B is a effect in which the decorative pattern changes during the variable effect, and the variable display and stop display are performed. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as well.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In executing the decorative pattern change effect B, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, it is possible to change to each of the three types of display modes, namely, the Arabic mode, the Roman mode, and the large-character mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the variable performance is assumed to take over the display mode of the decorative symbols fixed and stopped displayed after the end of the variable performance executed immediately before. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in the Roman mode after the end of the variable performance, and each of them is fixed and stopped, the variable performance to be executed next is determined. The display mode of each decorative design at the start is such that the left decorative design 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative design 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative design 8R is in the Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable effect. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, it is possible to change the display mode from the Roman mode to the large-character mode from a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by the respective decorative patterns are aligned with "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in the decorative patterns displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative patterns after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement will be "123 辆伍Riku Lacquer 獌玖", From the next lap onwards, it will be ``Ichi-ni-san, fu-riku lacquer-swapping.'' Further, for example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols can be changed from the large font mode to the Arabic mode. As described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when the finalized stop is performed after the end of the previous variable effect. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, if it changes to a large character mode and is confirmed and stopped, the pattern array that is displayed in the next fluctuation production continues with "lacquer 捌玖", and from the next round "Ichino San 肆 伍 lacquer It becomes "Sakuku".

Furthermore, the decorative design may be configured by combining a number image representing the content of the decorative design and a character image. In this case, the display mode may be changed in addition to or instead of the display mode of the numeric image. For example, as display modes of the character image, there are a facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces left. The display mode is arbitrarily changed at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(G), a variable effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that after the end of the variable performance that was executed before this variable performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode. The explanation will be continued assuming that the result of the figure lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, in the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the decorative design representing "4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in an Arabic manner to form a reach. Note that the order in which the temporary stop display is performed may be set arbitrarily. For example, the variable display may be switched to the temporary stop display in the order of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, or the variable display may be switched to the temporary stop display in the order of the right decorative design 8R and the left decorative design 8L. . Also, the change in display mode may be executed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are temporarily stopped is changed from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. Here, in the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the display mode of the decorative design representing "4" changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. The display mode of the left decorative design 8L representing "4" and the right decorative design 8R representing "4" may be changed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below. Also, the order in which the display mode changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display modes of the decorative patterns representing "4" temporarily stopped may be simultaneously changed to the large character mode, or the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed. You may make it change in order of 8R, and may make it change in order of the right decorative design 8R and the left decorative design 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(J), the middle decorative symbol 8C that has been variably displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the Arabic mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(K), the display modes of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, all change. Here, in the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the display mode of the decorative design representing "4" changes from the large font mode to the Roman mode, and in the middle decorative design 8C, the display mode of the decorative design representing "5" is displayed. The form changes from Roman form to large letter form. The order in which the display mode of each decorative pattern changes may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order in which the display modes change may be the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The order of the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L, and the middle decorative design 8C may be used, or the order of the right decorative design 8R, the middle decorative design 8C, and the left decorative design 8L may be used. The order may be the right decorative design 8R, or the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, and the left decorative design 8L. Also, after two decorative designs are changed at the same time, the remaining one decorative design may be changed, or after one decorative design is changed, two decorative designs may be changed at the same time. Furthermore, all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(L), the left decorative design 8L among the decorative designs temporarily stopped in the left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R that have been temporarily stopped and displayed. , the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R changes again. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols representing "4" temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode. Note that the order in which the display modes change may be set arbitrarily. For example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may be changed in order, the right decorative design 8R and the left decorative design 8L may be changed in order, or both may be changed at the same time. good too. After that, the variable performance is finished, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The display example of the decorative symbol change effect B has been described above. By adopting a configuration in which the decorative pattern change effect B can be executed, the display mode of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R changes during the temporary stop display that is the ready-to-win state. , it is possible to amuse the player with the display of decorative patterns in the variable performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change effect C]
67(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the decorative symbol change effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern change effect C is a effect in which the decorative pattern changes during the variable effect, and the variable display and stop display are performed. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as well.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In executing the decorative pattern change effect C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, it is possible to change to each of the three types of display modes, namely, the Arabic mode, the Roman mode, and the large-character mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the variable performance is assumed to take over the display mode of the decorative symbols fixed and stopped displayed after the end of the variable performance executed immediately before. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in the Roman mode after the end of the variable performance, and each of them is fixed and stopped, the variable performance to be executed next is determined. The display mode of each decorative design at the start is such that the left decorative design 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative design 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative design 8R is in the Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable effect. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, it is possible to change the display mode from the Roman mode to the large-character mode from a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by the respective decorative patterns are aligned with "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in the decorative patterns displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative patterns after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement will be "123 辆伍Riku Lacquer 獌玖", From the next lap onwards, it will be ``Ichi-ni-san, fu-riku lacquer-swapping.'' Further, for example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols can be changed from the large font mode to the Arabic mode. As described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when the finalized stop is performed after the end of the previous variable effect. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, if it changes to a large character mode and is confirmed and stopped, the pattern array that is displayed in the next fluctuation production continues with "lacquer 捌玖", and from the next round "Ichino San 肆 伍 lacquer It becomes "Sakuku".

Furthermore, the decorative design may be configured by combining a number image representing the content of the decorative design and a character image. In this case, the display mode may be changed in addition to or instead of the display mode of the numeric image. For example, as display modes of the character image, there are a facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces left. The display mode is arbitrarily changed at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the Arabic mode, and the other decorative patterns are displayed in a high-speed variation and are difficult to see. This is a state in which the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and after each content becomes difficult to see, only the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that after the end of the variable performance that was executed before this variable performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode. The explanation will be continued assuming that the result of the figure lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the display mode of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is changed from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. This change in display mode may be executed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), in the right decorative pattern 8R that has been variably displayed, the Arabic decorative pattern representing "8" is temporarily stopped. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped is changed from the Arabic mode to the large-character mode. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), in the medium decorative pattern 8C that has been displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern in the Arabic mode representing "5" is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the display modes of all of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols in the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are changed. . Specifically, the display mode of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R changes from the large-character mode to the Arabic mode, and the display mode of the middle decorative design 8C changes from the Arabic mode to the large-character mode. The order in which the display mode of each decorative pattern changes may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order in which the display modes change may be the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The order of the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L, and the middle decorative design 8C may be used, or the order of the right decorative design 8R, the middle decorative design 8C, and the left decorative design 8L may be used. The order may be the right decorative design 8R, or the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, and the left decorative design 8L. Also, after two decorative designs are changed at the same time, the remaining one decorative design may be changed, or after one decorative design is changed, two decorative designs may be changed at the same time. Furthermore, all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed at the same time. After that, the variable performance is finished, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative symbol change effect C. By adopting a configuration in which the decorative pattern change effect C can be executed, the display mode of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R changes during the temporary stop display, so that the decoration in the variable production It is possible to amuse the player with the display of the patterns, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Decorative pattern change effect D]
67(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative symbol change effect D. FIG. The decorative pattern change effect D is a effect in which the decorative pattern changes during the variable effect, and the variable display and stop display are performed. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In executing the decorative pattern change effect D, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, there are a frameless mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is not surrounded by a pattern frame image, a hexagonal frame mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is surrounded by a hexagonal pattern frame, and a decorative pattern. It is possible to change to three types of display mode, ie, a circular frame mode in which the numeric image included in the is surrounded by a circular pattern frame. In the following, regarding the notation of decorative patterns, there are cases where it is simply written according to the contents of the decorative pattern, such as "4", and notations that include the display mode, such as "4 (no)" and "6 (yen)". sometimes.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the variable performance is assumed to take over the display mode of the decorative symbols fixed and stopped displayed after the end of the variable performance executed immediately before. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is in the non-frame mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the hexagonal frame mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in the circular frame mode after the end of the variable effect, and each of them is fixed and stopped, the process is executed next. The display mode of each decorative design at the start of the variable effect is such that the left decorative design 8L is in the frameless mode, the middle decorative design 8C is in the hexagonal frame mode, and the right decorative design 8R is in the circular frame mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable effect. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, it is possible to change the display mode from a hexagonal frame mode to a frameless mode from a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by the respective decorative patterns are aligned with "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in the decorative patterns displayed in the frameless number mode, if the display mode of the decorative patterns after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the hexagonal frame mode, the pattern arrangement will be "1 (no) 2 (no) 3 (None) 4 (Hexagon) 5 (Hexagon) 6 (Hexagon) 7 (Hexagon) 8 (Hexagon) 9 (Hexagon)" (Hexagon) 5 (Hexagon) 6 (Hexagon) 7 (Hexagon) 8 (Hexagon) 9 (Hexagon)". Further, for example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols can be changed from the circular frame mode to the hexagonal frame mode. As described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode at the time of final stop after the end of the previous variable effect. After the decorative pattern of the mode is temporarily stopped, if it changes to the hexagonal frame mode and is fixed and stopped, the pattern array that is variably displayed in the next variable effect continues with "7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)". From the next round, it becomes "1 (hexagon) 2 (hexagon) 3 (hexagon) 4 (hexagon) 5 (hexagon) 6 (hexagon) 7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)".

Furthermore, the decorative design may be configured by combining a number image representing the content of the decorative design and a character image. In this case, the display mode may be changed in addition to or instead of the display mode of the pattern frame. For example, as display modes of the character image, there are a facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces left. The display mode is arbitrarily changed at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(G), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-framed manner, and the other decorative patterns are rapidly fluctuated and displayed to be difficult to see. This is a state in which the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and after each content becomes difficult to see, only the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that after the end of the variable performance executed before this variable performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and displayed in a frameless mode, and furthermore, this variable performance is triggered. The explanation continues assuming that the result of the special lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the display mode of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is changed from the frameless mode to the hexagonal frame mode. This change in display mode may be executed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(I), among the right decorative symbols 8R that have been variably displayed, the unframed decorative symbols representing "6" are temporarily stopped to form reach. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped is changed from the frameless mode to the hexagonal frame mode. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(K), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped is changed from the hexagonal frame mode to the circular frame mode. The order in which the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change may be set arbitrarily. That is, the display modes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may be changed simultaneously, or may be changed in order of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, or the right decorative design 8R, You may make it change in order of 8 L of left decorative designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(L), in the middle decorative pattern 8C that has been variably displayed, the frameless decorative pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped, and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern is displayed. The display mode of 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changes. Specifically, the display mode of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R changes from the circular frame mode to the hexagonal frame mode. The order in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and the display modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are changed may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order may be a change in the display mode of the left decorative design 8L, a change in the display mode of the right decorative design 8R, and a temporary stop of the middle decorative design 8C, or a change in the display mode of the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C. , a change in the display mode of the right decorative design 8R, or a change in the display mode of the right decorative design 8R, a change in the display mode of the left decorative design 8L, and a temporary stop of the middle decorative design 8C. Alternatively, the display mode of the right decorative design 8R may be changed, the middle decorative design 8C may be temporarily stopped, and the left decorative design 8L may be temporarily stopped, or the left decorative design 8L may be temporarily stopped. change in display mode, change in display mode for right decorative design 8R, or temporary stop for middle decorative design 8C, change in display mode for right decorative design 8R, change in display mode for left decorative design 8L, can be in that order. Further, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be temporarily stopped after the display modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are changed simultaneously, or the display modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be changed simultaneously after the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. You may Further, the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R may be changed to the infant mode and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be temporarily stopped at the same time. After that, the variable performance is finished, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative symbol change effect D. By adopting a configuration in which the decorative pattern change effect D can be executed, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed during the temporary stop display that is the ready-to-win state. , it is possible to amuse the player with the display of decorative patterns in the variable performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change effect E]
68(A) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative symbol change effect E. FIG. The decorative pattern change effect E is a effect in which the decorative pattern changes during the variable effect, and the variable display and stop display are performed. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In executing the decorative pattern change effect E, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, it is possible to change to each of the three types of display modes, namely, the Arabic mode, the Roman mode, and the large-character mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the variable performance is assumed to take over the display mode of the decorative symbols fixed and stopped displayed after the end of the variable performance executed immediately before. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in the Roman mode after the end of the variable performance, and each of them is fixed and stopped, the variable performance to be executed next is determined. The display mode of each decorative design at the start is such that the left decorative design 8L is in the Arabic mode, the middle decorative design 8C is in the large font mode, and the right decorative design 8R is in the Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable effect. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, it is possible to change the display mode from the Roman mode to the large-character mode from a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by the respective decorative patterns are aligned with "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in the decorative patterns displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative patterns after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement will be "123 辆伍Riku Lacquer 獌玖", From the next lap onwards, it will be ``Ichi-ni-san, fu-riku lacquer-swapping.'' Further, for example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols can be changed from the large font mode to the Arabic mode. As described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when the finalized stop is performed after the end of the previous variable effect. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, if it changes to a large character mode and is confirmed and stopped, the pattern array that is displayed in the next fluctuation production continues with "lacquer 捌玖", and from the next round "Ichino San 肆 伍 lacquer It becomes "Sakuku".

Furthermore, the decorative design may be configured by combining a number image representing the content of the decorative design and a character image. In this case, the display mode may be changed in addition to or instead of the display mode of the numeric image. For example, as display modes of the character image, there are a facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces left. The display mode is arbitrarily changed at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that after the end of the variable performance that was executed before this variable performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode. The explanation will be continued assuming that the result of the figure lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R which have been displayed in high speed variation, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in deceleration variation. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is decelerated and displayed so that at least two of the decorative designs included in the design arrangement of the left decorative design 8L can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, which is being displayed in slowdown variation, changes from the Arabic mode to the large-character mode. Here, in the left decorative design 8L, the display mode of the decorative design representing "3" is changed from the Arabic mode to the large-character mode, and all the decorative designs to be framed thereafter are in the large-character mode. The display mode of the decorative design representing "3" in the left decorative design 8L may be a large font mode at the time of frame-in, or may be changed from an Arabic mode to a Roman mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, which has been displayed in a decelerating manner, the decorative pattern in the large character mode representing "6" is temporarily stopped. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the display mode of the decorative symbol representing "6" temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol 8L changes from the large character mode to the Roman mode. This change may be performed with animation. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the right decorative symbol 8R that has been displayed with high speed variation is displayed with deceleration variation. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and displayed so that at least two of the decorative patterns included in the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained in the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is being displayed in deceleration variation, changes from the Arabic mode to the large-character mode. Here, in the right decorative design 8R, the display mode of the decorative design representing "7" is changed from the Arabic mode to the large letter mode, and all the decorative designs to be framed thereafter are in the large letter mode. The display mode of the decorative design representing "7" in the left decorative design 8L may be a large font mode at the time of frame-in, or may be changed from an Arabic mode to a Roman mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation. Incidentally, the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained in the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), in the right decorative pattern 8R that has been displayed in the deceleration variation mode, the decorative pattern in the large character mode representing "9" is temporarily stopped. Incidentally, the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained in the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the display mode of the decorative symbol representing "9" temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol 8R changes from the large character mode to the Roman mode. This change may be performed with animation. Incidentally, the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained in the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C that has been displayed in high speed fluctuation display is changed to deceleration fluctuation display, and the Arabic decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the temporary stop of the Roman style decorative pattern representing "6", and the temporary stop of the Roman style decorative pattern representing "9" is maintained at the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(K), the display mode of the decorative symbol representing "3" temporarily stopped in the middle decorative symbol 8C changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. This change may be performed with animation. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the temporary stop of the Roman style decorative pattern representing "6", and the temporary stop of the Roman style decorative pattern representing "9" is maintained at the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(L), a decorative symbol representing "6" temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol 8L and a decorative symbol representing "9" temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol 8R. , are changed from the Roman style to the large font style. The order of changing the display mode may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display modes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may be changed simultaneously, or the display modes may be changed in the order of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, or the right decorative design 8R. , and the left decorative pattern 8L. After that, the variable performance is finished, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

A display example of the decorative symbol change effect E has been described above. By adopting a configuration capable of executing the decorative pattern change effect E, the display mode of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed during the deceleration fluctuation display or the temporary stop display. As a result, it is possible to amuse the player with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable performance, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 66 to 68, the number of times the display modes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the start of the variable effect to the end depends on the decorative symbols. Different productions are possible. For example, the number of changes in the display mode in the decorative design change effect A is 3 times for the left decorative design 8L, 0 times for the middle decorative design 8C, and 2 times for the right decorative design 8R. In addition, the number of changes in the display mode in the decorative design change effect B is three times for the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, and one time for the middle decorative design 8C. The number of changes in the display mode in the decorative design change effect C is two times for the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, and one time for the middle decorative design 8C. The number of changes in the display mode in the decorative design change effect D is 3 times for the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, and 0 times for the middle decorative design 8C. The number of changes in the display mode in the decorative design change effect E is three times for the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, and one time for the middle decorative design 8C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to the "display means" in claim 1.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66(G) to (K), a first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, and after the first effect, the left decoration a second effect in which the display mode of the pattern 8L changes from the Arabic mode to the large-character mode; After the 2nd effect, the fourth effect in which the display mode of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66(G) to (K), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed after the first effect and before the second effect. A fifth effect and a sixth effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed after the second effect and before the fourth effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66(K) to (L), after the third effect, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern change performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the time of fixed stop may be changed according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered the variable performance will win. For example, the decorative pattern at the time of fixed stop is such that the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered the variable performance will be won in the order of the Arabic mode, the large letter mode, and the Roman mode is increased.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern change effect, a decorative pattern configured by combining a character image, a number image, and a pattern frame may be used. In this case, the positional relationship between the character image, the number image, and the pattern frame may be changed as the change in the display mode of the decorative pattern. Also, in this case, as the change in the display mode, the pose or facial expression of the character image may be changed. In addition, the character's voice or sound may be output, or the displayed character may change to another character. Furthermore, in this case, the size of the pattern frame may be changed as a change in the display mode of the decorative pattern.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative design change effect, the numeric image representing the content of the decorative design may become difficult to see by changing the display mode of the decorative design. In addition to this, other character strings may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
When the display mode of the decorative design changes in the decorative design change production, it may be switched to another display mode at the start of the next variation production. For example, it is assumed that the display mode is always in the Arabic mode at the start of the variable performance, and when the fixed stop is made in the large font mode after the end of a certain variable performance, the display mode changes to the Arabic mode at the start of the next variable performance. .

[Modification 5]
The effects described in the decorative pattern change effects A to E may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of decorative patterns,
The plurality of decorative patterns may change in display mode,
The number of times the display mode changes from the start of the variable production to the end varies depending on the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the second mode to the third mode;
After the second effect, a fourth effect in which the display mode of the second decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
a fifth effect in which the first decorative pattern is stop-displayed after the first effect and before the second effect;
After the second effect and before the fourth effect, a sixth effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
After the third effect, a seventh effect in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the third mode to the second mode can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number symbol change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. These character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number pattern change effect are executed in the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to display the image.

[Character pop-out effect 1]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the character pop-out effect 1. FIG. In the character pop-out effect 1, the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW. Characters 8LK, 8CK and 8RK displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW and 8RW are displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW and 8RW.

First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and the decorative patterns are fluctuating. Here, pending icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the pending icon 9B may be displayed, or not all pending icons may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. Here, the left decorative design character 8LK is displayed inside the left decorative design frame 8LW. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the right decorative design 8R is stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left decorative design 8L was stopped. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R is assumed to be the same as the number of the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, reach is established. Immediately after the right decorative design 8R stops, the character 8RK of the right decorative design is displayed inside the frame 8RW of the right decorative design. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(D) and (E), the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern changes with animation. The timing of starting this animation is immediately after the stop of the right decorative pattern 8R, that is, immediately after establishment of the ready-to-win state. The changed left decorative design character 8LK is displayed in front of the left decorative design frame 8LW. The head and tail of the fish character 8LK cover part of the frame 8LW of the left decorative design. The character 8LK with the left decorative design is produced to pop out from the frame 8LW with the left decorative design. The right decorative design 8R also changes with animation in the same way as the left decorative design 8L. The character 8RK of the right decorative design after the change is displayed in front of the right decorative design frame 8RW, and the right decorative design frame 8RW. covers part of the The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(F), after the character 8LK of the left decorative design and the character 8RK of the right decorative design change, the middle decorative design 8C slows down. This low speed is a speed at which the player can recognize which decorative pattern is changing. In the present embodiment, the timing of this slowing down is after the character 8LK with the left decorative design and the character 8RK with the right decorative design change with animation, but it may be immediately after the ready-to-win state is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-win state was established. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped middle decorative design 8C is different from the number of the left decorative design 8L or the right decorative design 8R. In other words, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R that have stopped indicate that they have come off.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(H) and 69(I), for the left decorative design 8L, the character 8LK of the left decorative design is displayed with animation immediately after the middle decorative design 8C stops. It is displayed inside the frame 8LW. The character 8LK of the left decorative design is produced so as to jump into the frame 8LW of the left decorative design. The right decorative pattern 8R is also produced in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. As for the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character 8CK inside the middle decorative pattern 8C is accompanied by animation immediately after the middle decorative pattern 8C stops, in parallel with the change of the character 8LK in the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK in the right decorative pattern. Change. The changed middle decorative design character 8CK is displayed in front of the middle decorative design frame 8CW. The changed medium decorative design character 8CK covers a part of the medium decorative design frame 8CW. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is produced so as to pop out from the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(J), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the character 8CK of the middle decorative design is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative design, the character 8CK in front of the frame of the middle decorative design is It is displayed inside the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern with animation. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is produced so as to jump into the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. Here, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R do not change.

In this embodiment, the animation of the character 8LK inside the left decorative design is performed immediately after the right decorative design 8R is stopped, but the animation of the character 8LK inside the left decorative design is performed at the left decorative design 8L. may be immediately after the stop of In this case, the animation timing of the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK inside the right decorative pattern are different.

[Character pop-out effect 2]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the character pop-out effect 2. FIG. In the character pop-out effect 2, the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW. Further, the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK change in appearance, and then the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW are displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW. This is the presentation that will be displayed.

The character pop-out effect 2 is also performed during the variation of decorative patterns in the same manner as the character pop-out effect 1.例文帳に追加Although omitted, in the character pop-out effect 2 as well, the same actions as in FIGS. The action shown in FIG. 70(A), which is an effect, is performed.

69A, 69B, 69C, 69D, and 69E are performed, and then, as shown in FIG. After the pattern character 8RK changes, the middle decorative pattern 8C slows down. In the present embodiment, the timing of this slowing down is after the character 8LK with the left decorative design and the character 8RK with the right decorative design change with animation, but it may be immediately after the ready-to-win state is established. Here, pending icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the pending icon 9B may be displayed, or not all pending icons may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-win state was established, the character 8LK of the left decorative design changes with animation. Specifically, the character 8LK with the left decorative pattern representing a fish performs an animation of opening its mouth, and changes from a closed state to an open state. The left decorative design character 8LK remains displayed in front of the left decorative design frame 8LW and covers a part of the left decorative design frame 8LW. The right decorative design character 8RK also changes in the same manner as the left decorative design character 8LK. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C remains fluctuating at a low speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), even after the character 8LK of the left decorative design and the character 8RK of the right decorative design have changed, the middle decorative design 8C fluctuates at a low speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the middle decorative symbol 8C stops after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-win state was established. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped middle decorative design 8C is different from the number of the left decorative design 8L or the right decorative design 8R. In other words, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R that have stopped indicate that they have come off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), as for the left decorative design 8L, immediately after the middle decorative design 8C stops, the left decorative design character 8LK representing a fish is animated with its mouth open. The mouth is closed from the The right decorative design character 8RK also changes in the same manner as the left decorative design character 8LK. Here, the middle decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(F) and (G), for the left decorative design 8L, the character 8LK with the left decorative design moves to the left decorative design with animation immediately after the action of FIG. 70(E). is displayed inside the frame 8LW. The character 8LK of the left decorative design is produced so as to jump into the frame 8LW of the left decorative design. The right decorative pattern 8R is also produced in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. As for the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character 8CK inside the middle decorative pattern is animated immediately after the action shown in FIG. change with it. The changed middle decorative design character 8CK is displayed in front of the middle decorative design frame 8CW. The changed medium decorative design character 8CK covers a part of the medium decorative design frame 8CW. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is produced so as to pop out from the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), after a certain period of time has passed since the character 8CK of the middle decorative design is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative design, the character 8CK of the middle decorative design is displayed with animation. It is displayed inside the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is produced so as to jump into the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. Here, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R do not change.

[Number pattern change effect]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the number pattern change effect. The number pattern change effect is a effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R representing numbers on the display screen 7a change at the timing when the reach is established, during the reach, and when the medium pattern is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 71(A), the right decorative pattern 8R stops. The left decorative pattern 8L is in a state of being stopped before the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped. The right decorative pattern 8R stops. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R at this time are decorative designs of planar design. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped right decorative symbol 8R is assumed to be the same as the number of the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, reach is established. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, pending icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the pending icon 9B may be displayed, or not all pending icons may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change from the two-dimensional design to the three-dimensional design immediately after the ready-to-win is established. This change is accompanied by an animation. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), after a certain period of time has passed since the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R have changed, the middle decorative design 8C changes at a low speed. In the present embodiment, the timing of this slowdown is after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed to three-dimensionally designed decorative patterns with animation, but it may be immediately after establishment of ready-to-win. The middle decorative pattern 8C at this time is a decorative pattern with a planar design.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(D) and (E), the left decorative pattern 8L changes after a certain period of time has passed since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have changed to three-dimensional decorative patterns. It changes to a larger pattern than before. This change is accompanied by an animation.
The right decorative design 8R also changes in the same manner as the left decorative design 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), even after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change to large patterns, the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), the middle decorative symbol 8C stops after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-win state was established. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped middle decorative design 8C is different from the number of the left decorative design 8L or the right decorative design 8R. In other words, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R that have stopped indicate that they have come off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), as for the left decorative design 8L, immediately after the middle decorative design 8C stops, the left decorative design 8L changes to a three-dimensional decorative design with animation. The right decorative design 8R also changes in the same manner as the left decorative design 8L. Here, the middle decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), immediately after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change to the decorative patterns of the three-dimensional design, the left decorative pattern 8L is changed to the two-dimensional design accompanied by animation. It changes to a decorative pattern. The right decorative design 8R also changes in the same manner as the left decorative design 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C changes to a three-dimensional decorative pattern with animation in parallel with the change of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), after a certain period of time has passed since the middle decorative pattern 8C changed to a three-dimensional decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a three-dimensional design to a two-dimensional design with animation. It changes to the decorative pattern of the design. Here, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R do not change.

[Effect example]
Effect examples of the character pop-out effect 1, the character pop-out effect 2, and the number symbol change effect are shown below.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is provided with a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, one of which is the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in "character pop-out effect 1". , The left decorative pattern 8L includes a frame image 8LW representing the frame of the pattern and a character image 8LK representing the character, and the image 8LK representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image 8LW on the display screen 7a. A first effect (FIGS. 69B and 69C) in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the first mode is displayed, and after the first effect, a character is displayed on the display screen 7a from inside the frame image 8LW. jumps out, the character image 8LK is displayed on the front side of the frame image 8LW, and at least a part of the frame image 8LW is covered with the character image 8LK. ), (E)), and so on. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)), as shown in "character pop-out effect 1", on the display screen 7a, on the front side of the frame image 8LW. The displayed character jumps into the frame represented by the frame image 8LW, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the first mode is displayed in which the image 8LK representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image 8LW. Effects (FIGS. 69(H) and (I)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images is the second middle decorative pattern 8C different from the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in the "character pop-out effect 1". The decorative design inside the eye 8C includes a frame image 8CW representing the frame of the design and a character image 8CK representing the character. , Before the third effect (FIGS. 69(H) and (I)), the display screen 7a displays an image 8CK representing a part of the character inside the frame image 8CW. In parallel with the fourth effect (Fig. 69 (F), (G)) in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed, and the third effect (Fig. 69 (H), (I)), on the display screen 7a , the character pops out from inside the frame image 8CW, the character image 8CK is displayed on the front side of the frame image 8CW, and at least a part of the frame image 8CW is covered with the character image 8CK. A fifth effect (FIGS. 69(H) and (I)) in which the symbol 8C is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the "character pop-out effect 1", the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)) is performed after the ready-to-win state is established (FIG. 69(C)). . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the character pop-out effect 1, the character pop-out effect 2, and the number symbol change effect are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first effect (FIGS. 69 (B), (C)), the second effect (FIGS. 69 (D), (E)) and the third effect (FIGS. 69 (H), (I )), the fourth effect (FIGS. 69(F), (G)), and the fifth effect (FIGS. 69(H), (I)) are performed, but the first effect (FIG. 69(B) ), (C)) and the second effect (FIGS. 69(D), (E)).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, not only the left decorative pattern 8L but also the right decorative pattern 8R is produced, but only the left decorative pattern 8L may be produced. That is, the above-described first effects (FIGS. 69 (B) and (C)), second effects (FIGS. 69 (D) and (E)) and third effects (FIGS. 69 (H) and (I) ) may be the only

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)) is performed after the ready-to-win state is established, but it may be performed before the ready-to-win state is established.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The decorative pattern includes a frame image representing a frame of the pattern and a character image representing a character,
a first effect in which the display means displays the decorative pattern in a first mode in which an image representing a portion of the character is displayed inside the frame image;
After the first effect, the character pops out from inside the frame image on the display means, the character image is displayed in front of the frame image, and at least a part of the frame image is covered by the character image. A second effect in which the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed, and
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
After the second effect, the character displayed on the front side of the frame image on the display means jumps into the frame represented by the frame image, and a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image. Capable of executing a third effect in which the decorative pattern of the first mode in which the image is displayed is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design different from the decorative design;
The second decorative pattern includes a frame image representing a frame of the pattern and a character image representing a character,
The two of the first mode, wherein after the second effect and before the third effect, an image representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image on the display means. A fourth effect in which the decorative pattern of the eyes is displayed;
In parallel with the third effect, the character pops out from inside the frame image on the display means, the character image is displayed on the front side of the frame image, and at least a part of the frame image is the character image. A fifth effect in which the second decorative pattern of the second mode covered by is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3,
The second production is performed after the reach is established,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon shielding effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG. This pending icon shielding effect is executed during the variable effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold icon shielding effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Holding icon shielding effect A]
72A to 72F are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect A. FIG. The suspended icon shielding effect A is an effect in which the cover image including the character image frames in from the lower part of the display screen 7a during the variable effect, partially covers the suspended icon and the decorative pattern, and then goes out of the frame. It is a production for suggesting a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as well.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a (under the left decorative pattern 8L). In addition, it is assumed that the pending change effect is not performed during this variable effect, and furthermore, the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable effect continues to be explained as being lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the cover image CI1 including the character image moves vertically upward from the lower position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed and framed in. As a result, a portion of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a and a portion of the variable icon 9C are covered with the cover image CI1. After that, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes invisible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area. One by one becomes difficult to see in the order of the pending icon 9A. That is, the number of pending icons 9A that become difficult to see gradually increases. Further, the character image included in the cover image CI1 may be displayed while executing animation, the cover image CI1 may be composed of only the character image, or only the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed. , and the left decorative pattern 8L may be of a size that does not make it difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the entire cover image CI1 framed in from below the position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a is stopped after being framed in. , all of the displayed pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative symbol 8L has undergone the deceleration fluctuation display, and then the decorative symbol representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time when the cover image CI1 makes it difficult to see, may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or may be temporarily stopped and then made invisible. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and maintain a state where the contents are difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), in the right decorative symbol 8R which has been displayed in high speed variation, the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed through deceleration variation display. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display. At this time, the cover image CI1 maintains the stop display, but this makes it difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L. Here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. In addition, after the left decorative pattern 8L is changed again, the reach may be formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), the cover image CI1, which has been stopped and displayed, is moved vertically upward on the display screen 7a and is out of the frame. In addition, along with this, a part of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a and a part of the variable icon 9C, which were difficult to see respectively, are now visible. becomes. After that, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes visible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area. It becomes visible one by one in the order of the pending icon 9A. That is, the number of visible pending icons 9A gradually increases. The scene shown in FIG. 72(E) is a display example after all the pending icons 9A have become visible. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains the temporary stop display. At this time, the cover image CI1 maintains the moving display, but the left decorative pattern 8L is still difficult to see, so it is unclear whether the cover image CI1 is moving again or the temporary stop display is maintained. Now, assume that the temporary stop display is maintained. Also, the pending icon shielding effect A is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a mode with a higher degree of expectation for a big win, but in this case, the pending change does not occur. Assume that there was not.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the lower end portion of the cover image CI1 that has been moved and displayed upward on the display screen 7a is out of the frame. In addition, along with this, the left decorative pattern 8L, which has been difficult to see, becomes visible. After that, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the variable effect is completed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The display example of the pending icon shielding effect A has been described above. By making the suspended icon shielding effect A executable, the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are made invisible, and the player can expect that the suspended change will occur while the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. , the game player can be entertained by the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Holding icon shielding effect B]
72(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect B. FIG. The suspended icon shielding effect A is an effect in which a cover image including a character image frames in from the left part of the display screen 7a during a variable effect, partially covers the suspended icon and the decorative pattern, and then goes out of the frame. It is a production to suggest a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as well.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a (under the left decorative pattern 8L). In addition, it is assumed that the pending change effect is not performed during this variable effect, and furthermore, the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable effect continues to be explained as being lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), the cover image CI2 including the character image is moved horizontally rightward from the left end of the display screen 7a and displayed, and enters the frame. Thereby, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the variation icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered with the cover image CI2. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes invisible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to , and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see one by one in this order. That is, the number of pending icons that become difficult to see gradually increases. Further, the character image included in the cover image CI2 may be displayed while executing animation, the cover image CI2 may be composed of only the character image, or only the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed. , and the left decorative pattern 8L may be of a size that does not make it difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the entire cover image CI2 framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a is stopped and displayed, and all the displayed pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative symbol 8L has undergone the deceleration fluctuation display, and then the decorative symbol representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time when it becomes invisible due to the cover image CI2, it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes invisible, or it may become invisible after it is temporarily stopped. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and maintain a state where the contents are difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), in the right decorative symbol 8R which has been displayed in high speed variation, the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed through deceleration variation display. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display. At this time, the cover image CI2 maintains the stop display, but this makes it difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L. Here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. In addition, after the left decorative pattern 8L is changed again, the reach may be formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(K), the cover image CI2, which has been stopped and displayed, is moved horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a and is out of the frame. In addition, along with this, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a and the variation icon 9C, which have been difficult to see respectively, become visible. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. , and the changeable icon 9C, one by one. That is, the number of visible pending icons gradually increases. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes gradually visible from the left end. Since the cover image CI2 was displayed on the front side of the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, it was difficult to see them, but the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. Even if the cover image CI2 is moved and displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not difficult to see. However, not limited to this, the cover image CI2 is displayed on the front side of at least one of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed on the back side of the cover image CI2 as the cover image CI2 is moved and displayed. It is also possible to make one of the decorative patterns that are displayed difficult to see. The scene shown in FIG. 72(K) is a display example after all the pending icons 9A have become visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the temporary stop display. However, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which had been difficult to see due to the cover image CI2, has become visible again. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible with the moving display of the cover image CI2, it has already started to change again, and then the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R. Decorative symbols having the same contents are temporarily stopped and displayed to form reach. In addition, the pending icon shielding effect B is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a mode with a higher degree of expectation for a big win, but in this case, the pending change does not occur. Assume that there was not.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(L), the left end portion of the cover image CI2 that has been moved and displayed in the horizontal right direction of the display screen 7a is out of the frame. After that, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the variable effect is finished, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The display example of the pending icon shielding effect B has been described above. By making the suspended icon shielding effect B executable, it is possible to make the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and to make the player expect that the suspension change will occur while it is difficult to see. , the game player can be entertained by the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Holding icon shielding effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon shielding effect C. As shown in FIG. The suspended icon shielding effect C is an effect in which the cover image including the character image frames in from the lower part of the display screen 7a during the variable effect, partially covers the suspended icon and the decorative pattern, and then goes out of the frame. It is a production for suggesting a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as well.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In the suspended icon shielding effect C, the cover image CI3 frames in from the lower part of the display screen 7a, and after the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see, the cover image CI3 frames out and the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. This is an effect in which the icon 9C becomes visible again. While the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see due to the cover image CI3, the display mode of each suspended icon changes from the normal mode to the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special figure lottery will win. may perform a pending change that changes to a relatively high aspect. In this example, the hold icon is a white round icon in the normal mode, and can be changed to either a shaded square icon or a patterned hexagonal icon.

Further, the cover image CI3 may change to a cover image CI4 in which the degree of expectation that one of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C will perform the pending change is relatively high. We call this development. Note that the cover image CI3 includes a character string image of “Kenkon”, and the cover image CI4 includes a character string image of “一擲”. Completed and constructed to give the player a sense of anticipation for pending changes.

73(A)-(F) are patterns with no pending changes and no development, FIGS. 73(A)-(E) and (G) are patterns with pending changes and no development, FIGS. 73(A)-(D) ), (H) ~ (J) pattern with no pending change and development, patterns with pending change and development in Figure 73 (A) ~ (D), (H) ~ (I), (K), 73A to 73D, 73H to 73I, and 73L, patterns with multiple pending changes and with development will be described respectively. First, the no pending change and no evolution pattern is described.

First, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a (under the left decorative pattern 8L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the cover image CI3 including the character image moves vertically upward from the lower position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed and framed in. As a result, a portion of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a and a portion of the variable icon 9C are covered with the cover image CI1. After that, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes invisible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area. One by one becomes difficult to see in the order of the pending icon 9A. That is, the number of pending icons 9A that become difficult to see gradually increases. Further, the cover image CI3 may be displayed while executing animation, the cover image CI3 may be composed only of a character string image, or only the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be made invisible. The left decorative pattern 8L may be of a size that does not make it difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the entire cover image CI3 framed in from below the position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a is framed in and then stopped and displayed. , all of the displayed pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative symbol 8L has undergone the deceleration fluctuation display, and then the decorative symbol representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time when the cover image CI3 makes it difficult to see, may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or may be temporarily stopped and then made invisible. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and maintain a state where the contents are difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), in the right decorative symbol 8R which has been displayed in high speed variation, the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed through deceleration variation display. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display. At this time, the cover image CI3 maintains the stop display, but this makes it difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L. Here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. It should be noted that after the left decorative pattern 8L is changed again, it may be configured to form a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), the cover image CI3, which has been stopped and displayed, is moved vertically downward on the display screen 7a and is out of the frame. In addition, along with this, the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and the variable icon 9C, which were difficult to see respectively, are now visible. Become. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. becomes visible one by one in the order of the pending icon 9A corresponding to . That is, the number of visible pending icons 9A gradually increases. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains the temporary stop display. Also, at this time, the cover image CI3 is moved and displayed, but the left decorative pattern 8L transitions from the invisible state to the visible state. However, here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, it may be configured to form a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the lower end portion of the cover image CI3 that has been moved and displayed vertically downward on the display screen 7a is out of the frame. Further, along with this, the entirety of the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, which have been difficult to see, become visible. After that, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the variable effect is completed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern of no pending change and no development.

Next, the pattern with pending change and no evolution will be described. Since the flow of FIGS. 73A to 73E is the same as the pattern of no pending change and no development described above, description thereof will be omitted.
After the scene shown in FIG. 73E, when the cover image CI3 is completely out of the frame, as shown in FIG. , to a shaded square icon. This change in the display mode of the hold icon 9A may be performed while the cover image CI3 is difficult to see, or may be performed after the cover image CI3 moves and becomes visible. Also, when the change is pending after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, a pending change may be performed on the floating icon 9C. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern with pending change and no development.

Next, the pattern without pending change and with development will be described. The flow of FIGS. 73A to 73D is the same as the pattern of no pending change and no development described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(D), the display mode of the cover image CI3 changes to become the cover image CI4 as shown in FIG. 73(E). An animation may be performed at the time of this change, but the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C remain difficult to see due to the cover image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the cover image CI4, which has been stopped and displayed, is moved vertically downward on the display screen 7a and is out of the frame. In addition, along with this, the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and the variable icon 9C, which were difficult to see respectively, are now visible. Become. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. becomes visible one by one in the order of the pending icon 9A corresponding to . That is, the number of visible pending icons 9A gradually increases. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains the temporary stop display. Also, at this time, the cover image CI4 is moved and displayed, but the left decorative pattern 8L transitions from a state that is difficult to see to a state that can be seen. However, here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, it may be configured to form a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the lower end portion of the cover image CI4 that has been moved and displayed vertically downward on the display screen 7a is out of the frame. Further, along with this, the entirety of the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, which have been difficult to see, become visible. After that, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the variable effect is completed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern of no pending change and development.

Next, the pattern with pending change and with development will be described. The flow of FIGS. 73(A)-(D) is similar to the previously described pattern of no pending change and no development, and the subsequent flow of FIGS. 73(H)-(I) is of no pending change and Since it is the same as the pattern with development, each description is omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(I), when the cover image CI4 is completely out of the frame, as shown in FIG. , to a shaded square icon. This change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A may be executed during a period when the cover image CI4 is displayed and thus difficult to see, or may be executed after the cover image CI4 moves and becomes visible. good. Also, when the change is pending after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, a pending change may be performed on the floating icon 9C. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern of pending change and development.

Finally, the pattern with multiple pending changes and with development will be described. The flow of FIGS. 73(A)-(D) is similar to the previously described pattern of no pending change and no development, and the subsequent flow of FIGS. 73(H)-(I) is of no pending change and Since it is the same as the pattern with development, each description is omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(I), when the cover image CI4 is completely out of the frame, as shown in FIG. , to a patterned hexagonal icon, and further, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is changed from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. These changes in the display mode of the pending icon 9A may be executed during a period when the cover image CI4 is displayed and thus difficult to see, or may be executed after the cover image CI4 moves and becomes visible. good too. Also, when the change is pending after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, a pending change may be performed on the floating icon 9C. Additionally, the order of pending changes may be arbitrarily set. That is, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area may be changed simultaneously, or the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area may be changed simultaneously. The pending change may be made in the order of the pending icon 9A, or the pending change may be made in the order of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area and the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern with multiple pending changes and development.

The above are display examples of the pending icon shielding effect C in various patterns. By adopting a configuration in which the suspended icon shielding effect C can be executed, the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are made invisible, and the suspension change occurs while it is difficult to see, and a cover for making it expected. A change in the display mode of an image or the like makes it possible for a player to expect a hold change, and the player can be entertained by the performance of the hold icon in the variable performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Holding icon shielding effect D]
74A to 74F are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect D. FIG. In the suspended icon shielding effect D, during the variable effect, a plurality of suggestive images CI5 and a plurality of suggestive images CI6 are continuously framed in from the left part of the display screen 7a, and part of the suspended icons and decorative patterns are displayed. After covering, it is an effect to frame out, which is an effect for suggesting re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and pending change of the variation icon 9C. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 as well.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a (under the left decorative pattern 8L). It should be noted that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable production continues to explain as if it was a hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74B, a plurality of suggestive images CI5 and a plurality of suggestive images CI6 are displayed moving horizontally rightward from the left end of the display screen 7a, and are displayed one after another in the frame. do. As a result, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the variation icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L form a plurality of suggestive images CI5 and a plurality of suggestive It is obscured by image CI6. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes invisible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to , and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see one by one in this order. That is, the number of pending icons that become difficult to see gradually increases. The suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 may be displayed while executing animation, or at least one of the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 may be composed of a character image. The size may be such that only the variable icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are made invisible, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not made invisible. The same applies to subsequent cases. Also, at this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, which has been displayed in high-speed variation, is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol representing "3" through deceleration variation display. The timing of the temporary stop display is preferably before visibility becomes difficult due to the plurality of suggestive images CI5 and the plurality of suggestive images CI6, but it may be after the visibility becomes difficult. In this case, it is assumed that visual recognition becomes difficult after the temporary stop. Further, the suggestive image CI5 may be the only plural images that are moved and displayed to make the left decorative symbol 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C difficult to see. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display, and the contents are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), all pending icons 9A displayed by the plurality of suggestive images CI5 and the plurality of suggestive images CI6 framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a, The icon 9C and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and maintain a state where the contents are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in front of all of the suggestive images CI5 and CI6, and even if they overlap the suggestive images CI5 and CI6, they will not be difficult to see. It shall be configured. However, not limited to this, the cover image CI2 is displayed on the front side of at least one of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed on the back side of the cover image CI2 as the cover image CI2 is moved and displayed. It is also possible to make one of the decorative patterns that are displayed difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74D, new suggestive images CI5 and CI6 no longer frame from the left end of the display screen 7a, and suggestive images CI5 and CI6 already framed Subsequently, it is moved and displayed in the horizontal right direction on the display screen 7a. Also, along with this, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the variation icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which were difficult to see, respectively, becomes visible. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. , and the changeable icon 9C, one by one. That is, the number of visible pending icons gradually increases. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes gradually visible from the left end. The right decorative symbol 8R, which has been displayed with high-speed variation, undergoes deceleration variation display, and the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display.

Furthermore, the display mode of the variable icon 9C that has become visible has changed from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. This change in the display mode of the variation icon 9C may be executed during a period in which the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are displayed and thus the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are difficult to see. It may be performed after it becomes possible. Also, when the change is pending after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Additionally, a pending change may be performed on the pending icon 9A.

In addition, the contents of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern in the visible left decorative pattern 8L are changed from "3" to "6". As a result, the content of the decorative design temporarily stopped in the left decorative design 8L matches the content of the decorative design temporarily stopped in the right decorative design 8R, forming a reach. This change in the content of the decorative pattern may be executed during a period in which the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are displayed, making it difficult to see, or the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 may move and become visible. may be executed after Also, if the content changes after it becomes visible, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 that have been moved and displayed in the horizontal right direction of the display screen 7a are successively out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the middle decorative symbol 8C undergoes deceleration fluctuation display, and the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the contents of the decorative patterns displayed to stop divergence in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R match with "6", suggesting that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win. are doing. After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped, and winning is decided.

The display example of the pending icon shielding effect D has been described above. By adopting a configuration capable of executing the suspended icon shielding effect D, the left decorative symbol 8L, the suspended icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C are made invisible, and the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped while being invisible is made invisible. It is possible to make the player expect the change of the content and the occurrence of the hold change, and the player can be entertained by the performance of the hold icon in the variable performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Holding icon shielding effect E]
74(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect E. FIG. In the suspended icon shielding effect E, during the variable effect, a plurality of suggestive images CI5 and a plurality of suggestive images CI6 are continuously framed in from the left part of the display screen 7a, and part of the suspended icon and decorative pattern are displayed. It is an effect of framing out after being hidden, and is an effect for suggesting a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Also, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a (under the left decorative pattern 8L). In addition, it is assumed that the pending change effect is not performed during this variable effect, and furthermore, the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable effect continues to be explained as being lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), suggestive images CI5 and CI6 are displayed moving horizontally to the right from the left end of the display screen 7a, and successively plurally enter the frame. As a result, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the variation icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered with the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6. ing. Specifically, first, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes invisible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area. The reserved icon 9A corresponding to , and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see one by one in this order. That is, the number of pending icons that become difficult to see gradually increases. In addition, the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 may be composed of character images, may be displayed while executing animation, or may be left decorated by making only the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C invisible. The size of the pattern 8L may be such that it is not difficult to see. Further, the suggestive image CI5 may be the only plural images that are moved and displayed to make the left decorative symbol 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed, and the new suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are framed in. Gone. Due to the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6, all the displayed pending icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative symbol 8L has undergone the deceleration fluctuation display, and then the decorative symbol representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time when it becomes invisible due to the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6, may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or may be temporarily stopped and then made invisible. You can become Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and maintain a state where the contents are difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), in the right decorative symbol 8R that has been displayed in high speed variation, the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed through deceleration variation display. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display. Also, at this time, the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 maintain the stop display, but this makes it difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L, so it is unclear whether the display changes again or the temporary stop display is maintained. However, here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. In addition, after the left decorative pattern 8L is changed again, the reach may be formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(K), the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 that have been statically displayed are moved horizontally leftward on the display screen 7a and displayed out of the frame. In addition, along with this, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a and the variation icon 9C, which have been difficult to see respectively, become visible. Specifically, first, the variable icon 9C becomes visible, and then the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area, the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area. , the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area, one by one. That is, the number of visible pending icons gradually increases. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes gradually visible from the right end. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display. However, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which was made invisible by the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6, becomes visible again. For example, when the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are moved and displayed, when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible, the movement has already started again, and then the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed. A decorative pattern having the same content as the existing decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed to form a reach. Furthermore, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the visible first storage area is changed from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. The change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may be performed during a period in which the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are displayed and thus the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 are difficult to see. It may be performed after the image CI6 has moved and becomes visible. Also, when the change is pending after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, a pending change may be performed on the floating icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(L), the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 that have been moved and displayed in the horizontal right direction of the display screen 7a are all out of the frame. After that, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the variable effect is finished, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped.

The display example of the pending icon shielding effect E has been described above. By adopting a configuration in which the suspended icon shielding effect E can be executed, the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are made invisible, and the player can expect that the suspended change will occur while the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. , the game player can be entertained by the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 72 to 74, a first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, and after the first effect, the cover images CI1, CI2, CI3, a second effect in which at least one of CI4, CI5, and CI6 is displayed moving; A third effect that overlaps with 9A and is stop-displayed on the front side of the pending icon 9A to make the pending icon 9A difficult to see can be executed. For example, in the pending icon shielding effect A, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the cover image CI1 makes the pending icon 9A difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be the "display screen" in claim 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be the "plurality of decorative patterns", and the pending icon 9A may be the "pending image". Each cover image corresponds to the "predetermined image".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72(C) to 72(F), in the third effect, the cover image CI1 overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L and is also displayed on the front side to make the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, and after the third effect, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, and after the fourth effect, the cover image CI1 is moved. A fifth effect in which the reserved icon 9A and the left decorative pattern 8L are displayed and made visible can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the hold icon 9A is displayed as a white round icon with a relatively low expectation that the result of the associated special figure lottery will win. There are cases where the degree of expectation is relatively high, and there are cases where the icon is displayed as a shaded square icon. It was a configuration that made it possible to perform the production of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the cover image CI3 is changed to the cover image CI4 after the second effect and before the sixth effect. It is configured to be able to execute a seventh effect suggesting that the effect of is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72(G) to 72(L), in the first effect, a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed simultaneously, and in the second effect Then, the movement of the cover image CI2 gradually increases the number of suspended icons 9A that change from the visible state to the difficult-to-visible state, and in the third effect, all the suspended icons 9A are configured to be in the difficult-to-visible state. It has become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the pending icon shielding effect, the cover image may be configured so that the left decorative pattern 8L does not become difficult to see due to the cover image. On the other hand, the decorative patterns other than the left decorative pattern 8L may be configured to be difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon shielding effect C, the cover image CI3 may include a character image. In this case, the cover image CI4 may include the same character image with a different display mode from the cover image CI3. When the cover image CI3 changes to the cover image CI4, the character image is animated. may

[Modification 3]
In the on-hold icon shielding effects D and E, the plurality of cover images that make the on-hold icon 9A and the like difficult to see may be composed of one type of image. In this case, one type of cover image may include a character image, or the character image may be animated when the cover image is moved and displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the suspended icon shielding effects A and B, the suspended change may be executed after the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see due to the cover images CI1 and CI2.

[Modification 5]
In the suspended icon shielding effect, the cover image may be configured such that not all of the suspended icons 9A and the variable icons 9C are made invisible, but only a predetermined number of suspended icons 9A and the variable icons 9C are made invisible.

[Modification 6]
The effects described in the decorative pattern change effects A to E may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A game machine having a display screen capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of decorative patterns,
One of the plurality of types of images is a pending image representing pending,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
a first effect in which the plurality of decorative symbols are variably displayed;
a second effect in which the predetermined image is moved and displayed after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the predetermined image overlaps the reserved image and is stop-displayed in front of the reserved image so that the reserved image becomes difficult to see can be executed. Na,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the third effect, the predetermined image overlaps the first decorative pattern and is displayed on the front side of the first decorative pattern, making the first decorative pattern difficult to see,
a fourth effect in which the first decorative pattern is stop-displayed after the third effect;
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is moved and displayed, and the reserved image and the first decorative pattern become visible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The reserved image is displayed in a first reserved mode with a relatively low expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a big hit, and in a second reserved mode with a relatively high expectation. There are cases and
After the second effect, a sixth effect in which the pending image changes from the first pending mode to the second pending mode can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
After the second effect and before the sixth effect, the predetermined image changes from the first mode to the second mode, thereby suggesting that the sixth effect is executed. 7 productions can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the first effect, a plurality of the pending images are displayed at the same time,
In the second effect, the number of pending images that change from a visible state to a difficult-to-visible state gradually increases due to the movement of the predetermined image,
In the third effect, all the reserved images are in a state of being difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. FIG. The icon image display effect is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute icon image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Icon image display effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the icon image display effect A. FIG. In the icon image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The pending icon 9A corresponds to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called a first hold, a second hold, a third hold, and a fourth hold, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. With the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the shift display of the pending icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon 9A for the first hold, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold is the hold icon for the second hold. 9A, and the fourth pending hold icon 9A is moved to the third pending hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(C)-(E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. The icon image IG enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a and gradually expands while leaving the frame from the lower end. Therefore, it is displayed as if it flies from the back side of the display screen toward the front side.

In FIG. 75(C), the icon image IG has just been framed in the display screen 7a, and the icon image IG is displayed above the center. In FIG. 75(D), the icon image IG is moving downward while being gradually enlarged. In FIG. 75(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged and moved downward to be out of the frame on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(H) and (I), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. At this time, the image of the pending icon 9A is hidden. In FIG. 75(H), a plurality of icon images IG are displayed on the display screen 7a. After the icon image IG is displayed, the icon image IG moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 75(I).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(J) and (K), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character. In FIG. 75(J), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other in the central portion of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 75(K), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols are "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol is "4" symbols.

[Icon image display effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon image display effect B. FIG. In the icon image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The pending icon 9A corresponds to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called a first hold, a second hold, a third hold, and a fourth hold, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. With the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the shift display of the pending icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon 9A for the first hold, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold is the hold icon for the second hold. 9A, and the fourth pending hold icon 9A is moved to the third pending hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(C)-(E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is assumed to be blue (indicated by hatching). The display color of the icon image IG suggests the degree of expectation for winning. The degree of expectation for winning in the display colors is set in the order of white→blue→green→red→gold, for example. The icon image IG enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and gradually expands while leaving the frame from the lower end. Therefore, it is displayed as if it flies from the back side of the display screen toward the front side.

In FIG. 76(C), the icon image IG has just been framed in the display screen 7a, and the icon image IG is displayed above the center. In FIG. 76(D), the icon image IG moves downward while being gradually enlarged. In FIG. 76(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged and moved downward to be out of the frame on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(H) and (I), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is green (indicated by hatching). This suggests an increase in expectations for success. At this time, the image of the pending icon 9A is hidden. In FIG. 76(H), a plurality of icon images IG are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. After the icon image IG is displayed, the icon image IG moves downward and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 76(I). Here, the three pending icons 9A are hidden, and the variable icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(J) and (K), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character. In FIG. 76(J), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other in the central portion of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 76(K), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols are "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol is "4" symbols.

[Icon image display effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the icon image display effect C. FIG. In the icon image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The pending icon 9A corresponds to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called a first hold, a second hold, a third hold, and a fourth hold, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. With the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the shift display of the pending icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon 9A for the first hold, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold is the hold icon for the second hold. 9A, and the fourth pending hold icon 9A is moved to the third pending hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(C) to (E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is assumed to be blue (indicated by hatching). The display color of the icon image IG suggests the degree of expectation for winning. The degree of expectation for winning in the display colors is set in the order of white→blue→green→red→gold, for example. The icon image IG enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and gradually expands while leaving the frame from the lower end. Therefore, it is displayed as if it flies from the back side of the display screen toward the front side.

In FIG. 77(C), the icon image IG has just been framed in the display screen 7a, and the icon image IG is displayed above the center. In FIG. 77(D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moved downward. In FIG. 77(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged and moved downward to be out of the frame on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. The display color of the icon image IG is green (indicated by hatching). This suggests an increase in expectations for winning. At this time, the image of the pending icon 9A is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(I) and (J), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character. In FIG. 77(I), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other in the central portion of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 77(J), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are colliding. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(K), the third icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is a effect of displaying an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the reserved icon image. Here, an icon image IG of the same hexagon as the hexagon represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reservations. Moreover, the icon image IG is displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. The display color of the icon image IG is red (indicated by hatching). This suggests a further increase in expectations for winning. At this time, the image of the pending icon 9A is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols are "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol is "4" symbols.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a predetermined number of icon images IG representing the same regular hexagon (target) as the regular hexagon (target) represented by the pending icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a regardless of the number of pending icons. is executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to a "display control means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute the icon display effect multiple times during one variation (FIGS. 75(C)-(E)(H)(I), FIGS. E) (H) (I), FIGS. 77 (C) to (E) (H) (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the icon image IG displayed in the icon display effect is changed a plurality of times during one variation (FIGS. 77(C) to (E) (H) (K )). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display state in which the pending icon 9A is displayed is switched to the non-display state in which the pending icon 9A is not displayed (FIGS. 76(H) and (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least one icon image IG out of the predetermined number of icon images IG displayed in the icon display effect is larger than or equal to the image size of the pending icon 9A. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the icon image display rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A is switched from the display state to the non-display state during execution of the icon display effect (FIGS. 76(H) and 76(I)). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending icon 9A is switched to non-display from the start of the icon display effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the suspended icon 9A is switched from the display state to the non-display state while the icon display effect is being executed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed (FIGS. 76(H) and (I)). The variable icon 9C may also be switched from the display state to the non-display state together with the pending icon 9A.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, an icon image representing the same target as that represented by the pending icon 9A is displayed, but an icon image representing the same target as that represented by the pending icon 9B may be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of displaying a pending icon image indicating the pending number on a display screen,
The display control means can execute an icon display effect in which a predetermined number of icon images representing the same object as the object represented by the pending icon image are displayed on the display screen regardless of the number of pending.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means is capable of executing the icon display effect multiple times during one variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means changes the display color of the icon image displayed in the icon display effect a plurality of times during one variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means switches from a display state in which the suspended icon image is displayed to a non-display state in which the suspended icon image is not displayed during execution of the icon display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
The display control means is configured such that at least one icon image among a predetermined number of icon images displayed in the icon display effect is equal to or larger than the image size of the pending icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by

The icon-shaped area effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. The icon-shaped area rendering is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute icon-shaped area rendering, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Icon Shaped Area Rendering A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the icon-shaped area effect A. FIG. In the icon-shaped area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The pending icon 9A corresponds to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called a first hold, a second hold, a third hold, and a fourth hold, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. With the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the shift display of the pending icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon 9A for the first hold, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold is the hold icon for the second hold. 9A, and the fourth pending hold icon 9A is moved to the third pending hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(C)-(E), the specific area effect is executed. The specific area effect is an effect of performing a specific display inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In FIG. 78(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding the specific area TA, as shown in FIG. 78(D), it moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a and stops. At this time, the variation icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The variation icon 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In FIG. 78(E), a message image MG saying "Develop into a battle?" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The message image MG suggests an effect that is executed after the message image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(H) to (J), the specific area effect is executed again. The specific area effect is an effect of performing a specific display inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In FIG. 78(H), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding the specific area TA, as shown in FIG. 78(I), it moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a and stops. The specific area TA is enlarged more than the specific area TA shown in FIGS. 78(D) and (E). At this time, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A of the first hold are overlapped and displayed in a part of the specific area TA. The variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In FIG. 78(J), a battle effect is being executed inside the specific area TA. Here, the animation display of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed inside the specific area TA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(K), the specific area TA is hidden, and the final showdown effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" symbols, indicating that a win has been achieved. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols are "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol is "4" symbols.

[Icon Shaped Region Rendering B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining icon-shaped area effect B. FIG. In the icon-shaped area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The pending icon 9A corresponds to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called a first hold, a second hold, a third hold, and a fourth hold, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. With the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the shift display of the pending icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon 9A for the first hold, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold is the hold icon for the second hold. 9A, and the fourth pending hold icon 9A is moved to the third pending hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(C)-(E), the specific area effect is executed. The specific area effect is an effect of performing a specific display inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In FIG. 79C, a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding the specific area TA, as shown in FIG. 79(D), it moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a and stops. At this time, the variation icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The variation icon 9C is hidden behind the specific area TA. By displaying the variable icon 9C on the back side of the specific area TA, it is possible to surprise the player. The variation icon 9C may be hidden. The specific area TA may be displayed instead of the variation icon 9C. In FIG. 79(E), the inside of the specific area TA is filled with red. This suggests a degree of expectation for success.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(H) to (J), the specific area effect is executed again. The specified area effect is an effect of performing a specified display inside a specified area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. The specific area TA is larger than the specific area TA shown in FIGS. 79(D) and (E). Further, the specific area TA partially overlaps the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A. The variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In FIG. 79(H), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect is being executed inside the specific area TA. Here, the friend character CRA is pushed to the right side of the display screen 7a by the enemy character CRB, and animation is displayed in which the friend character CRA is inferior. In FIG. 79(I), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect is being executed inside the specific area TA. Here, an animation is displayed in which the friend character pushes the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is superior. In FIG. 79(J), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect is being executed inside the specific area TA. Here, an animation is displayed in which the fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is balanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(K), the specific area TA is hidden, and the final showdown effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" symbols, indicating that a win has been achieved. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols are "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol is "4" symbols.

[Icon Shape Area Rendering C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the icon-shaped area effect C. FIG. In the icon-shaped area effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" design. It should be noted that it may be a temporary stop instead of a fixed stop. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The pending icon 9A corresponds to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called a first hold, a second hold, a third hold, and a fourth hold, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. With the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the shift display of the pending icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon 9A for the first hold, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold is the hold icon for the second hold. 9A, and the fourth pending hold icon 9A is moved to the third pending hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(C)-(E), the specific area effect is executed. The specific area effect is an effect of performing a specific display inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In FIG. 80(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding the specific area TA, as shown in FIG. 80(D), it moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a and stops. At this time, the variation icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The variation icon 9C is hidden behind the specific area TA. By displaying the variable icon 9C on the back side of the specific area TA, it is possible to surprise the player. The variation icon 9C may be hidden. The specific area TA may be displayed instead of the variation icon 9C. In FIG. 80(E), a message image MG reading "Extremely Hot" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The message image MG suggests the degree of expectation for winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(H) and (I), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character. In FIG. 80(H), the friend character CRA is pushed to the right side of the display screen 7a by the enemy character CRB, and an animation is displayed in which the friend character CRA is outnumbered. In FIG. 80(I), an animation is displayed in which the friend character pushes the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is superior.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(J), the final showdown effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final battle production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(K), the specific area effect is executed again. The specific area effect is an effect of performing a specific display inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. Here, a specific area TA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and an ally character CRA is displayed inside the specific area TA. Also, a message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The specific area TA is larger than the specific area TA shown in FIGS. 80(D) and (E). Further, the specific area TA partially overlaps the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. The variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon-shaped area presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific display is performed inside the specific area TA having the same outline as the reserved icon image 9A (FIGS. 87(E)(J), FIGS. 79(E)(H)-( J), Figure 80 (E) (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to a "display control means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as a specific display, an image suggesting the degree of expectation for winning may be displayed (FIGS. 79(E) and 80(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as the specific display, there are cases where an image suggesting an effect to be executed after the specific display is performed (FIGS. 78(E) and 80(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the pending icon image 9A superimposed on at least a part of the specific area TA (FIGS. 78 (I) (J), FIGS. 79 (H) to (J) , FIG. 80(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide novel performances that have not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the icon-shaped area rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the specific area effect is executed twice during one variation. On the other hand, the number of executions of the specific area rendering is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be performed only once, or may be configured to be performed three times or more.

[Modification 2]
Regarding the anteroposterior relationship between the specific area TA and the pending icon 9A (the variable icon 9C) in the above embodiment, whether the specific area TA is on the front side or the back side with respect to the pending icon 9A (the variable icon 9C). may

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, as the specific display, an image suggesting the degree of expectation for the win, an image suggesting the effect to be executed after the specific display is displayed, or an animation is displayed. Was. On the other hand, as a specific display, two or more of these may be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of displaying a pending icon image indicating the pending number on a display screen,
The display control means performs specific display within a specific area having a contour similar to that of the reserved icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The display control means may display, as the specific display, an image suggesting a degree of expectation for winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The display control means may display, as the specific display, an image suggesting an effect to be executed after the specific display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The display control means is capable of superimposing and displaying the pending icon image on at least part of the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon continuous change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. This pending icon continuous change effect is executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending icon continuous change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Holding icon continuous change effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon continuous change effect A. FIG. Suspended icon continuous change performance A performs a suspension change in which the display mode changes to a mode with a higher degree of success and expectation in the order in which the variable performance is completed for the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A during the variable performance. It is a preview performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Also, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

The icons displayed in the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a plurality of types of shapes and It is assumed that the display mode is determined by combining a plurality of types of colors (in the example of FIG. 81, color differences are represented by patterns; actual patterns may be different). In each pending icon (including the variation icon 9C), one of a plurality of types of characters is assigned according to the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special figure lottery will win, and the character image is It shall be displayed as each pending icon. In the pending icon continuous change effect A, there are four types of shapes: circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, and colors (patterns) are white (white), green (diagonal), and red (shading). It is assumed that there are three kinds of The degree of expectation that the result of the associated special lottery will be a hit is higher in the order of circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, followed by white (white), green (diagonal), and red (shading). shall be.

Here, for each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the expected winning degree when the shape is different and the difference in the expected winning degree when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. . For example, white circle icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, white hexagram icon, green hexagram icon, red hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, The probability of winning may be increased in the order of the red five-pointed star icon. Also, for example, white circle icon, green circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, white hexagram icon, green hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagram The expectation may be higher in the order of the icon and the red five-pointed star icon. Also, for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green hexagram icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagram The expectation may be higher in the order of the icon and the red five-pointed star icon. Also for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green hexagram icon, red hexagram icon, green pentagram icon , red five-pointed star icon, and the probability of winning may be increased in this order. Orders other than these may be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form is a green hexagram icon, when it is a green hexagram icon from the time when the display of the suspension icon is started, when it is a white hexagram icon when the display of the suspension icon is started, and The degree of expectation for winning may be the same or different between when the icon changes to the green hexagram icon during execution of the icon continuous change effect A. - 特許庁That is, depending on the course of change leading up to the final display form, the degree of expectation of winning may differ or may not differ.
Note that, in the following examples, each pattern associated with each color will be used for description instead of each color.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed at high speed, and after each content becomes difficult to see, the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes. An effect image EG is displayed that suggests to do so. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image in which the effect image EG itself is animated. Also, at this time, the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a is displayed, and until the end of this variation effect, the first start port 20 and the second It is assumed that the ball has not entered the starting hole 21 . The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (bottom of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R). It should be noted that the display mode of each holding icon at the time of entering the ball is as follows: the variable icon 9C is a white hexagram icon, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is a white square icon, and the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area. is an outline pentagram icon, and the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is an outline circular icon. Here, for example, the display mode of each holding icon at the time of entering the ball may be a white circular icon with the lowest probability of winning. The explanation continues assuming that the result of the special lottery that triggered this variable production was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the display mode of the variation icon 9C changes from the outline hexagram icon to the hatched hexagram icon. This display mode change may be executed with animation. In this case, the shape of the variable icon 9C does not change, but only the pattern changes. However, it is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may be changed, for example, by changing to a hatched five-pointed star icon. Also, for example, only the shape may change, such as changing to a white five-pointed star icon. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the variation icon 9C changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, the display mode of the variation icon 9C may be changed. Further, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed. Further, for example, the display mode of the variation icon 9C may change at the same time when the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the effect image EG suggesting that the display mode of the variation icon 9C will change is displayed again. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image in which the effect image EG itself is animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, and the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes from the hatched hexagram icon to the shaded hexagram icon. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9C has changed twice. This display mode change may be performed with animation, or the second display mode change may be performed without displaying the effect image EG. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the variation icon 9C changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, the display mode of the variation icon 9C may be changed. Further, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed. Further, for example, the display mode of the variation icon 9C may change at the same time when the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Here, regarding the variable icon 9C, the variable icon changes from the white hexagram icon to the hatched hexagram icon in FIGS. Changed to the hanging hexagram icon. That is, both the first change and the second change were changes in which the degree of expectation for winning was raised by one level. On the other hand, for example, in the first change, the white hexagram icon is changed to the shaded hexagram icon, and the change that raises the expectation of winning by multiple stages may be executed in one change. . In addition, as an effect pattern in which the variation icon 9C is changed after the effect image EG is displayed, there is a special effect pattern in which the variation icon 9C suddenly changes without the effect image EG being displayed. A production pattern may be provided. It is assumed that these can be executed similarly in the change of the pending icon 9A described below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), an effect image EG is displayed that suggests that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image in which the effect image EG itself is animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes from an outline square icon to a hatched square icon. This display mode change may be executed with animation. In this case, the shape of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area does not change, and only the pattern changes. However, it is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may be changed, for example, by changing to a hatched hexagram icon. Also, for example, only the shape may change, such as changing to a white five-pointed star icon. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may be changed. Further, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed. Further, for example, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may change at the same time when the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), an effect image EG is displayed that suggests that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image in which the effect image EG itself is animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(H), the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes from the outline five-pointed star icon to the hatched five-pointed star icon. This display mode change may be executed with animation. In this case, the shape of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area does not change, and only the pattern changes. However, it is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may be changed, for example, by changing to a hatched hexagram icon. Also, for example, only the shape may be changed, such as by changing to an outline hexagram icon. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may be changed. Further, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is changed. Further, for example, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may change at the same time when the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(I), an effect image EG is displayed suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image in which the effect image EG itself is animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(J), the effect image EG suggesting that the display mode will change is displayed, but the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area does not change. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area did not change despite the execution of the effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area would change. That's what it means. In this case, a suggestion effect may be executed as if the display mode were to change with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which had been displayed in high-speed variation, are displayed in deceleration variation, and the decorative symbols representing "3," "2," and "6," respectively, are displayed. Temporary stop is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next variable performance is started as shown in FIG. 81(L).

The display example of the pending icon continuous change effect A has been described above. By adopting a configuration in which the suspended icon continuous change effect A can be executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the suspended change of not only the variable icon 9C but also the suspended icon 9A will occur during one variation effect. Become. Therefore, it is possible to amuse the player with the effect of the pending icon in the variable effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Holding icon continuous change effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon continuous change effect B. FIG. Suspended icon continuous change performance B performs a suspension change in which the display mode changes to a mode with a higher degree of success and expectation in the order in which the variable performance is completed for the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A during the variable performance. It is a preview performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Further, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

The icons displayed in the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a plurality of types of shapes and It is assumed that the display mode is determined by combining a plurality of types of colors (in the example of FIG. 82, color differences are represented by patterns; actual patterns may be different). In each pending icon (including the variation icon 9C), one of a plurality of types of characters is assigned according to the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special figure lottery will win, and the character image is It shall be displayed as each pending icon. In the pending icon continuous change effect B, there are four types of shapes: circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, and colors (patterns) are white (white), green (diagonal), and red (shading). , gold (honeycomb). The degree of expectation that the result of the associated special lottery will win is higher in the order of circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, white (white), green (diagonal), red (shading), gold ( honeycomb).

Here, for each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the expected winning degree when the shape is different and the difference in the expected winning degree when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. . For example, white circle icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, gold square icon, white hexagram icon, green hexagram icon, red hexagram icon, gold hexagram icon, The white five-pointed star icon, the green five-pointed star icon, the red five-pointed star icon, and the gold five-pointed star icon may be arranged to have a higher hit expectation in this order. Also, for example, white circle icon, green circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, white hexagram icon, green hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, red square The icon, the gold square icon, the red hexagram icon, the gold hexagram icon, the red pentagram icon, and the gold pentagram icon may be configured to have a higher hit expectation in this order. Also, for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green hexagram icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagram The icon, the red five-pointed star icon, the gold round icon, the gold square icon, the gold six-pointed star icon, and the gold five-pointed star icon may be selected in order of increasing hit expectation. Also for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green hexagram icon, red hexagram icon, green pentagram icon , red five-pointed star icon, gold circular icon, gold square icon, gold six-pointed star icon, and gold five-pointed star icon may be arranged in order of higher expectation. Orders other than these may be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form of a certain suspension icon is a green hexagram icon, the green hexagram icon is displayed from the time the display of the suspension icon is started, and the white hexagram icon is displayed at the start of display of the suspension icon. In addition, the winning expectation may be the same or different between when the icon changes to the green hexagram icon during execution of the pending icon continuous change effect A. That is, depending on the course of change leading up to the final display form, the degree of expectation of winning may differ or may not differ.
In the following examples, each color (white, green, red, and gold) is substituted, and each pattern (outline, diagonal line, hatching, and honeycomb) associated with the color is used for explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. At this time, the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is displayed, and until the end of this variation effect, the first start opening 20 and the second start opening It is assumed that there was no entry into 21. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (bottom of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R). It should be noted that the display mode of each holding icon at the time of ball entry is assumed to be an outline circular icon. Here, the display mode of each holding icon at the time of entering the ball may be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the variation icon 9C will change is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK1 after the change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C collides with the enlarged icon 9CK, which is the variable icon 9C displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, at this time, instead of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in FIG. 82(A), the mini pending icon 9AM and mini The variation icon 9CM is displayed. This display continues until the pending icon continuous change effect B ends. Here, the candidate icon HK1 is a hatched hexagram icon. Therefore, when the change is successful, the icon changes from the outline circular icon to the shaded hexagram icon, and in this change, both the shape and pattern of the variation icon 9C change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the shape may be changed, for example, by changing to an outline five-pointed star icon, or only the pattern may be changed, for example, by changing to a shaded circular icon. You may make it change. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), an enlarged icon 9CK of the variable icon 9C whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from the outline circular icon to the shaded hexagram icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the icon may change to a display mode different from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. In this case, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed both in shape and pattern. Also, the display of the enlarged icon 9CK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK2 after the display mode of the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area. It is The candidate icon HK2 is an outline five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the outline circular icon will change to the outline pentagram icon, and this change will change the shape of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, by changing to a hatched five-pointed star icon. Only the pattern may be changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), an enlarged icon 9AK of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed from the outline circular icon to the outline five-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the icon may change to a display mode different from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed is executed again. As in FIG. 82(D), the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area, is displayed as a candidate icon after the display mode of the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed. An effect in which HK3 collides is displayed. In FIGS. 82(D) to (E), since the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has already changed once, the enlarged icon 9AK is a blank five-pointed star icon. Candidate icon HK3 is a honeycomb pentagram icon. Therefore, when the change is successful, the white pentagram icon is changed to the honeycomb pentagram icon, and in this change, only the pattern of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may be changed, for example, by changing to a hatched hexagram icon, or only the shape may be changed, for example, by changing to an outline hexagram icon. may change. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), an enlarged icon 9AK of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area after the second display mode change is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed from the white pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the icon may change to a display mode different from the candidate icon HK3 in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is changed is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK4 after the change in the display mode of the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged second storage area. It is The candidate icon HK4 is an outline five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the outline circular icon will change to the outline pentagram icon, and this change will change the shape of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, by changing to a hatched five-pointed star icon. Only the pattern may be changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(I), an enlarged icon 9AK of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area whose display mode has not changed is displayed. That is, even though the suggestive effect is executed in FIG. 82(H), the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area maintains the display mode of the outline circular icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a display mode different from that of the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(J), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is changed is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK5 after the display mode of the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is changed collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged and displayed third storage area. It is Candidate icon HK5 is an outline square icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the outline circular icon will change to the outline square icon, and this change will change the shape of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, by changing to a hatched five-pointed star icon. Only the pattern may be changed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(K), an enlarged icon 9AK of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is changed from the outline circular icon to the outline square icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed to a display mode different from that of the candidate icon HK5 in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but are assumed to continue to fluctuate. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG. It is assumed that the pending icon continuous change effect B is completed with this scene.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(L), when the pending icon continuous change effect B ends, the display mode returns to the normal variable effect similar to that in FIG. 82(A). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to visually recognize their contents. Further, the change icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. Each pending icon is displayed in the display mode after the display mode is changed in FIGS. 82(B) to (K). After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R go through deceleration fluctuation display and temporary stop display, respectively, and are fixed and stopped, thereby ending this fluctuation effect.

The display example of the pending icon continuous change effect B has been described above. By adopting a configuration in which the pending icon continuous change effect B can be executed, the player can expect that the pending change of not only the variable icon 9C but also the multiple pending icons 9A will occur during one variable effect. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to amuse the player with the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Holding icon continuous change effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon continuous change effect C. FIG. Suspended icon continuous change performance C performs a suspension change in which the display mode changes to a mode with a higher degree of success and expectation in the order in which the variable performance is completed for the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A during the variable performance. It is a preview performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Also, during the stop display, one pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be visible, but a plurality of patterns may be made visible at the same time. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is winning, the game is stopped so that a set of three symbols aligned on a straight line becomes a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

The icons displayed in the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a plurality of types of shapes and shapes, each having a different degree of expectation that the result of the associated special figure lottery will win when executing the pending icon continuous change effect C. It is assumed that the display mode is determined by combining a plurality of types of colors (in the example of FIG. 83, color differences are represented by patterns; actual patterns may be different). In each pending icon (including the variation icon 9C), one of a plurality of types of characters is assigned according to the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special figure lottery will win, and the character image is It shall be displayed as each pending icon. In the pending icon continuous change effect C, there are five types of shapes: circle, square, hexagram, pentagram, and eight-pointed star, and colors (patterns) are white (white), green (diagonal), and red. (shading) and gold (honeycomb). The degree of expectation that the result of the associated special lottery will be a hit is higher in the order of circle, square, hexagram, pentagram, and eight-pointed star, white (white), green (diagonal), red (shaded) ) and gold (honeycomb).

Here, for each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the expected winning degree when the shape is different and the difference in the expected winning degree when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. . For example, white circle icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, gold square icon, white hexagram icon, green hexagram icon, red hexagram icon, gold hexagram icon, White pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon, gold pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold eight-pointed star icon Expectations may be raised. Also, for example, white circle icon, green circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, white hexagram icon, green hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, white octagram icon, green octagram icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, red square icon, gold square icon, red hexagram icon, gold hexagram icon, red pentagram icon, gold pentagram icon, red octagram icon, gold octagram icon The degree of expectation may be increased in order. Also, for example, white circular icon, white square icon, white hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green circular icon, green square icon, green six-pointed star icon, green pentagram icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagram icon, red pentagram icon, red octagram icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold hexagram icon, gold pentagram icon, gold octagram icon The degree of expectation may be increased in order. Also for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagram icon, white pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green hexagram icon, red hexagram icon , green five-pointed star icon, red five-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold six-pointed star icon, gold five-pointed star icon, gold eight-pointed star icon You may make it so that the degree of expectation will be high. Orders other than these may be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form of a certain suspension icon is a green hexagram icon, the green hexagram icon is displayed from the time the display of the suspension icon is started, and the white hexagram icon is displayed at the start of display of the suspension icon. In addition, the winning expectation may be the same or different between when the icon changes to the green hexagram icon during execution of the pending icon continuous change effect A. That is, depending on the course of change leading up to the final display form, the degree of expectation of winning may differ or may not differ.
In the following examples, each color (white, green, red, and gold) is substituted, and each pattern (outline, diagonal line, hatching, and honeycomb) associated with the color is used for explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. At this time, the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is displayed, and until the end of this variation effect, the first start opening 20 and the second start opening It is assumed that there was no entry into 21. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (bottom of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R). The display mode of each pending icon when the ball is entered is as follows: the variable icon 9C is a white square, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is a white eight-pointed star icon, and the pending icon corresponding to the second storage area is 9A is an outline hexagram icon, the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is an outline circular icon, and the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is an outline pentagram icon. Here, regarding the display mode of each holding icon at the time of ball entry, all the shapes are different, but the pattern is the same. On the other hand, the shapes may all be the same, or the shapes and patterns may all be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the variation icon 9C will change is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9CB, which is the variable icon 9C displayed in an enlarged manner, and the candidate icon after the change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes to a broken enlarged icon. An effect that appears from inside the icon 9CB is displayed. Also, at this time, in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, an area for storing each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) and an area for displaying the decorative symbols in a reduced size are provided. Here, the candidate icon is a hatched square icon. Therefore, when the change is successful, the icon changes from the outline square icon to the shaded square icon, and this change changes the pattern of the variation icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, by changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon, or, for example, by changing to an outline circular icon. , only the shape may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG. The display method and position shown in FIG. It shall be maintained until the performance C ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), an enlarged icon 9CB of the variable icon 9C whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from the outline square icon to the shaded square icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the icon may change to a display mode different from that of the candidate icon in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the enlarged icon 9CB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area, and the display mode of the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes. An effect is displayed in which the next candidate icon appears from inside the broken enlarged icon 9AB. Here, the candidate icon is the hatched eight-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white eight-pointed star icon will change to the shaded eight-pointed star icon, and this change will change the pattern of the variation icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may be changed, for example, by changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon, or, for example, by changing to an outline circular icon. , only the shape may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), an enlarged icon 9AB of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area whose display mode has not changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area remains the outline eight-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the icon may change to a display mode different from that of the candidate icon in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is changed is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRY is an enlarged icon 9AB, which is the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged second storage area, and an icon that is a candidate when the suspended icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes. A production that wraps in an aura similar to the pattern of is displayed. That is, the candidate icon is the hatched eight-pointed star icon. Therefore, when the change is successful, the white eight-pointed star icon changes to the shaded eight-pointed star icon, and this change changes the pattern of the variation icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, by changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon, or, for example, by changing to an outline circular icon. , only the shape may be changed. In addition, the suggestive effect using this character image CRY has a higher probability of changing the display mode of the target pending icon than the suggestive effect using the character image CRX shown in FIGS. 83(B) and (D). shall be That is, in the suspended icon continuous change effect C, as the presentation suggesting the display mode of the suspended icon, the suggestive presentation using the character image CRX, which has a relatively low degree of expectation for the change in the display mode, and the suggestion presentation, which has a relatively high degree of expectation for the change in the display mode. Either one of an effect using the character image CRY and an effect using the character image CRY is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that one of three or more suggestive effects, each having a different degree of expectation for change in the display mode, can be executed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in areas provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), an enlarged icon 9AB of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is changed from the outline eight-pointed star icon to the shaded eight-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the icon may change to a display mode different from that of the candidate icon in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. The display of the image representing the aura in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 83(F) is maintained. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64 without being limited to this. Further, the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first, third and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

After that, it is assumed that the display state of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is not changed, and furthermore, the suggesting effect that the display state is to be changed is not executed. That is, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area does not change, it is configured so as to select not to execute the suggestion effect that the display mode will change. It is assumed that

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is changed is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged fourth storage area, and the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes. An effect is displayed in which the next candidate icon appears from inside the broken enlarged icon 9AB. Also, at this time, in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, an area for storing each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) and an area for displaying the decorative symbols in a reduced size are provided. Here, the candidate icon is the hatched pentagram icon. Therefore, when the change is successful, the outline pentagram icon changes to the hatched pentagram icon, and this change changes the pattern of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, by changing to a shaded hexagram icon, or by changing, for example, to an outline circular icon. may be changed only. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in areas provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), an enlarged icon 9AB of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. In other words, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has changed from the outline five-pointed star icon to the hatched five-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the icon may change to a display mode different from that of the candidate icon in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. Also, the display of the magnifying icon 9AB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 without being limited to this. Also, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(J), an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a for the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed in FIGS. 83(H) to (I). , the display mode changes again. Here, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is changed from the hatched pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon. In addition, in the upper area of the display screen 7a (the suggestive effect and the area where the enlarged icon 9AB of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed), the hold icon corresponding to the fourth storage area is displayed. An image of a honeycomb pattern is displayed as an effect suggesting that the display mode of the icon 9A changes from the hatched pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon. The timing at which this honeycomb pattern image is displayed and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area changes from the hatched pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon may be set arbitrarily. shall be That is, an image of a honeycomb pattern is displayed. At the same time when this honeycomb pattern image is displayed, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from the hatched pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon, or the honeycomb pattern image may be displayed. After being displayed, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from the hatched pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon, or the display of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area. After the aspect changes from the hatched pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon, a honeycomb image may be displayed. In addition, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area, for example, changes to a shaded five-pointed star icon or changes shape, even though a honeycomb pattern image is displayed in the suggestive effect. In addition, you may make a change that is different from the change suggested by the suggestion production. In this way, when the suggestive effect using the character images CRX and CRY is not executed, or when the display mode has changed once, the display mode of the pending icon may suddenly change. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(K), since the effect related to the change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has ended, that is, since the pending icon continuous change effect C has ended, the variable effect is displayed. The mode returns to the mode similar to that of FIG. 83(A). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed with high-speed variation, and further, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (bottom of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R). . The display mode of each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) is the display mode after changing in FIGS. 83(B) to (J). Specifically, the variation icon 9C is a hatched square icon, the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is an outline eight-pointed star icon, the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is a honeycomb six-pointed star icon, and the third The suspension icon 9A corresponding to the storage area is displayed as an outline circular icon, and the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is displayed as a honeycomb five-pointed star icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R that have been variably displayed in FIGS. 83(A) to (K) are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped to represent "5", "5", and "9", respectively. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next variable effect is started.

The display example of the pending icon continuous change effect C has been described above. By adopting a configuration capable of executing the pending icon continuous change effect C, the player can expect that the pending change of not only the variable icon 9C but also the multiple pending icons 9A will occur during one change effect. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to amuse the player with the effect of the pending icon in the variable effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 81 to 83, after the variable effect is started, the first effect in which the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, and after the first effect, the first A second effect in which the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the storage area changes, and a third effect in which the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes after the second effect. It was a viable configuration. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to the "display screen" in claim 1, the variable icon 9C to the "variable icon", and the pending icon 9A to the "suspended icon", respectively.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are each executed multiple times. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, before the first effect, the fourth effect, which is the effect suggesting that the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, Before the second effect, a fifth effect that suggests that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes, and before the third effect, the second effect corresponds to the second storage area. A sixth effect, which is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon 9A changes, can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 83, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A may have different shapes at the start of display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the pending icon continuous change effect, a character image associated with each pending icon may be displayed together with each pending icon, and the display mode of each character image may be changed. In this case, for example, when the character associated with each pending icon wins the battle, the display mode of the character image may change to a mode with a higher expectation for a big win. Further, in this case, the character type may be determined by the degree of expectation of winning in the associated special drawing, or the display mode of each character image may be changed by the pending icon continuous change effect. good. Furthermore, for example, when the character image associated with each pending icon is displayed, the pending icon may be difficult to see or may be temporarily hidden.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon continuous change effects A and C, when the effect of changing the display mode of each pending icon is being executed, it may be arranged such that the change of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R cannot be visually recognized. . Further, in the pending icon continuous change effect B, it may be possible to visually recognize how the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing.

[Modification 3]
In the pending icon continuous change effects A and B, as shown in the pending icon continuous change effect C, the degree of expectation for the change in the display mode of the suspended icon is different as the effect suggesting that the display mode of the suspended icon changes. One of a plurality of types of effects may be selected and executed.

[Modification 4]
In the pending icon continuous change effect, before the change of the display mode of each pending icon is executed, a specific numerical value such as the ranking of the expected degree of jackpot or the probability of hitting the big win in the pending icon after the change of the display mode is set. may be presented.

[Modification 5]
In the pending icon continuous change effect B, as shown in FIG. 81(A) and FIG. 83(A), the display mode before the display mode is changed may be different for each pending icon.

[Modification 6]
The effects described in the decorative pattern change effects A to E may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A game machine having a display screen capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific icon associated with the special lottery that triggered the variable effect being executed,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined icon associated with a special drawing lottery that triggers a variable effect to be executed from the next time onward,
a first effect in which the display mode of the specific icon changes after the start of the variable effect;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the display mode of the first predetermined icon associated with the special lottery to be digested in the next variable effect changes;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the display mode of the second predetermined icon associated with the special lottery that is digested in the variable effect one after another changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may each be executed multiple times,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
a fourth effect, which is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific icon changes, before the first effect;
a fifth effect, which is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the first predetermined icon changes before the second effect;
A sixth effect, which is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the second predetermined icon will change, can be executed before the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The specific icon and the plurality of predetermined icons may all have different display forms.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol variation update effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. This symbol variation update effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the symbol variation update effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pattern change update effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation update effect A. FIG. 84(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol variation update effect A, and FIGS. 84(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol variation update effect A.

In the first example of the symbol variation update effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" design. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is scroll display in the vertical direction inside the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 84(B) to (D), the symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation effect is an effect of re-varying the decorative symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image obtained by adding a downward arrow image to an image simulating the effect button 63 . The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . The same applies to the following. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 84(B), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to move downward. As a result, the "7" and "9" images have moved downward, and the "8" and "0" images have entered the frame.
In FIG. 84(C), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the '7' and '9' images are out of the frame, and the '8' and '0' images are moved to near the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(D), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

It should be noted that the design variation effects shown in FIGS. 84B to 84D may be executed by operating the effect button 63 once. Further, the design variation effects of FIGS. 84(B) to 84(D) may be executed by repeated hitting operation or long pressing operation of the effect button 63 . Here, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, but the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the decorative pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, the right decorative design 8R stops at the "2" design and forms a reach mode together with the left decorative design 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁In addition, regardless of the operation of the effect button 63, the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped at the "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the "3" pattern, which is a reach-losing mode. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped at the "3" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁Further, regardless of the operation of the production button 63, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped at the "3" pattern.

In the second example of the symbol variation update effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84(G), the stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" design. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is scroll display in the vertical direction inside the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 84(H) to (K), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation effect is an effect of re-varying the decorative symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image obtained by adding a downward arrow image to an image simulating the effect button 63 . The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . The same applies to the following. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 84(H), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to move downward. As a result, the "7" and "9" images have moved downward, and the "8" and "0" images have entered the frame.
In FIG. 84(I), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the '7' and '9' images are out of the frame, and the '8' and '0' images are moved to near the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(J), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the "8" image and the "0" image are moved to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(K), the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the "9" image and the "1" image are moved to the center of the frame image WG.

It should be noted that a single operation of the effect button 63 may be configured such that the symbol variation effects of FIGS. 84(H) to (K) are executed. Further, the design variation effects of FIGS. 84(H) to 84(K) may be executed by repeated hitting operation or long pressing operation of the effect button 63 . Here, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, but the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(L), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the decorative pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, the right decorative design 8R stops at the "2" design and forms a reach mode together with the left decorative design 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C has started high-speed fluctuation. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁In addition, regardless of the operation of the effect button 63, the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped at the "2" symbol.

[Pattern change update effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation update effect B. FIG. 85(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol variation update effect B, and FIGS. 85(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol variation update effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the symbol variation update effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" design. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is scroll display in the vertical direction inside the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(B) to (D), the symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation effect is an effect of re-varying the decorative symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image obtained by adding a downward arrow image to an image simulating the effect button 63 . The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . The same applies to the following. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 85(B), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image is moved downward and the "0" image is in the frame.
In FIG. 85(C), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image goes out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(D), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuates at high speed.

It should be noted that the design variation effects of FIGS. 85(B) to (D) may be executed by operating the effect button 63 once. Further, the design variation effects of FIGS. 85(B) to 85(D) may be executed by repeated hitting operation or long pressing operation of the effect button 63 . Here, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, but the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(E) and 85(F), a reach forming effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the decorative pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, the right decorative design 8R stops at the "2" design and forms a reach mode together with the left decorative design 8L. In FIG. 85(E), the "2" symbol is enlarged as the "2" symbol stops. The "2" pattern is temporarily enlarged and then returned to its original size. In FIG. 85(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C has started to fluctuate at high speed.

Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁In addition, regardless of the operation of the effect button 63, the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped at the "2" symbol.

In the second example of the symbol variation update effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85(G), the stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of columns of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at "9" design, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at "2" design. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is scroll display in the vertical direction inside the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(H) to (K), the symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation effect is an effect of re-varying the decorative symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image obtained by adding a downward arrow image to an image simulating the effect button 63 . The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . The same applies to the following. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 85(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image is moved downward and the "0" image is in the frame.
In FIG. 85(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image goes out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "0" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "1" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.

It should be noted that the design variation effects of FIGS. 85(H) to (K) may be executed by operating the effect button 63 once. Further, the design variation effects of FIGS. 85(H) to 85(K) may be executed by repeated hitting operation or long pressing operation of the effect button 63 . Here, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, but the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects of FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(L), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the "2" pattern, which is a winning mode. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁In addition, regardless of the operation of the production button 63, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped at the "2" pattern.

[Pattern change update effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation update effect C. FIG. 86(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol variation update effect C, and FIGS. 86(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol variation update effect C.

In the first example of the symbol variation update effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" design, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" design. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is scroll display in the vertical direction inside the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), the symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation effect is an effect of re-varying the decorative symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image obtained by adding a downward arrow image to an image simulating the effect button 63 . The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . The same applies to the following. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 86(B), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image is moved downward and the "0" image is in the frame.
In FIG. 86(C), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image goes out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 86(D), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuates at high speed. The right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates at high speed in a reduced state. The right decorative pattern 8R is sufficiently reduced and then hidden.

It should be noted that the design variation effects of FIGS. 86(B) to (D) may be executed by operating the effect button 63 once. Further, the design variation effects of FIGS. 86(B) to 86(D) may be executed by repeated hitting operation or long pressing operation of the effect button 63 . Here, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, but the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. The specific symbol stop effect is an effect in which a specific symbol stops at a predetermined row of decorative symbols. Here, the right decorative design 8R is stopped at the "NEXT" design as the specific design. The "NEXT" symbol is enlarged as the "NEXT" symbol is stopped. The "NEXT" pattern is temporarily enlarged and then returned to its original size. The "NEXT" symbol is a specific symbol suggesting a pseudo continuous effect. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped at the "NEXT" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁Moreover, regardless of the operation of the effect button 63, the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped at the "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a re-variation effect accompanying the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. A configuration may be adopted in which the re-variation effect is executed in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63 . Moreover, it may be configured such that the re-variation effect is executed regardless of the operation of the effect button 63 .

In the second example of the symbol variation update effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying a plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at "9" design, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at "2" design. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is scroll display in the vertical direction inside the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86(H) to (K), the symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation effect is an effect of re-varying the decorative symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative symbols. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image obtained by adding a downward arrow image to an image simulating the effect button 63 . The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 . The same applies to the following. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 86(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image is moved downward and the "0" image is in the frame.
In FIG. 86(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image goes out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 86(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "0" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 86(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "1" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.

It should be noted that a single operation of the effect button 63 may be configured such that the symbol variation effects of FIGS. 86(H) to (K) are executed. In addition, it may be configured such that the design variation effects of FIGS. Here, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, but the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(L), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol. Here, the middle decorative design 8C is stopped at the "NEXT" design. The "NEXT" symbol is a specific symbol suggesting a pseudo continuous effect. Also at this time, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped at the "NEXT" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁Moreover, regardless of the operation of the effect button 63, the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped at the "NEXT" symbol.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the symbol variation update effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the production button 63, a pattern variation production (FIG. 84 ( B) ~ (E), Figures 84 (H) ~ (K), Figures 85 (B) ~ (D), Figures 85 (H) ~ (K), Figures 86 (B) ~ (D), Figure 86 ( H) to (K)), and after the pattern change effect, a pattern update effect (Fig. 84(E)(F), FIG. 84(L), FIG. 85(E), FIG. 85(L), FIG. 86(E), FIG. 86(L)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented re-variation effect and improve the interest of the game. Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to "operation means", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "effect executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as the symbol update effect, the decorative symbols in the specific row are stopped at the "NEXT" symbol, suggesting that the pseudo continuous effect is executed (Fig. 86 (E), Fig. 86 (L) )). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented re-variation effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enlargement/reduction effect of the decorative symbols in the specific row is executed along with the symbol update effect (FIGS. 85(E) and 86(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented re-variation effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a non-display effect for hiding the decorative symbols of the specific row is executed during the enlargement/reduction effect (Fig. 86(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented re-variation effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the symbol variation update effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol is used as an example of the specific symbol, but the specific symbol is not limited to this. For example, if a symbol suggesting a specific effect (such as a pseudo continuous effect) is determined in advance as a "3" symbol, the "3" symbol may be used as the specific symbol.

[Modification 2]
Although the button image BG is continuously displayed in the above embodiment, the display/non-display of the button image BG may be switched in accordance with the timing at which the effect button 63 is activated.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the decoration patterns in the predetermined row are vertically scroll-displayed inside the frame image. On the other hand, the design may be switched without scrolling. Specifically, after FIG. 84(J), the pattern does not move in the vertical direction and the display as shown in FIG. 84(K) is performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A8-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A game machine comprising an effect executing means capable of executing an effect triggered by an operation of the operating means,
According to the operation of the operation means, the production execution means,
a pattern variation effect for re-fluctuation of a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of stationary decorative symbols;
After the pattern change effect, a pattern update effect is executed in which the decorative patterns of the specific row among the decorative patterns of the predetermined row are stopped with a pattern different from the pattern stopped before the re-variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
The effect executing means stops the decorative pattern of the specific row at a specific pattern as the pattern update effect, and suggests that a specific effect is executed after the specific pattern is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
Suggesting the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect by stopping the decorative pattern of the specific row at the specific pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-3,
The effect execution means executes an enlargement/reduction effect including at least one of enlargement and reduction of the decorative symbols of the specific row, in accordance with at least one of the symbol change effect and the symbol update effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-4,
During the enlargement/reduction effect, a non-display effect is executed to hide the decorative pattern of the specific row;
A gaming machine characterized by:

87 to 89, the winning expectation suggesting effects 1 to 3 will be described below. The hit expectation degree suggesting productions 1 to 3 are executed in the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to display the image.

[Expectation Suggestion Production 1]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the hit expectation degree suggestion effect 1. FIG. In the hit expectation degree suggestion performance 1, while the display screen 7a is fluctuating, four reserved special drawing lots are accumulated, and the expectation degree of the winning of the special drawing lottery of the change and the expectation degree of the reserved special drawing drawing are displayed. , one by one, and then, one by one, the effect of informing the result of the judgment is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are in the process of being changed are displayed. In addition, it is in a state where four reserves of the second special figure are accumulated. That is, the hold icon 9C (the change icon corresponding to the change) and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4 corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure hold, respectively is displayed. Here, pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4 and 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A may be displayed, the pending icon 9C may not be displayed, or no pending icon may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an omikuji performance is performed. This omikuji performance is performed in a state where 4 second special reserves are accumulated. When this performance is performed, the ornamental patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the omikuji tube OMK is displayed on the display screen 7a so that the player can mainly see the omikuji performance. This omikuji presentation changes the modes of the pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4, and this changed mode suggests the degree of expectation for winning. 9B4 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the special figure lottery of the change and the reserved special figure lottery are produced one by one, and are displayed side by side in a line with the same size in order to make it look like there are five chances. Here, the first omikuji is given, and "great good luck" is displayed as the result OKA of the omikuji.

Here, the result OKA of the omikuji includes ``great good luck'', ``middle good luck'', ``small good luck'', and ``sue good luck'', and represents the degree of expectation for winning the special lottery, and ``good luck'' is the highest expectation. The degree of expectation is 50, "Nakayoshi" is the second highest, the expectation is 30, "Shokichi" is the third highest, the expectation is 20, and "Sueyoshi" is the lowest (fourth highest). ) The expectation level is 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), "Dai" representing the result "great good luck" is displayed on the pending icon 9C of the change corresponding to the first omikuji. At this time, the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not display the results of the omikuji.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the second omikuji is given, and "small luck" is displayed as the result of the omikuji, OKA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), "small" representing "small luck", which is the result, is displayed on the first pending icon 9B1 of the second special figure pending corresponding to the second omikuji. At this time, the pending icon 9C continues to display "big" representing the result of the first oracle, and the pending icons 9B2, 9B3 and 9B4 do not display the result of the oracle.

As described above, the omikuji effect is performed for all reserved special lotteries, and the results of the omikuji are displayed on all reserved icons. This omikuji performance is performed with the same variation.

FIG. 87(F) shows a state in which the omikuji effect is performed for all reserved special lotteries, and the results of the omikuji are displayed on all reserved icons. The pending icon 9C displays "large" representing "great good luck" which is the result of the omikuji of the change, and the pending icon 9B1 displays "small good luck" which is the result of the first omikuji of the second special pending. "Small" representing the second "Sue", which is the result of the third special reserved omikuji, is displayed, and "Nakayoshi", which is the result of the fourth special reserved omikuji, is displayed on the reserved icon 9B4. "Medium" is displayed. The pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed side by side in a line with the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the result of the special drawing lottery in which the omikuji was given first is displayed. "7" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "8" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "9" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), the holding is shifted by displaying the result of the special figure lottery in which the omikuji was first performed. That is, the pending icon 9B1 becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon 9B2 becomes the pending icon 9B1, the pending icon 9B3 becomes the pending icon 9B2, and the pending icon 9B4 becomes the pending icon 9B3. After that, the result of the special lottery in which the omikuji was made second is displayed. "1" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "2" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "3" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing lottery is lost.

The pending shift movement and the display of the result of the special lottery in which the omikuji was made are repeated. Repeat until all the results of the special lottery pending when the omikuji production is performed are displayed. That is, the results of the special lottery five times are displayed after the omikuji production is finished. In addition, when the result of the special figure lottery is hit, it will be described later in "hit expectation degree suggestion production 2".

FIG. 87(I) shows a state in which the result of the fifth special figure lottery is displayed. "4" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "5" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "6" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing is lost.

[Hit expectation degree suggestion production 2]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the hit expectation degree suggestion effect 2. FIG. In the hit expectation degree suggesting performance 2, while the display screen 7a is fluctuating, four reserved special drawing lots are accumulated, and the expectation degree of the winning of the special drawing lottery of the change and the expectation degree of the reserved special drawing drawing are displayed. , one by one, and then, one by one, the effect of informing the result of the judgment is performed. As a result of winning/failure determination, when winning is determined, a winning game is performed after notifying the winning. After the winning game is played, after the suspension is accumulated, the performance is again performed to suggest the expectation of winning of the special figure lottery of the change and the expectation of winning of the reserved special figure lottery one by one. .

In this winning expectation degree suggesting effect 2, the same effect as the winning expectation degree suggesting effect 1 to 5 in the winning expectation degree suggesting effect 1 (FIGS. 87(B) to 87(F)) is performed. FIG. 88(A) is the same effect as FIG. 87(F).

Again, the result OKA of the omikuji includes "Great good luck", "Naka good luck", "Small good luck", and "Sue good luck", and represents the degree of expectation for winning the special lottery, and "Great good luck" is the highest expectation. The degree of expectation is 50, "Nakayoshi" is the second highest, the expectation is 30, "Shokichi" is the third highest, the expectation is 20, and "Sueyoshi" is the lowest (fourth highest). ) The expectation level is 10.

In FIG. 88(A), an omikuji performance is performed, the pending icon 9C displays "big" representing "great good luck" which is the result of the change in the omikuji, and the pending icon 9B1 displays the second special figure pending. ``small'' representing ``small good luck'', which is the result of the first omikuji of the second special reservation, is displayed on the pending icon 9B2, and ``big ” is displayed, the pending icon 9B3 displays “End” representing “Sueyoshi” which is the result of the third omikuji of the second special pending, and the pending icon 9B4 displays the second special pending "Medium" representing "Nakayoshi", which is the result of the fourth omikuji, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the result of the special drawing lottery in which the omikuji was given first is displayed. "7" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "8" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "9" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the holding is shifted by displaying the result of the special drawing lottery in which the omikuji was given first. That is, the pending icon 9B1 becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon 9B2 becomes the pending icon 9B1, the pending icon 9B3 becomes the pending icon 9B2, and the pending icon 9B4 becomes the pending icon 9B3. After that, the result of the special lottery in which the omikuji was made second is displayed. "1" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "2" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "3" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the hold is shifted, and the result of the special lottery in which the omikuji is made third is displayed. ``7'' is displayed for the left decorative pattern 8L, ``7'' for the middle decorative pattern 8C, and ``7'' for the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a telop TATR of "big win" indicating that the big win game is started is displayed, and the big win game is performed. Here, the winning game is a big winning winning game, but it may be a small winning winning game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), after the jackpot game, variation is started. Retention accumulates here.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) to (I), an omikuji performance is performed due to the accumulation of pending. This omikuji performance is the same as that described with reference to FIGS.

[Hit expectation suggestion production 3]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the win expectation degree suggestion effect 3. FIG. The winning expectation degree suggesting performance 3 is the expectation degree of winning of the special drawing lottery of the change and the expectation degree of winning of the reserved special drawing drawing, when four reserved special drawing lots are accumulated while the display screen 7a is fluctuating. , and even in the pending display, each time, a production that suggests the expectation of the special lottery hit is performed, and the expectation of the special lottery hit is suggested. This is an effect to perform an effect to notify the result of the success/fail judgment one by one after performing an effect to perform.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being changed are displayed. In addition, it is in a state where four reserves of the second special figure are accumulated. In other words, it is a state in which the pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special figure pending are displayed. Here, pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4 and 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A may be displayed, the pending icon 9C may not be displayed, or no pending icon may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), an omikuji performance is performed. This omikuji performance is performed in a state where 4 second special reserves are accumulated. When this performance is performed, the ornamental patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the omikuji tube OMK is displayed on the display screen 7a so that the player can mainly see the omikuji performance. This omikuji presentation changes the modes of the pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4, and this changed mode suggests the degree of expectation for winning. 9B4 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the special figure lottery of the change and the reserved special figure lottery are produced one by one, and are displayed side by side in a line with the same size in order to make it look like there are five chances. Here, the first omikuji is given, and "great good luck" is displayed as the result OKA of the omikuji.

Here, the Omikuji result OKA is the same as the type and the order of reliability described above in the "performance 1 for suggesting degree of winning expectation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the change pending icon 9C changes from "white" (no hatching) to "red" (hatching 1). Colors represented by hatching will be described later. The change in the color of the pending icon does not represent the result of the omikuji, but represents the degree of expectation for winning the special drawing, separately from the omikuji. At this time, the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not change color.

As shown in FIG. 89(J), in FIG. 89, "white" is represented by no hatching, "red" by hatching 1, "green" by hatching 2, and "blue" by hatching 3.

Here, the colors of the pending icon are “red”, “green”, and “blue”, and represent the degree of expectation for winning the special lottery. “Green” has the second highest expectation level of 30, and “Blue” has the lowest (third highest) expectation level of 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), the second Omikuji is given, and "small luck" is displayed as the Omikuji result OKA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), the first reservation icon 9B1 of the second special figure reservation changes from the display of "white" to the display of "blue" (hatching 3). At this time, the pending icon 9C remains displayed in "red" (hatching 1), and the pending icons 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not change color.

As described above, the omikuji effect is performed for all reserved special lotteries, and the color change display is performed for all the reserved icons. be

FIG. 89(F) shows a state in which the omikuji effect is performed for all reserved special drawing lots, and the color change effect is performed for all reserved icons. The pending icon 9C is displayed in "red", the pending icon 9B1 is displayed in "blue",
The pending icon 9B2 is displayed in "green", the pending icon 9B3 is displayed in "blue", and the pending icon 9B4 is displayed in "green". The pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed side by side in a line with the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the result of the special drawing lottery in which the omikuji was given first is displayed. "7" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "8" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "9" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), the hold is shifted by displaying the result of the special figure lottery in which the omikuji was first made. That is, the pending icon 9B1 becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon 9B2 becomes the pending icon 9B1, the pending icon 9B3 becomes the pending icon 9B2, and the pending icon 9B4 becomes the pending icon 9B3. After that, the result of the special lottery in which the omikuji was made second is displayed. "1" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "2" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "3" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing lottery is lost.

The shift movement and the display of the result of the special lottery in which the omikuji was made are repeated. Repeat until all the results of the special lottery pending when the omikuji production is performed are displayed. That is, the results of the special lottery five times are displayed after the omikuji production is finished.

FIG. 89(I) shows a state in which the result of the fifth special figure lottery is displayed. "4" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, "5" for the middle decorative design 8C, and "6" for the right decorative design 8R, indicating that the special drawing is lost. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a win, the win game is performed after displaying that it is a win, and then again as described above in "Hit Expectation Degree Suggestion 2". Omikuji production is performed for all reservations.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of the effects of the hit expectation suggesting productions 1 to 3 are shown.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in the "expectation degree suggesting performance 1", and uses the display screen 7a to display the images held during the same variation. It is possible to execute the first production (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)) respectively suggesting the degree of expectation of winning in all the special lotteries. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of reserved special figure lotteries, and to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in the "hit expectation degree suggesting effect 1", before the first effect (Fig. 87 (D) to (F)), the winning in the special figure lottery of the variation A second effect (FIGS. 87(B) and (C)) suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of reserved special figure lotteries, and to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon 9C corresponding to the variation, as shown in the “hit expectation level suggestion effect 1”, and among the plurality of types of images, One of them is the suspended icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4. Depending on the mode, it suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery of the change, and in the first production (FIGS. 87 (D) to (F)), the mode of the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 changes. , respectively suggest the expected degree of winning in all reserved special lotteries after the change. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of reserved special figure lotteries, and to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in "hit expectation degree suggesting effect 1", after the first effect (Fig. 87 (D) to (F)), the success or failure determination in the special figure lottery of the variation It is possible to execute the third effect (FIGS. 87(G) to (I)) for notifying the result and then notifying the results of the success/failure determination in all the reserved special figure lotteries. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of reserved special figure lotteries, and to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in the "hit expectation degree suggesting effect 1", in the first effect (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)), the pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 , 9B4 are displayed side by side. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of reserved special figure lotteries, and to improve interest.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the winning expectation suggesting effects 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first effects (FIGS. 87 (D) to (F)), the second effects (FIGS. 87 (B), (C)) and the third effects (FIGS. 87 (G) to (I )) suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery, and informs the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the special lottery, but suggests the expectation of winning the general lottery, and judges the success may be reported.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the first effects (FIGS. 87 (D) to (F), FIGS. 88 (D) to (F)) and the second effects (FIGS. 87 (B), (C), FIG. 88 (B ) and (C)), the type, presence, and color of the characters of the pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are changed, but the size and shape may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the first rendering (FIGS. 87(D)-(F), FIGS. 89(D)-(F)), the pending icon 9C and the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4 are arranged horizontally in a row. Although they are displayed side by side, they may be displayed in a vertical line.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning expectation degree suggesting effect and the success/failure determination result notification effect are performed, but the lottery of the first special symbol may be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, for all reserved lotteries in the omikuji production, the degree of expectation for winning the special lottery is suggested, and the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the special lottery is reported. Suggestion of the degree of expectation of winning the figure lottery, and may be notified of the result of the success or failure determination of the special figure lottery. Up to a lottery for a specific hold means, for example, the fluctuation, up to the first to third holds. In addition, in the production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery, it is until the suspension that the production that the winning is confirmed is performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Using the display means, during the same fluctuation, it is possible to execute the first production that respectively suggests the degree of expectation of winning in all reserved special lotteries or normal lotteries,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
Before the first production, it is possible to execute a second production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special lottery or normal lottery of the fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is the variation icon corresponding to the variation;
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
In the second effect, the aspect of the variable icon changes, and the aspect of the variable icon after the change suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing or normal drawing drawing of the variation,
In the first production, the mode of the pending icon changes, suggesting the expected degree of winning in all the reserved special drawing or normal drawing drawing after the change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
After the first production, the result of the success or failure determination in the special figure lottery or the general figure lottery of the change is notified, and then all the pending special figure lottery or general figure lottery The results of the decision , capable of executing the third effect to be notified respectively,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
In the first effect, the variable icon and the pending icon are displayed side by side in a row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. The pending icon change effect is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Holding icon change effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon change effect A. FIG. In the pending icon change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, the reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 90(D) to (G), an image movement effect is executed. The image moving effect is a effect in which a specific image moves within the display screen. Here, a circular character image CG frames in from the right end of the display screen 7a, then moves leftward and out of the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 90(D), the first character image CG is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a. The character image CG that has entered the frame moves leftward. In FIG. 90(E), the "7" symbol as the right decorative symbol 8R is in a state of being difficult to see. In FIG. 90(F), the character image CG has moved further, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the character image CG. As a result, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. In FIG. 90(G), the last character image CG is out of the frame from the left edge of the display screen 7a. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to change. Also, the display color of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. As shown in FIGS. 90(B) and (C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped in order to form a reach mode, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. to form a reach mode. Again, the red pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, after the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 90(J). The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(K), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has been achieved. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. When the above-described hit confirmation effect is executed, there is no loss. When the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and a loss occurs, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at "7" symbols, and the middle decorative symbols stop at "8" symbols.

[Holding icon change effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon change effect B. FIG. In the pending icon change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, the reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 91(D) to (F), an image increase effect is executed. The image increase effect is a effect in which the number of specific images increases within the display screen. Here, circular character images CG are displayed one after another at various positions on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 91(D), three character images CG are displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, the variable icon 9C is difficult to see. Part of the "8" pattern as the middle decorative pattern 8C is also covered with the character image CG. In FIG. 91(E), a plurality of character images CG are displayed. As a result, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see. Also, the change icon 9C is difficult to see. In FIG. 92(F) and FIG. 91(E), a plurality of character images CG are displayed. As a result, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the character image CG. As a result, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), an image non-display effect is executed. The image non-display effect is a effect for hiding the specific image. Here, the character image CG covering the entire display screen 7a is hidden. Left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to change. Also, the display color of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The modes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed. Specifically, the normal display mode (FIG. 91(C)) is changed to the 7-segment display mode. As shown in FIGS. 91(B) and (C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped in order to form a reach mode, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. to form a reach mode. Again, the red pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(I), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, after the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 91(J). The final battle production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has been achieved. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, and the winning is reported. The "7" pattern has a 7-segment display mode. When the above-described hit confirmation effect is executed, there is no loss. When the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and the game is lost, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at "7" symbols, and the middle decorative symbols stop at "8" symbols. The "8" pattern may also be displayed in a 7-segment display mode.

[Holding icon change effect C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon change effect C. FIG. In the pending icon change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, the reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop production is a production in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium decorative design slows down and the medium decorative design stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C. As a result, a reach-losing mode is formed. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 92(E) and (F), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of displaying a specific image on the display screen.

In FIG. 92(E), the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are covered with the ally character CRA, making them difficult to see. Specifically, the ally character CRA covers the entire middle decorative pattern 8C and partially covers the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Also, the variation icon 9C is hidden. In FIG. 92(F), the display of the teammate character CRA is maintained, and the decoration pattern, the pending icon, and the variable icon are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), an image non-display effect is executed. The image non-display effect is a effect for hiding the specific image. Here, the teammate character CRA covering the entire display screen 7a is not displayed. Left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to change. Also, the display color of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown with hatching). The aspect of the background image has also changed. The display color of the background image changes from white to green (indicated by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production to form a predetermined ready-to-win state with decorative symbols. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. As shown in FIGS. 92(B) and (C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped in order to form a reach mode, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. to form a reach mode. Again, the red pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Also, the display color of the background image is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(I), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development production is a production that suggests development to a battle production. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a message image MG of "Development to Battle Reach".

Next, after the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 92(J), the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are clashing. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(K), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has been achieved. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, and the winning is reported. Again, the display color of the background image is green. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed. In that case, it may be displayed in red or may be displayed in white. When the above-described hit confirmation effect is executed, there is no loss. When the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and the game is lost, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at "7" symbols, and the middle decorative symbols stop at "8" symbols.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image CG overlapping a plurality of pending icons 9A is displayed so as to make at least a portion of the pending icons 9A difficult to see (FIGS. 90(F) and 91(F)), After that, the specific image is hidden, and along with the non-display of the specific image, all of the plurality of pending icon images 9A are changed to another mode (FIGS. 90(G) and 91(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with an unprecedented change in the pending icon, and improve the interest in the game. The production control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "production executing means". In addition, the image movement effects in FIGS. 90(D) to (G) correspond to both the "image display effect" and the "image non-display effect". 91(D) to (F) correspond to the "image display effect", and the image non-display effect of FIG. 91(G) corresponds to the "image non-display effect". Further, the effect of changing the display color of the pending icon 91 in FIGS. 90(G) and 91(G) corresponds to the "holding change effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect is executed to expand the display area of the character image CG on the display screen (FIGS. 90(D) to (F), FIGS. 91(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with an unprecedented change in the pending icon, and improve the interest in the game. The effects shown in FIGS. 90(D) to (F) and FIGS. 91(D) to (F) correspond to the "enlarged area effect".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of character images CG displayed on the display screen is increased with time (FIGS. 90(D) to (F), FIGS. 91(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with an unprecedented change in the pending icon, and improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the background image on the back side of the pending icon 9A displayed superimposed on the pending icon 9A is changed according to the change of the pending icon 9A (FIG. 92(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with an unprecedented change in the pending icon, and improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the 7-segment display mode in accordance with the change of the pending icon 9A (FIG. 91(H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with an unprecedented change in the pending icon, and improve the interest in the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the character image CG was configured to overlap the plurality of pending icons 9A. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 92(E) and (F), a configuration may be adopted in which the hold icon 9A is hidden to make it difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the change in the mode of the decorative design (FIG. 91) and the change in the display color of the background image (FIG. 92) are configured separately. It is good also as a structure which performs both change.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the display color of the background image is changed (FIG. 92). On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the object drawn in the background image is changed.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the display color of the pending icon is changed (FIGS. 90 to 92). On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the shape of the pending icon is changed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a pending display effect for displaying a pending icon image indicating the number of pending on a display screen,
The production executing means is
an image display effect for displaying a specific image overlapping a plurality of the suspended icon images so as to make at least part of the suspended icon images difficult to see;
an image non-display effect in which the specific image is hidden after the image display effect;
a pending change effect of changing all of the plurality of pending icon images to a different mode in accordance with the image non-display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
The effect executing means executes, in the image display effect, an enlarged area effect of enlarging a display area of the specific image occupying a display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
The effect executing means increases the number of the specific images displayed on the display screen over time as the enlarged area effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3,
The effect executing means changes at least one of the aspect of the image on the back side of the suspended icon image displayed superimposed on the suspended icon image and the aspect of the decorative pattern in accordance with the suspended change effect. is executable to
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect button operation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. In FIGS. 93 to 95, various movable accessories, various decorative members, background images, etc. arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the production button operation production A, FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the production button operation production B, and FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the production button operation production C. .

In this effect button operation effect, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, an image for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is displayed at a predetermined timing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instructions to execute the effect button operation effect are included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and executes the image display device. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is operated during the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is higher than when the second movable accessory 15 is not operated. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that a win will occur after the end (that is, after the performance pattern is stopped and displayed), and that multiple performance patterns are aligned with the same pattern. When the second movable accessory 15 is activated during the temporary stop display, there is a higher expectation that the player will be awarded more profit among the plurality of types of winning than when the second movable accessory 15 is not activated. can also be suggested to the player. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the actuation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15 .

Here, the production pattern, the pending icon, etc. will be briefly explained first, and the production button operation production A, the production button operation production B, and the production button operation production C will be explained in order.

[Production pattern]
First, the production pattern will be briefly explained. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode. In the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design, each performance design is a number design Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → The reels are rotated in the order of number "7"→number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the effect pattern stopped and displayed at the stop position moves downward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "fluctuation direction") All at once (simultaneously) While the speed is gradually increased from the low speed, the display mode changes from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern is decelerated immediately before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the reflected light reflected by the performance pattern rotates clockwise along the outline of the performance pattern at the stop position, and then rotates clockwise. When the reflected light stops and disappears, it becomes a stopped display state.

When the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, the win is determined, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are the same pattern. If the stop display is displayed without lining up, the loss is confirmed. In this way, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are images capable of informing the result of the hit or miss determination.

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B will be explained. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position (on the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . A first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation in the area to the left of the variable display position, and a second reserved display area is provided as the second special figure reservation in the area to the right of the variable display position. It is In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed linearly in a row, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The first pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9A, and the farthest pending icon 9A from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed linearly in a line, and up to four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The first pending icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9B, the second closest pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9B, and the third pending icon 9B is the third pending icon to the variable icon 9C. 9B, and the farthest pending icon 9B from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9B. In the present embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B can indicate the degree of expectation of winning by their colors, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of white→red→yellow (gold). Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the variable performance music is output from the speaker 67 (starts to flow), and at the timing when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable performance music is output from the speaker 67. is supposed to be stopped. In other words, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the variable effect music is started from the beginning.

[Production button operation production A]
Next, the effect button operation effect A will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the player rotates the handle 60, shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and performs a left-handed game. A will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the current volume level is displayed in five levels from the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum) in the upper row. A volume level image SL indicating the level is displayed, and a luminance level image LL indicating the current luminance level among five levels from the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)) to the fifth luminance level (maximum) is displayed in the lower row. It is Note that the volume level is the volume of sound output from the speaker 67 . The brightness level is the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. FIG. Warning sound (for example, when the upper surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, when the front frame 53 is open, etc.), abnormal operation notification sound (for example, when various movable accessories are at the retracted position If it is not possible to return to the game ball, there is a problem with the payout operation of paying out the game ball, etc.), an alarm sound at the time of fraud confirmation (for example, if abnormal vibration is detected, if abnormal magnetism is detected, abnormal game balls to various winning opening , etc.), the volume level is always the maximum without depending on the changed volume level. In addition, the warning light emission mode corresponding to the warning sound, the operation abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the abnormal operation notification sound, and the fraud confirmation warning light emission mode corresponding to the fraudulent confirmation alarm sound are completely independent of the luminance level to be changed. always at the maximum brightness level.

When the sound volume level is the fifth (maximum), five sound volume level images SL each having a square shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction. When the volume level is the third sound volume level, four sound volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , two square-shaped volume level images SL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) is displayed, one square-shaped volume level image SL is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the volume level image SL is an image having a quadrangular shape that is solidly painted in light blue.

At the fifth luminance level (maximum), five luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and at the fourth luminance level, a luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed. Four luminance level images LL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the luminance level is the third luminance level, three luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the luminance level is the second luminance level. , two luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and displayed, and when the luminance level is the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)), one luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the luminance level image LL is an image having a rectangular shape that is solidly painted in green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level. , and five rectangular luminance level images LL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction.

Note that the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level as the lower part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are always arranged and displayed. It has become.

Further, the change of the volume level and the change of the brightness level are performed when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system is completely activated, and the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL are displayed at respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. It is possible to do it from the point of time. In other words, when the game is not started and the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state (hereinafter, including when a demonstration effect for customer waiting is being performed), the setting mode is displayed and one of the setting items is selected. It does not change the volume level or the brightness level, but after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system has completed booting, the player can change the volume level and the brightness level at the timing desired by the player. changes can be made.

The player rotates the handle 60, shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and performs a left-handed game. Then, the white holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

After that, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and then, As shown in FIG. 93(A), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are identical when aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. The symbol is not aligned, and it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first start hole 20 and becomes the white pending icon 9A, and the white pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 93(B). Thus, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

During this fluctuation, the player repeatedly presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to lower the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to display the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG Only SDG is displayed in a blinking display mode (the volume up button image SUG is displayed in a lighting mode). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the pressing operation of the volume down button of the volume button 55 by the player, and the volume level change exclusive sound called "pawn" flows from the speaker 67, and also relates to the production of variable performance music, effect sound, etc. Various effect sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and flowed from the speaker 67. - 特許庁Further, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) in order from the rightmost one.

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to lower the volume level to the first volume level (minimum), the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 how many times. However, the volume level of the first volume level (minimum) is maintained, and only one volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is displayed.

After that, the player repeatedly presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 to decrease the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56, as shown in FIG. A simulated brightness down button image LDG and a brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and the brightness down button image LDG is displayed when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. only blinks (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted so as to correspond to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2. The magnitude of the brightness of the frame lamp 66 is also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Further, every time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the square brightness level images LL are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) in order from the rightmost one.

Here, the player has lowered the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level to the first brightness level (minimum), the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 how many times. However, the luminance level of the first luminance level (minimum) is maintained, and only one luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), first, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. While they are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the right side, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate, forming reach.

After the ready-to-win is formed, the white variation icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the battle effect of super ready-to-win (SP reach) is displayed from the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern. It switches to the screen and develops into a battle production. In addition, by switching from the screen of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern to the battle effect screen of super reach (SP reach), the white change icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). ), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are also hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level is arranged and displayed as the lower part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. state is maintained.

In this battle effect, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear at the center of the display screen 7a. This is an effect in which the character CRB fights, and is a super reach (SP reach) effect in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

After a predetermined period of time (eight seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the battle effect, as shown in FIG. At the center of the display screen 7a and in front of the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB, there is a production button image (simulating the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 for promoting the pressing operation of the production button 63. The BG is displayed in a large size, and a horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB indicating the effective remaining time of the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a part of the lower side of the effect button image BG.

The effect button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". Note that the effect button image BG is displayed in a predetermined lighting mode, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the battle effect. . For example, as the "predetermined light emission mode", a high degree of expectation is set that the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses in the order of white flashing->red flashing->yellow flashing (gold flashing). Here, since the white variation icon 9C is not displayed (because it has disappeared from the display screen 7a), the effect button image BG flashes in white, which is the same color as the variation icon 9C. (The effect button image BG is in a white blinking light emission mode). The lighting mode of the effect button image BG is changed from white flashing to red flashing instead of the non-displayed (disappeared from the display screen 7a) white, so as to make the effect that the expectation of winning is high. may

The gauge image TB is an image that informs the player of the effective remaining time of the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by changing to an image in which the length of the gauge is shortened. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape is set as the maximum gauge length, and the maximum time of the effective remaining time is set to 15 seconds, which is the maximum gauge length. ing. The right end of the gauge moves toward the left end as time elapses to show the passage of time by an image in a display mode in which the length of the gauge becomes shorter, and when 15 seconds elapse, the length of the gauge becomes zero. If the gauge length becomes zero after 15 seconds have passed without the performance button 63 being operated before the gauge length becomes zero, then the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a).

In the battle production, when two seconds have passed since the production button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 several times to increase the volume level, and selects the desired volume. up to the volume level of When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to display the volume up button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG. Only SUG blinks (the volume down button image SDG lights up). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the pressing operation of the volume up button of the volume button 55 by the player, and the volume level change exclusive sound called "pawn" flows from the speaker 67, and also relates to the production of variable performance music, effect sound, etc. Various effect sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and flowed from the speaker 67. - 特許庁Moreover, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is added in order to the right of the image arranged on the rightmost side and displayed.

Here, the player has increased the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum), the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 how many times. However, the volume level of the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

In FIG. 93(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level, the production button image BG and the gauge image TB are assumed to be pressed as the production button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (it never disappears from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to lower the volume level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not displayed because the effect button 63 is pressed. (it never disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, in the battle effect, after 7 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times to increase the brightness level. Push to raise the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56, as shown in FIG. Simulated) brightness down button image LDG and brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, respectively, and the brightness up button image LUG is displayed when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56. only blinks (the brightness down button image LDG is displayed in a lit display mode). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted so as to correspond to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2. The magnitude of the brightness of the frame lamp 66 is also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Further, every time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, a brightness level image LL having a rectangular shape is added in order to the right of the image arranged on the rightmost side and displayed.

Here, the player increases the luminance level from the third luminance level to the fifth luminance level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 to raise the brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 how many times. However, the luminance level of the fifth luminance level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed.

In FIG. 93(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are assumed to have been pressed as the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (it never disappears from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 to lower the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not displayed because the effect button 63 is pressed. (it never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle effect, when 12 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the effect button 63, and as shown in FIG. is displayed, the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen a), the enemy character CRB remains displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen 7a, and the message "defeat" is displayed to the right of the enemy character CRB. The image MS is displayed in a large size to inform the player that the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won.

When the battle effect is completed, the battle effect screen is switched again to the screen of the effect symbol variation effect (variation display), and the white variation icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L is the number "2". Temporary stop display is performed, the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the center of the horizontal direction passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are arranged in a row on a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(K), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "2"), and are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. . Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level is arranged and displayed as the lower part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. It is in a state of

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and becomes the holding icon 9A, and the holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. . Of course, a state in which the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper part of the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level as the lower part of the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed. It's becoming When the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern are confirmed. When the 8Rs of the same pattern are stopped and displayed together, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which the player is given a profit is started. It should be noted that even if the jackpot opening is started, and even if the jackpot game is started, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is shown on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level is shown on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The state in which the luminance level images LL indicating , and are respectively arranged and displayed is still continued.

As described above, the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, and the effect button 63 are important buttons related to effects that can be pressed by the player. By the time 15 seconds have passed after the start, the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, or the player presses the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. However, even if the effect button 63 is pressed, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the result of the battle effect is not displayed as a result of the success/failure determination. On the other hand, when the player presses the production button 63, the result of the battle production is displayed as a result of the success/failure determination.

[Production button operation production B]
Next, the effect button operation effect B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the player rotates the handle 60, shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and performs a left-handed game. B will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the current volume level is displayed in five levels from the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum) in the upper row. A volume level image SL indicating the level is displayed, and a luminance level image LL indicating the current luminance level among five levels from the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)) to the fifth luminance level (maximum) is displayed in the lower row. It is Note that the volume level is the volume of sound output from the speaker 67 . The brightness level is the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. FIG. Warning sound (for example, when the upper surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, when the front frame 53 is open, etc.), abnormal operation notification sound (for example, when various movable accessories are at the retracted position If it is not possible to return to the game ball, if there is a problem with the payout operation of paying out the game ball, etc.), an alarm sound at the time of fraud confirmation (for example, if abnormal vibration is detected, if abnormal magnetism is detected, abnormal game balls to various winning openings , etc.), the volume level is always the maximum without depending on the changed volume level. In addition, the warning light emission mode corresponding to the warning sound, the operation abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the abnormal operation notification sound, and the fraud confirmation warning light emission mode corresponding to the fraudulent confirmation alarm sound are completely independent of the luminance level to be changed. always at the maximum luminance level.

When the sound volume level is the fifth (maximum), five sound volume level images SL each having a square shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction. When the volume level is the third sound volume level, four sound volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , two square-shaped volume level images SL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) is displayed, one square-shaped volume level image SL is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the volume level image SL is an image having a quadrangular shape that is solidly painted in light blue.

At the fifth luminance level (maximum), five luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and at the fourth luminance level, a luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed. Four luminance level images LL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the luminance level is the third luminance level, three luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the luminance level is the second luminance level. , two luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and displayed, and when the luminance level is the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)), one luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the luminance level image LL is an image having a rectangular shape that is solidly painted in green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level. , and five rectangular luminance level images LL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there is arranged and displayed an effect mode selection display area SEL in which the effect modes composed of spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode are displayed in a manner in which reels are rotated. A select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button 68 is arranged and displayed on the left side of the effect mode selection display area SEL. At the center of the effect mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR indicating the selected (changed) effect mode is arranged.

Each time the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel in the production mode selection display area SEL rotates upward from the lower side to the upper side, and the production mode rotated to the selection mode section TR is another. While being displayed larger than the production mode and being reversed (the background color and the character color are switched), each time the lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel of the production mode selection display area SEL The production mode that rotates downward from the upper side to the lower side and rotates to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is reversely displayed (the background color and the character color are combined). are replaced). The production mode rotated to the selection mode section TR becomes the production mode to be selected (changed), and the production corresponding to the selected (changed) production mode proceeds. Here, the production mode called summer mode is arranged in the selection mode section TR, and the production corresponding to the summer mode is in progress.

Note that the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper part of the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level as the lower part of the lower left side of the display screen 7a are always arranged and displayed. It has become. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are always arranged and displayed. The corresponding select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) is always arranged and displayed.

Further, the change of the volume level, the change of the brightness level, and the change of the effect mode are performed when the power to the game machine 1 is turned on and the system is completely activated, and the volume level image SL, the brightness level image LL, and the effect mode selection display area SEL are displayed. and the selection mode section TR are displayed at respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, when the game is not started and the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state (hereinafter, including when a demonstration effect for customer waiting is being performed), the setting mode is displayed and one of the setting items is selected. The volume level is not changed, the brightness level is changed, or the effect mode is changed, but after the power to the game machine 1 is turned on and the system is completely activated, the player can change the volume level at the timing that the player wants to change. can be changed, the brightness level can be changed, and the effect mode can be changed.

The player rotates the handle 60, shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and performs a left-handed game. Then, the white holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

After that, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and then, As shown in FIG. 94(A), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are identical when aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. The symbol is not aligned and it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first start hole 20 and becomes the white pending icon 9A, and the white pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 94(B). Thus, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

During this variation, the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 to change the presentation mode, thereby setting the desired presentation mode. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68, only the lower button image blinks among the upper button image, the right button image, the lower button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG. (The upper button image, the right button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lighting mode).

Here, the player changes the production mode from the summer mode to the autumn mode, and the autumn mode rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and highlighted (background color and the character color are exchanged). When this variation (that is, the variation) ends due to the change in the production mode and the next production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) is started, the summer mode is switched to the autumn mode, and the next production pattern fluctuation production In (variable display), a state is entered in which the production corresponding to the autumn mode is progressing. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the blinking display mode of the lower button image is canceled and the upper button image SBG is displayed. The button image, the right button image, and the left button image are returned to the same display mode (illuminated display mode).

After that, during this fluctuation, the player repeatedly presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to decrease the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to display the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG Only SDG is displayed in a blinking display mode (the volume up button image SUG is displayed in a lighting mode). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the pressing operation of the volume down button of the volume button 55 by the player, and the volume level change exclusive sound called "pawn" flows from the speaker 67, and also relates to the production of variable performance music, effect sound, etc. Various effect sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and flowed from the speaker 67. - 特許庁Further, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) in order from the rightmost one.

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to lower the volume level to the first volume level (minimum), the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 how many times. However, the volume level of the first volume level (minimum) is maintained, and only one volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is displayed.

After that, the player repeatedly presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 to decrease the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56, as shown in FIG. A simulated brightness down button image LDG and a brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and the brightness down button image LDG is displayed when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. only blinks (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted so as to correspond to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2. The magnitude of the brightness of the frame lamp 66 is also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Further, every time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the square brightness level images LL are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) in order from the rightmost one.

Here, the player has lowered the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level to the first brightness level (minimum), the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 how many times. However, the luminance level of the first luminance level (minimum) is maintained, and only one luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed.

When the player repeatedly presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level, the white variation icon 9C changes to the red variation icon 9C, and the degree of expectation for the variation increases. It suggests to the player that the height has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(E), first, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. While they are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the right side, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate, forming reach.

After the ready-to-win is formed, the red variable icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the battle effect of super ready-to-win (SP ready-to-win) is displayed from the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern. It switches to the screen and develops into a battle production. In addition, by switching from the screen of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern to the battle effect screen of super reach (SP reach), the red change icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). ), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are also hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level is arranged and displayed as the lower part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. state is maintained. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the state in which the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed is maintained, and the select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. The state in which the select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to is arranged and displayed is maintained.

In this battle effect, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear at the center of the display screen 7a. This is an effect in which the character CRB fights, and is a super reach (SP reach) effect in which the degree of expectation for winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

After a predetermined period of time (eight seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the battle effect, as shown in FIG. At the center of the display screen 7a and in front of the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB, there is a production button image (simulating the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 for promoting the pressing operation of the production button 63. The BG is displayed in a large size, and a horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB indicating the effective remaining time of the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the effect button image BG.

The effect button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". Note that the effect button image BG is displayed in a predetermined lighting mode, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the battle effect. . For example, as the "predetermined light emission mode", a high degree of expectation is set that the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses in the order of white flashing->red flashing->yellow flashing (gold flashing). Here, since the red variation icon 9C is not displayed (because it disappears from the display screen 7a), the effect button image BG flashes in red, which is the same color as the variation icon 9C. (The effect button image BG is in a red blinking light emission mode). The light emission mode of the effect button image BG is changed from red flashing to yellow flashing (gold flashing) instead of the non-displayed red color (disappeared from the display screen 7a) to produce an effect that the expectation of winning is increased. may be performed.

The gauge image TB is an image that informs the player of the effective remaining time of the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by changing to an image in which the length of the gauge is shortened. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape is set as the maximum gauge length, and the maximum time of the effective remaining time is set to 15 seconds, which is the maximum gauge length. ing. The right end of the gauge moves toward the left end as time elapses to show the passage of time by an image in a display mode in which the length of the gauge becomes shorter, and when 15 seconds elapse, the length of the gauge becomes zero. If the gauge length becomes zero after 15 seconds have passed without the performance button 63 being operated before the gauge length becomes zero, then the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a).

In the battle production, when two seconds have passed since the production button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 several times to increase the volume level, and selects the desired volume. up to the volume level of When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to display the volume up button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG. Only SUG blinks (the volume down button image SDG lights up). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the pressing operation of the volume up button of the volume button 55 by the player, and the volume level change exclusive sound called "pawn" flows from the speaker 67, and also relates to the production of variable performance music, effect sound, etc. Various effect sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and flowed from the speaker 67. - 特許庁Moreover, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is added in order to the right of the image arranged on the rightmost side and displayed.

Here, the player has increased the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum), the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 how many times. However, the volume level of the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

In FIG. 94(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are assumed to be pressed as the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (it never disappears from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to lower the volume level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not displayed because the effect button 63 is pressed. (it never disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, in the battle effect, after 7 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times to increase the brightness level. Push to raise the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56, as shown in FIG. Simulated) brightness down button image LDG and brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, respectively, and the brightness up button image LUG is displayed when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56. only blinks (the brightness down button image LDG is displayed in a lit display mode). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted so as to correspond to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2. The magnitude of the brightness of the frame lamp 66 is also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Further, every time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, a brightness level image LL having a rectangular shape is added in order to the right of the image arranged on the rightmost side and displayed.

Here, the player increases the luminance level from the third luminance level to the fifth luminance level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 to raise the brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 how many times. However, the luminance level of the fifth luminance level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed.

In FIG. 94(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are assumed to have been pressed as the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (it never disappears from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not displayed because the effect button 63 is pressed. (it never disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, in the battle effect, when 10 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player subsequently presses the upper button of the select button 68 in order to change the effect mode. and select the desired production mode. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed. Of these, only the upper button image is displayed in a blinking display mode (the right button image, the down button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lighting mode).

Here, the player operates the select button 68 to return the production mode to the summer mode before the change, changes (returns) from the autumn mode to the summer mode again, and rotates to the selection mode section TR. The summer mode is displayed larger than the other production modes and is displayed in reverse (the background color and the character color are exchanged). Even if this variation (that is, the variation) is terminated by the change of the production mode and the next production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) is started, the next production pattern will not be changed from the summer mode to the autumn mode. The current summer mode will be continued even in the variable production (variable display). When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the blinking display mode of the upper button image is canceled, and the upper button image SBG is displayed to the right of the select button image SBG. The button image, the down button image, and the left button image are returned to the same display mode (illuminated display mode).

In FIG. 94(J), even if the player presses any one of the up, right, down, and left buttons of the select button 68 in order to change the presentation mode, Even if the effect button 63 is pressed, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be hidden (they will not disappear from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle effect, when 13 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the effect button 63, and as shown in FIG. 94(K), "OARO ” is moved downward from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position in the center of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, , 1.5 seconds). When the player presses the production button 63, the result of the battle production is displayed, the enemy character CRB is hidden (disappears from the display screen a), and the ally character CRA is displayed on the center left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MS of "victory" is displayed in a large size at the upper left of the ally character CRA and not covered at all by the second movable accessory 15 stopping at the advanced position, and the ally character CRA wins. A player is notified that the enemy character CRB has been defeated.

In the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL are not covered with the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level displayed as the lower left side, and the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL is not hindered at all.

Furthermore, when the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode part TR, To improve the visibility of the production mode selection display area SEL, the selection mode part TR, and the select button image SBG without covering the selection button image SBG displayed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. not hindered at all.

When the second movable accessory 15 moves again from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) and disappears from the display screen 7a, the battle production is completed, and the battle production screen changes to the production pattern variation production (variation display) screen. The left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" on the display screen 7a. are arranged in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(L), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern (here, the number "2"), and the win is confirmed. . Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is arranged as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level is arranged and displayed as the lower part on the left side of the display screen 7a. It is in a state of Furthermore, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. A corresponding select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed.

When the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and after that, the big win game in which profits are awarded to the player is started. It should be noted that even if the jackpot opening is started, and even if the jackpot game is started, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is shown on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level is shown on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The state in which the luminance level images LL indicating , and are respectively arranged and displayed is still continued. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the state in which the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed is still continued, and a select button is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. The state in which the select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to 68 is arranged and displayed still continues.

As described above, the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, the select button 68, and the effect button 63 are important buttons related to effects that can be pressed by the player. By the time 15 seconds have passed since TB is displayed, the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, or the player presses the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. Even if the player presses any one of the up button, right button, down button, and left button of the select button 68, it is assumed that the effect button 63 is pressed and the effect button image BG is displayed. and the gauge image TB are not hidden (not disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the result of the battle effect is not displayed as a result of the success/failure determination. As a result, the result of the battle production is displayed.

[Production button operation production C]
Next, the effect button operation effect C will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the player rotates the handle 60, shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and performs a left-handed game. C will be explained. Here, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the left effect symbols 8L are stopped and displayed with the number "1" in a state of being aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. , the middle effect symbol 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right effect symbol 8R is stop-displayed with the number "3". At this point, the player has not rotated the handle 60 and has not fired the game ball, so there is no hold icon and the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state. .

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, a volume level image SL indicating the current volume level among five levels from the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum) is displayed in the upper row. , and a luminance level image LL indicating the current luminance level among five levels from the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)) to the fifth luminance level (maximum) is displayed in the lower row. Note that the volume level is the volume of sound output from the speaker 67 . The brightness level is the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. FIG. Warning sound (for example, when the upper surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, when the front frame 53 is open, etc.), abnormal operation notification sound (for example, when various movable accessories are at the retracted position If it is not possible to return to the game ball, if there is a problem with the payout operation of paying out the game ball, etc.), an alarm sound at the time of fraud confirmation (for example, if abnormal vibration is detected, if abnormal magnetism is detected, abnormal game balls to various winning openings , etc.), the volume level is always the maximum without depending on the changed volume level. In addition, the warning light emission mode corresponding to the warning sound, the operation abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the abnormal operation notification sound, and the fraud confirmation warning light emission mode corresponding to the fraudulent confirmation alarm sound are completely independent of the luminance level to be changed. always at the maximum brightness level.

When the sound volume level is the fifth (maximum), five sound volume level images SL having a square shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the sound volume level is the fourth sound volume level, the sound volume level images SL having a square shape are displayed. When the volume level is the third sound volume level, the volume level images SL are displayed so as to be arranged in the horizontal direction. , two square-shaped volume level images SL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the first volume level (minimum (not muted)), one square-shaped volume level image SL is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the volume level image SL is an image having a quadrangular shape that is solidly painted in light blue.

At the fifth luminance level (maximum), five luminance level images LL each having a rectangular shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and at the fourth luminance level, each luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed. Four luminance level images LL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the luminance level is the third luminance level, three luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the luminance level is the second luminance level. , two luminance level images LL having a rectangular shape are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and displayed, and when the luminance level is the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)), one luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the luminance level image LL is an image having a rectangular shape solidly painted in green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level. , and five rectangular luminance level images LL are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there is arranged and displayed an effect mode selection display area SEL in which the effect modes composed of a spring mode, a summer mode, an autumn mode, and a winter mode are displayed in a manner in which reels are rotated. A select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button 68 is arranged and displayed on the left side of the effect mode selection display area SEL. At the center of the performance mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR indicating the selected (changed) performance mode is arranged.

Each time the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel of the production mode selection display area SEL rotates upward from the lower side to the upper side, and the production mode rotated to the selection mode section TR is another. While the display is large and reversed (the background color and the character color are switched) compared to the production mode of , each time the lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel of the production mode selection display area SEL is displayed. The production mode that rotates downward from the upper side to the lower side and rotates to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is reversely displayed (the background color and the character color are combined). are replaced). The production mode rotated to the selection mode part TR becomes the production mode to be selected (changed), and the production corresponding to the selected (changed) production mode proceeds. Here, the production mode called summer mode is arranged in the selection mode section TR, and the production corresponding to the summer mode is in progress.

Note that the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper part of the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level as the lower part of the lower left side of the display screen 7a are always arranged and displayed. It has become. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are always arranged and displayed. The corresponding select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) is always arranged and displayed.

Further, the change of the volume level, the change of the brightness level, and the change of the effect mode are performed by turning on the power to the game machine 1 and completing the activation of the system, the volume level image SL, the brightness level image LL, and the effect mode selection display area SEL. and the selection mode section TR are displayed at respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, when the game is not started and the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state (hereinafter, this includes the time when a demonstration effect for customer waiting is being performed), the setting mode is displayed, and one of the setting items is selected. The volume level is not changed, the brightness level is changed, or the effect mode is changed, but after the power to the game machine 1 is turned on and the system is completed, the player can change the volume level at the timing desired by the player. can be changed, the brightness level can be changed, and the effect mode can be changed.

When the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 to change the effect mode, and selects the desired pattern. The production mode is set to When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68, only the lower button image blinks among the upper button image, the right button image, the lower button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG. (The upper button image, the right button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lighting mode).

Here, the player changes the production mode from the summer mode to the autumn mode, and the autumn mode rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and highlighted (background color and the character color are exchanged). Due to this change in production mode, when the next production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) is started, the current summer mode is switched to autumn mode, and in the next production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) Autumn mode and A state is entered in which the corresponding production is progressing. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the blinking display mode of the lower button image is canceled and the upper button image SBG is displayed. The button image, the right button image, and the left button image are returned to the same display mode (illuminated display mode).

After that, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 several times to decrease the volume level. to lower the volume level to your liking. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to display the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG Only SDG is displayed in a blinking display mode (the volume up button image SUG is displayed in a lighting mode). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the pressing operation of the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 by the player, and a sound dedicated to volume level change "ping" is played from the speaker 67. - 特許庁Further, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) in order from the rightmost one.

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to lower the volume level to the first volume level (minimum), the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 how many times. However, the volume level of the first volume level (minimum) is maintained, and only one volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is displayed.

After that, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player subsequently presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to decrease the brightness level. Press the brightness to lower the brightness level to your liking. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56, as shown in FIG. A simulated brightness down button image LDG and a brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and the brightness down button image LDG is displayed when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. only blinks (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted so as to correspond to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2. The magnitude of the brightness of the frame lamp 66 is also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Further, every time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the square brightness level images LL are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) in order from the rightmost one.

Here, the player has lowered the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level to the first brightness level (minimum), the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 how many times. However, the luminance level of the first luminance level (minimum) is maintained, and only one luminance level image LL having a rectangular shape is displayed.

After that, the player rotates the handle 60 and shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A to play a left-handed game. When the ball is entered and the white holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position, it becomes a yellow (gold) variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. be. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(E), first, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. While the symbols are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the right side, the variation of the medium effect pattern 8C is continued to form a ready-to-win state.

After the reach is formed, the yellow (gold color) variation icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and super reach (SP reach) is displayed from the screen of the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern. It switches to a battle production screen, and develops into a battle production. By switching from the screen of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern to the battle effect screen of super reach (SP reach), the yellow (gold) change icon 9C is hidden (displayed) on the display screen 7a. disappears from the screen 7a), and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are also hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level is arranged and displayed as the lower part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. state is maintained. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the state in which the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed is maintained, and the select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. The state in which the select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to is arranged and displayed is maintained.

In this battle effect, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a super reach (SP reach) effect with high expectations set in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

Due to the battle production, the allied character CRA fell down and was defeated once, and the enemy character CRB was victorious, but the allied character CRA stood up and revived, fought the enemy character CRB again, and finally the allied character CRA won. Then, the enemy character CRB is defeated and the battle effect is finished, and the battle effect screen is switched again to the screen of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, and as shown in FIG. Temporary stop display is performed at "2", medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at number "2", right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at number "2", and passes through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95(G), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned on the horizontal line, and the re-fluctuation is started, and the display screen 7a is displayed. At the center, in front of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, a effect button image BG (simulating the effect button 63) corresponding to the effect button 63 for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is provided. is displayed in a large size, and a horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB indicating the effective remaining time of the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover part of the lower side of the effect button image BG.

The effect button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". Note that the effect button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode, and is intended to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of promotion to 16 rounds (R) as a winning type and a V-passing scheduled jackpot by re-variation. It's becoming For example, as the "predetermined luminescence mode", expectations are set high for 16 rounds (R) in the order of flashing white → flashing red → flashing yellow (gold flashing) to advance to the V-passing expected jackpot. Here, since the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C is not displayed (because it has disappeared from the display screen 7a), the effect button image BG is yellow (gold), which is the same color as the variation icon 9C. It is in a blinking light emission mode (the effect button image BG is in a yellow blinking (gold color blinking) light emission mode). It should be noted that if the color of the variation icon 9C is red, the light emission mode of the effect button image BG is changed to blink in red, which is the same color as the hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) red. Alternatively, red flashing may be replaced with yellow flashing (gold flashing) to produce an effect that raises the expectation of promotion to the 16th round (R), V passing scheduled jackpot. .

The gauge image TB is an image that informs the player of the effective remaining time of the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by changing to an image in which the length of the gauge is shortened. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape is set as the maximum gauge length, and the maximum time of the effective remaining time is set to 15 seconds, which is the maximum gauge length. ing. The right end of the gauge moves toward the left end as time elapses to show the passage of time by an image in a display mode in which the length of the gauge becomes shorter, and when 15 seconds elapse, the length of the gauge becomes zero. If the gauge length becomes zero after 15 seconds have passed without the performance button 63 being operated before the gauge length becomes zero, then the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a).

After two seconds have passed since the re-fluctuation is started and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player repeatedly presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 in order to increase the volume level. , to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to display the volume up button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG. Only SUG blinks (the volume down button image SDG lights up). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the pressing operation of the volume up button of the volume button 55 by the player, and a sound dedicated to volume level change called "pawn" flows from the speaker 67, and it is related to the production of variable production music, effect sound, etc. Various effect sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and flowed from the speaker 67. - 特許庁Moreover, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is added in order to the right of the image arranged on the rightmost side and displayed.

Here, the player has increased the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum), the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 how many times. However, the volume level of the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

In FIG. 95(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level, the production button image BG and the gauge image TB are assumed to be pressed as the production button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (it never disappears from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to lower the volume level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not displayed because the effect button 63 is pressed. (it never disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, during the re-fluctuation, after 7 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 repeatedly to increase the brightness level. is pressed to raise the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56, as shown in FIG. Simulated) brightness down button image LDG and brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, respectively, and the brightness up button image LUG is displayed when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56. only blinks (the brightness down button image LDG is displayed in a lit display mode). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted so as to correspond to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2. The magnitude of the brightness of the frame lamp 66 is also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Further, every time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, a brightness level image LL having a rectangular shape is added in order to the right of the image arranged on the rightmost side and displayed.

Here, the player increases the luminance level from the third luminance level to the fifth luminance level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 to raise the brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 how many times. However, the luminance level of the fifth luminance level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed.

In FIG. 95(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are assumed to be pressed as the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (it never disappears from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not displayed because the effect button 63 is pressed. (it never disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, during the re-fluctuation, 10 seconds after the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 to change the effect mode. Operate to set the desired production mode. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 95(J), the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed. Among them, only the upper button image is displayed in a blinking display mode (the right button image, the down button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lighting mode).

Here, the player presses the select button 68 to return the effect mode to the summer mode that was set when the effect symbols were stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 was in a standby state). The summer mode is changed (returned) from the autumn mode to the summer mode again by the operation, and the summer mode that has been rotationally moved to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is highlighted (background color and text color) is arranged. Due to this change in production mode, when the next production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) is started, the current summer mode is switched to autumn mode, and in the next production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) Autumn mode and A state is entered in which the corresponding production is progressing. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the blinking display mode of the upper button image is canceled, and the upper button image SBG is displayed to the right of the select button image SBG. It returns to the same display mode as the button image, the down button image, and the left button image.

In FIG. 95(J), even if the player presses any one of the up, right, down, and left buttons of the select button 68 in order to change the presentation mode, Even if the effect button 63 is pressed, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be hidden (they will not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, during the re-fluctuation, when 13 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the effect button 63, and as shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" moves downward from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position in the center of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (this embodiment Then, it is stopped for 1.5 seconds).

In the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL are not covered with the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level displayed as the lower left side, and the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL is not hindered at all.

Furthermore, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode part TR, To improve the visibility of the production mode selection display area SEL, the selection mode part TR, and the select button image SBG without covering the selection button image SBG displayed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. not hindered at all.

When the second movable accessory 15 moves again from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) and disappears from the display screen 7a, the re-fluctuation ends, the result of the re-fluctuation is displayed, and the left effect pattern 8L is the number "7". , the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the horizontal direction passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. Aligned in a row on the center line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(L), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and the win is confirmed. . Here, as the hit type, since it was a hit due to the resurrection of the battle, it was 16 rounds (R) (actually 15 rounds (R)), V-passing planned jackpot, but due to re-variation, 16 rounds (R), V-passing It has been promoted to the planned jackpot. Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is arranged as the upper part on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the luminance level image LL indicating the luminance level is arranged and displayed as the lower part on the left side of the display screen 7a. It is in a state of Furthermore, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. A corresponding select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed.

When the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and after that, the big win game in which profits are awarded to the player is started. It should be noted that even if the jackpot opening is started, and even if the jackpot game is started, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is shown on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level is shown on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The state in which the luminance level images LL indicating , and are respectively arranged and displayed is still continued. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the state in which the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed is still continued, and a select button is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. The state in which the select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to 68 is arranged and displayed still continues.

As described above, the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, the select button 68, and the effect button 63 are important buttons related to effects that can be pressed by the player. By the time 15 seconds have passed since the image TB was displayed, the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, or the player presses the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. Even if the pressing operation is performed or the player presses any one of the up button, the right button, the down button, and the left button of the select button 68, the effect button image is regarded as the pressing operation of the effect button 63. The BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (not disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the result of the re-fluctuation is not displayed as a result of the success/failure determination. As a result of determination, the result of re-fluctuation is displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the production button operation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, the production button 63, the select button 68, etc. that can be operated by the player, and the image display device 7 (display) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. means) and an effect control microcomputer 91 (effect executing means) of a sub-control board 90 capable of executing various effects using images on the image display device 7 (display means), and the operation means includes a volume button 55, a first operating means such as a brightness button 56 and a select button 68, and a second operating means such as a production button 63 different from the first operating means. A first image such as an image SL, a brightness level image LL, an effect mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR, a volume down button image SDG, a volume up button image SUG, a brightness down button LDG, a brightness up button image LUG, etc. One of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the first image, such as an effect button image BG and a gauge image TB. (When the volume up button of the volume button 55 is pressed, the number of volume level images SL is increased, and when the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 is pressed, the brightness level image LL is displayed. increases, or when the select button 68 is pressed, the production mode rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes), and the second operation means is operated. 93 (G ) to (J), FIG. 94 (G) to (K) for the effect button operation effect B, and FIG. 95 (G) to (K) for the effect button operation effect C). According to this configuration, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes the first operation means for displaying the first image and the second operation means for hiding the second image. By doing so, the image can be displayed and the image can be hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, effects button operation effects A of FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), effects button operation effects B of FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the production button operation production C, one of the plurality of types of images is a set of productions such as the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R that can notify the result of the success or failure judgment of winning or losing. The effect control microcomputer 91 (effect executing means) controls the volume level image SL, the brightness level image LL, and the effect mode selection display area SEL regardless of whether or not the variable display by a set of effect symbols is started. , the first image of the selection mode part TR, etc., can be displayed, and at a predetermined timing after starting the variable display by a set of production patterns (predetermined time after the battle production is started (in this embodiment, 8 seconds )) can display the second images such as the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB. According to this configuration, the state in which the first image and the second image are always displayed is not continued, but regardless of whether or not the first image has started the variable display by the set of performance symbols. On the other hand, since the second image is displayed at a predetermined timing after starting the variable display with a set of performance symbols, both the first image and the second image are displayed. You can limit the period for which

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, effects button operation effects A of FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), effects button operation effects B of FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the effect button operation effect C, the effect control microcomputer 91 (effect executing means) operates the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, the select Regardless of whether or not the first operating means such as the button 68 has been operated, the result of the judgment can be displayed based on the operation of the second operating means such as the effect button 63. . According to this configuration, even if the player operates the first operation means at the timing when the player wants to obtain the result of the win-or-fail judgment, the result of the win-or-fail judgment cannot be obtained. This can contribute to preventing the player from erroneously operating the first operating means.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, effects button operation effects A of FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), effects button operation effects B of FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the button operation effect C, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are images representing the first operation means such as the volume button 55, and the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image. The first image such as LUG is an image representing the first operating means such as the brightness button 56, and the second image such as the effect button image BG is an image representing the second operating means such as the effect button 63. The control microcomputer 91 (effect executing means) displays the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button even if the first operating means such as the volume button 55 is operated while the first image and the second image are being displayed. The display of the first image such as the image SUG is not hidden but maintained, and even if the first operation means such as the luminance button 56 is operated, the first image such as the luminance down button LDG and the luminance up button image LUG is hidden. While the display is maintained, the second images such as the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB can be hidden based on the operation of the second operation means such as the effect button 63. . According to this configuration, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, the brightness up button image LUG, and the second images such as the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB, is displayed, even if the first operating means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 are operated, the first image is not hidden. When the operating means is operated, the second image is hidden. In this way, as changes in the first image and the second image due to the operation of the first operation means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 and the second operation means such as the effect button 63, the display of the first image is maintained and the second image is changed. It is possible to provide a variation of presentation such as non-display of the image.

Furthermore, in the production button operation production B of FIGS. 94 (G) to (K) and the production button operation production C of FIGS. 95 (G) to (K), the first The image is an image representing the first operating means such as the volume button 55, and the first images such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are images representing the first operating means such as the brightness button 56, The first images such as the select button image SBG are images representing the first operating means such as the select button 68, and the second images such as the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are the second operating means such as the effect button 63. , and the effect control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) reduces the volume even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55 is operated in a state in which the first image and the second image are displayed. The display of the first images such as the button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG is maintained without being hidden, and the brightness down button LDG, the brightness up button image LUG and the like are displayed even if the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is operated. The display of the first image is maintained without being hidden, and even if the first operating means such as the select button 68 is operated, the first image such as the select button image SBG is maintained without being hidden, while the effect button 63 is maintained. The second images such as the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB can be hidden based on the operation of the second operation means such as. According to this configuration, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, the brightness up button image LUG, the select button image SBG, etc., the effect button image BG, the gauge image TB, etc. While the second image is displayed, the first image is not hidden even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, the select button 68, etc. is operated. Then, when the second operation means such as the effect button 63 is operated, the second image is hidden. In this way, as a change in the first image and the second image due to the operation of the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, the select button image SBG, and the second operation means such as the effect button 63, It is possible to provide a variety of effects such as display maintenance and non-display of the second image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, effects button operation effects A of FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), effects button operation effects B of FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the button operation effect C, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are images representing the first operation means such as the volume button 55, and the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image. The first image such as LUG is an image representing the first operating means such as the brightness button 56, and the second image such as the effect button image BG is an image representing the second operating means such as the effect button 63. The control microcomputer 91 (effect executing means) provides the first image in the effect button operation effect A in FIG. 93(G), the effect button operation effect B in FIG. 94(G), and the effect button operation effect C in FIG. 95(G). is hidden and the second image is displayed, production button operation effects A in FIGS. 93(H) and (I), production button operation effects B in FIGS. 94(H) and (I), and FIG. In the button operation effects C of H) and (I), the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are displayed based on the operation of the first operating means such as the volume button 55. , the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG is displayed based on the operation of the first operating means such as the brightness button 56, while the presentation button operation presentation A of FIG. In the production button operation production B of FIG. 94(K) and the production button operation production C of FIG. Images can be hidden. According to this configuration, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden, and the second images such as the effect button image BG are displayed. When the first operating means such as the volume button 55 is operated in this state, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are displayed, and the first operating means such as the brightness button 56 is pressed. When operated, the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG is displayed, whereas when the second operating means such as the effect button 63 is operated, the second image is hidden. It is designed to be In this way, as changes in the first image and the second image due to the operation of the first operation means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 and the second operation means such as the effect button 63, the display of the first image and the second image are displayed. It is possible to have a variation of the effect of hiding the .

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production button operation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the battle effect in the effect button operation effect B of FIG. 94, when the player presses the effect button 63 after 13 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, FIG. As shown in (L), after the second movable accessory 15 suddenly appears, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, number "2"). It was displayed as a stop and then hit. However, even if the production button 63 is pressed, the second movable accessory 15 does not appear at all, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "2"). ) is temporarily stopped, and then the game may be won. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of effects in the battle effect, and furthermore, the player can freely determine the relationship and rules between the pressing operation of the effect button 63 and the appearance of the second movable accessory 15 in the battle effect. You can enjoy it with your ideas.

[Modification 2]
During the re-fluctuation of the effect button operation effect C in FIG. 95, when the player presses the effect button 63 after 13 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, FIG. As shown in (L), after the second movable accessory 15 suddenly appears, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, number "7"). A temporary stop was displayed, and then it was a hit. However, even if the production button 63 is pressed, the second movable accessory 15 does not appear at all, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "7"). ) is temporarily stopped, and then the game may be won. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect in the re-variation, and furthermore, the player can freely determine the relationship and rule between the pressing operation of the effect button 63 in the re-variation and the appearance of the second movable accessory 15. You can enjoy it with your ideas.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button operation effect A of FIG. 93, the effect button operation effect B of FIG. 94, and the effect button operation effect C of FIG. It was displayed (placed) at a position (on a white rectangular image (pedestal image)). However, instead of the variable display position, for example, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as the upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the luminance level displayed as the lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are displayed. and the brightness level image LL are moved in parallel to the right toward the position where the variable display position was displayed, that is, the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL are vertically aligned. , and the volume level image SL and the luminance level image LL may be used as images indicating one variable display position. In this case, the variation icon 9C is displayed (placed) on the volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as the upper row. Of course, when the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 does not cover the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL, respectively. It does not hinder the visibility with LL at all.

[Modification 4]
In the effect button operation effect B of FIG. 94 and the effect button operation effect C of FIG. ) above). However, instead of the variable display position, for example, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a are moved to the left toward the position where the variable display position was displayed. In other words, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged at the center lower side of the display screen 7a, and the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are displayed in one variable display. You may use it as an image which shows a position. In this case, the variation icon 9C is displayed (placed) on the effect mode selection display area SEL. Of course, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 does not cover the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode part TR, respectively. The visibility of the selection mode section TR is not hindered at all.

[Modification 5]
In the effect button operation effect B shown in FIG. 94 and the effect button operation effect C shown in FIG. At this time, the upper button and the lower button of the select button 68 are displayed as active, the left button and the right button are displayed as inactive, and the upper button and the lower button indicate that the pressing operation is valid, and the left button is displayed. The button and the right button may indicate that the pressing operation is an invalid button. In this way, the player can be informed which of the select button 68's up button, right button, down button, and left button is the button for the player to raise or lower the brightness level. (Intuitively easy to understand).

[Modification 6]
The effect button operation effect A of FIG. 93, the effect button operation effect B of FIG. 94, and the effect button operation effect C of FIG. may Alternatively, a combined effect of the effect button operation effect A shown in FIG. 93 and the effect button operation effect C shown in FIG. 95 may be executed, or the effect button operation effect B shown in FIG. 94 and the effect button operation effect C shown in FIG. You may make it perform the combination production|presentation by.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising an effect execution means capable of executing various effects using images on the display means,
The operating means includes a first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the first image;
The production executing means is
displaying the first image based on the operation of the first operation means;
hiding the second image based on the operation of the second operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of production patterns capable of informing the result of the success or failure judgment,
The production executing means is
The first image can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display by the set of performance symbols has started,
It is possible to display the second image at a predetermined timing after starting the variable display with the set of performance symbols,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The production executing means is
In the state where the second image is displayed, the result of the suitability determination is displayed based on whether the second operation means has been operated regardless of whether or not the first operation means has been operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3, wherein the first image is an image representing the first operation means,
The second image is an image representing the second operation means,
The production executing means is
In a state in which the first image and the second image are displayed, even if the first operation means is operated, the display of the first image is maintained without being hidden, while the second operation means is operated. hiding the second image based on
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
The first image is an image representing the first operation means,
The second image is an image representing the second operation means,
The production executing means is
In a state in which the first image is hidden and the second image is displayed, the first image is displayed based on the operation of the first operation means, and the second operation means is operated. hiding the second image based on
A gaming machine characterized by:

Battle character selection effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. The battle character selection effect is executed while the decorative symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a battle character selection effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Battle character selection effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection effect A. FIG. In the battle character selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, the reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a message image MG saying "Choose an ally character in Battlereach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 96(E) to (I), a teammate character selection effect is executed. The ally character selection effect is an effect for selecting an ally character that appears in the battle effect.

In FIGS. 96(E) to (G), the button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image simulating the effect button 63, and is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 (the same applies hereinafter). A message image MG of "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In FIGS. 96E to 96G, a thumbnail image S1 of the first teammate character MCR1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a. A thumbnail image S2 of the second teammate character MCR2 is displayed below the thumbnail image S1. A thumbnail image S3 of the third teammate character MCR3 is displayed below the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 96(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first teammate character MCR1 is surrounded by a thick frame, indicating that the first teammate character MCR1 is being selected. An image of the selected first teammate character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first teammate character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 96F, the thumbnail image S2 of the second teammate character MCR2 is surrounded by a thick frame, indicating that the second teammate character MCR2 is being selected. An image of the selected second teammate character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second teammate character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 96G, the thumbnail image S3 of the third teammate character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame, indicating that the third teammate character MCR3 is being selected. An image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third teammate character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

The ally character being selected is switched each time the production button 63 is pressed. That is, each time the effect button 63 is pressed, the selection target is switched in the order of (E)→(F)→(G)→(E)→ . . . in FIG.

When the predetermined selection period ends, the button image BG disappears as shown in FIG. 96(H). Here, too, the message image MG of "Choose" is displayed. Also, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame. Further, the image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 96(I), the image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the entire display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged image of the third teammate character MCR3 in FIG. 96(H).

Next, after the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 96(J), the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, the third teammate character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR are in conflict. Winning is confirmed when the third teammate character MCR3 defeats the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(K), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has been achieved. Here, the third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the third teammate character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. When the above-described hit confirmation effect is executed, there is no loss. When the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and a loss occurs, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at "7" symbols, and the middle decorative symbols stop at "8" symbols.

[Battle character selection effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection effect B. FIG. In the battle character selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, the reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a message image MG saying "Choose an ally character in Battlereach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 97(E) to (I), a teammate character selection effect is executed. The ally character selection effect is an effect for selecting an ally character that appears in the battle effect.

In FIGS. 97(E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image simulating the effect button 63, and is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 (the same applies hereinafter). A message image MG of "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In FIGS. 97E to 97G, a thumbnail image S1 of the first teammate character MCR1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a. A thumbnail image S2 of the second teammate character MCR2 is displayed below the thumbnail image S1. A thumbnail image S3 of the third teammate character MCR3 is displayed below the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 97(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first teammate character MCR1 is brightly displayed (brightness is high), indicating that the first teammate character MCR1 is being selected. The other thumbnail images S2 and S3 are displayed dark (lightness is low). An image of the selected first teammate character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first teammate character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 97F, the thumbnail image S2 of the second teammate character MCR2 is brightly displayed (brightness is high), indicating that the second teammate character MCR2 is being selected. The other thumbnail images S1 and S3 are displayed dark (lightness is low). An image of the selected second teammate character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second teammate character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 97G, the thumbnail image S3 of the third teammate character MCR3 is brightly displayed (brightness is high), indicating that the third teammate character MCR3 is being selected. The other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are displayed dark (lightness is low). An image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third teammate character MCR3 is an enlarged thumbnail image S3.

The ally character being selected is switched each time the production button 63 is pressed. That is, each time the effect button 63 is pressed, the selection target is switched in the order of (E)→(F)→(G)→(E)→ . . . in FIG.

When the predetermined selection period ends, the button image BG is hidden as shown in FIG. 97(H). Here, too, the message image MG of "Choose" is displayed. Also, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is brightly displayed. Other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are hidden. Further, an image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 97(I), an image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged image of the third teammate character MCR3 in FIG. 97(H).

Next, after the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 97(J). The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, the third teammate character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR are in conflict. Winning is confirmed when the third teammate character MCR3 defeats the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(K), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has been achieved. Here, the third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG of "Victory" is displayed on the left side of the third teammate character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. When the above-described hit confirmation effect is executed, there is no loss. When the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and a loss occurs, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at "7" symbols, and the middle decorative symbols stop at "8" symbols.

[Battle character selection effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection effect C. FIG. In the battle character selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which a plurality of lines of decorative symbols start to change. Here, left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative design slows down and the left decorative design stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, the reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a message image MG saying "Choose an ally character in Battlereach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 98(E) to (I), a teammate character selection effect is executed. The ally character selection effect is an effect for selecting an ally character that appears in the battle effect.

In FIGS. 98(E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image simulating the effect button 63, and is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 (the same applies hereinafter). A message image MG of "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In FIGS. 98E to 98G, a thumbnail image S1 of the first teammate character MCR1 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. A thumbnail image S2 of the second teammate character MCR2 is displayed to the right of the thumbnail image S1. A thumbnail image S3 of the third teammate character MCR3 is displayed to the right of the thumbnail image S2. Further, above the thumbnail image S1, an image OG having the same size as the thumbnail images S1 to S3 and having the words "Random" written thereon is displayed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, the thick frame moves in the order of image OG→thumbnail image S1→thumbnail image S2→thumbnail image S3→image OG→ . When an image OG named "Random" is selected, thick frames (indicated by hatching) with different display colors are automatically displayed in the order of thumbnail image S1→thumbnail image S2→thumbnail image S3→thumbnail image S1→ . automatically switched. In accordance with this, the images of the teammate characters MCR1 to MCR3 displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a are also switched.

In FIGS. 98E to 98G, the image OG is surrounded by a thick frame.
In FIG. 98(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first teammate character MCR1 is surrounded by a thick frame (indicated by hatching) in a different display color, indicating that the first teammate character MCR1 is being selected. An image of the selected first teammate character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first teammate character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 98F, the thumbnail image S2 of the second teammate character MCR2 is surrounded by a thick frame (hatched) with a different display color, indicating that the second teammate character MCR2 is being selected. An image of the selected second teammate character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second teammate character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 98G, the thumbnail image S3 of the third teammate character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame (hatched) with a different display color, indicating that the third teammate character MCR3 is being selected. An image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third teammate character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

Here, since the image OG is selected, the selection target is automatically switched as shown in FIG. 98 (E)→(F)→(G)→(E)→ . be done.

When the predetermined selection period ends, the button image BG is hidden as shown in FIG. 98(H). Here, too, the message image MG of "Choose" is displayed. Also, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame. Other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are hidden. Further, an image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 98(I), the image of the selected third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the entire area of the display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged image of the third teammate character MCR3 in FIG. 98(H).

Next, after the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 98(J). The final showdown production is a production that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, the third teammate character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR are in conflict. Winning is confirmed when the third teammate character MCR3 defeats the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(K), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has been achieved. Here, the third teammate character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG of "Victory" is displayed on the left side of the third teammate character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the game is a win. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, indicating that a win has occurred. When the above-described hit confirmation effect is executed, there is no loss. When the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and a loss occurs, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at "7" symbols, and the middle decorative symbols stop at "8" symbols.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the battle character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when one of the first to third teammate characters MCR1 to MCR3 is selected by pressing the effect button 63, an image (first image) showing the selected teammate character is displayed. Displayed in the central area (first area) of the display screen 7a, a thumbnail image (second image) representing the same object as the image representing the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a smaller than the first area. Display in the area (second area). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize novel performances that have never existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", the first to third teammate characters MCR1 to MCR3 correspond to the "selection target", and are shown in FIGS. (I), the teammate character selection effect in FIGS. 98(E) to (I) corresponds to the "selection effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character selection effect, after a teammate character is selected by pressing the effect button 63, the display screen is displayed instead of the image (first image) and thumbnail image (second image) of the teammate character. The image of the teammate character (third image) is displayed in the entire area (third area) 7a (FIGS. 96(I), 97(I), and 98(I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize novel performances that have never existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character selection effect, after a teammate character is selected by pressing the effect button 63, the image of the teammate character (first image) and the thumbnail image (second image) are replaced with images of the teammate character. During the period until the image (third image) is displayed, a standby effect is executed to continue displaying the image (first image) and the thumbnail image (second image) of the teammate character (FIG. 96(H), FIG. 97(H), FIG. 98(H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize novel performances that have never existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character selection effect, an image (fourth image) showing a teammate character that is not being selected is displayed on the left or bottom (fourth area) of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96(E)). ~ (G), Figures 97 (E) ~ (G), Figures 98 (E) ~ (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize novel performances that have never existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the battle character selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the character selection effect during the variation of the decorative pattern is taken as an example. On the other hand, the present invention may be applied to the character selection effect during the big win.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the thumbnail images are displayed brightly (increase brightness) or displayed darkly (decrease brightness). On the other hand, the thumbnail image being selected may be displayed in color, and the thumbnail images other than the selected thumbnail image may be displayed in monochrome.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image of the teammate character (first image) is an enlarged thumbnail image (second image). On the other hand, the first image may be a different image from the second image as long as the images show the same object. Similarly, the third image may be an image different from the first and second images.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
an effect execution means capable of executing a selection effect of selecting one of a plurality of selection targets by operating the operation means,
In the selection effect, the effect executing means displays a first image representing a selection object being selected in a first area, and displays a second image representing the same object as the object represented by the first image from the first area. is also displayed in a small second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the selection effect, the effect execution means displays a third image in a third area instead of the first image and the second image after the selection object is selected by the operation of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
The effect execution means, in the selection effect, during a period from when the selection object is selected by the operation of the operation means until the third image replacing the first image and the second image is displayed, the Execute a standby effect that continues to display the first image and the second image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the selection effect, the effect executing means displays a fourth image showing a selection target that is not being selected in a fourth area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

99 to 101, the presentation of information related to the number of expected winning balls will be described below. This scheduled winning ball number related information display effect is executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the information display effect related to the number of balls to be acquired, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the device 7 or the sub-display screen 64 .

[Information display related to the number of balls to be acquired]
FIG. 99 is a first diagram for explaining the display rendering of the information related to the number of balls to be obtained. FIG. 100 is a second diagram for explaining the expected number of winning pitches related information display effect. An example of the display effect of information related to the number of expected winning balls will be described with reference to FIGS. 99(A) to (L) and FIGS. FIGS. 100(I) to 100(L) show another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. FIG. 101 shows still another example of the display effect of the information related to the number of balls to be acquired.

The planned winning ball number related information display effect is an effect of displaying information related to the expected winning ball number included in the hold on the display screen 7a by the look-ahead. The information related to the scheduled number of acquired balls per hit included in the hold is the number of acquired balls that are normally obtained in the case where the special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a win. It means a display that expresses a number quantitatively or a display that expresses it qualitatively. Quantitatively expressed display includes, for example, the number of winning balls for each hit, as well as the total number of winning balls for multiple hits, etc. be Quantitative representation includes expressions such as "many" and "few", and expressions such as "very lucky" and "fairly lucky".

In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Also, four pending icons 9A and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. Here, it is assumed that the game state is a normal state and the special figure 1 variation is being executed. During the variation, the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect is executed at a predetermined probability.

When the look-ahead expected number of acquired balls suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a character image of "start of look-ahead expected number of acquired balls suggested effect" is displayed. Here, in order to clarify the description of this effect, it is assumed that only two types of special figure 1 jackpots are set in the jackpot determination table T5 of the game machine 1. FIG. Also, it is assumed that 100 balls can be acquired per 1R during the jackpot game. The jackpots of special figure 1 are "10R jackpot" and "5R jackpot", and 1000 balls can be obtained with "10R jackpot" and 500 balls can be obtained with "5R jackpot".

When the look-ahead expected acquisition ball number suggestion effect is executed, a look-ahead is performed to determine whether or not the special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a win. Here, the first hold of special figure 1, that is, the rightmost hold icon 9A of the display screen 7a (next to the left of the fluctuation icon 9C) is "10R jackpot", the second hold of special figure 1 ( The second pending icon 9A from the right side of the display screen 7a) is "5R jackpot", and the third pending icon 9A of the special figure 1 (the third pending icon 9A from the right side of the display screen 7a) is "10R jackpot". , The 4th reservation (the leftmost reservation icon 9A of the display screen 7a) of the special figure 1 is assumed to be "off". That is, "10R jackpot" is obtained in the first reserved lottery of special figure 1, and the jackpot game is executed and 1000 balls can be obtained, and then "5R jackpot" is obtained in the second reserved lottery of special figure 1, and a big hit. A game is executed and 500 balls can be obtained, after that, a ``10R jackpot'' is obtained in the lottery of the third reservation of the special figure 1, and a big winning game is executed and 1000 balls can be obtained, and then the fourth reservation of the special figure 1. It becomes "off" in the lottery.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a character image of "2,500 balls to be obtained after this" and a character image of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are displayed as the effect indicating the number of balls to be obtained in advance. Is displayed. The text image of "2500 balls to be acquired after this" is read ahead, and after this, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1, and the total It suggests that 2500 balls (1000+500+1000) can be obtained. In addition, the character images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1 after this by reading ahead. is executed, that is, the type of hit. However, the player can determine whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" is the jackpot of the 1st to 3rd pending lotteries in special figure 1 or the jackpots of the 2nd to 4th lotteries. , 3rd and 4th jackpots or 1st, 2nd and 4th jackpots.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the manner of "326", the variable icon 9C is eliminated, and the first pending icon 9A is changed by the shift movement. It becomes icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped in the jackpot mode of "777". At this time, a character image of "10R jackpot" indicating the type of jackpot to be executed thereafter is also displayed. After the variation icon 9C is consumed, a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the display screen 7a displays a text image of "Jackpot game start!! Plan to win 1000 balls this time" and "1500 balls in the next and subsequent jackpot games" on the display screen 7a. A character image of "Scheduled to acquire ball" is displayed. The text image of "Jackpot game start!! Expected to win 1000 balls this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 10R jackpot game and a game in which 1000 balls can be obtained. The character image of "1500 balls to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" indicates that 1500 balls can be obtained by the jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) newly started after the 10R jackpot game to be started from now on. suggesting. In other words, it is a look-ahead scheduled acquired ball number suggestion effect during the jackpot game, and by the look-ahead, "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the reserved special lottery that was the second and third in FIG. 99 (B). suggests that However, the player is not sure whether the display of "1500 balls will be obtained in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd pending lotteries of the special figure 1 in FIG. I'm not sure if it's the 1st jackpot or the 2nd or 4th jackpot.

When the round game of 1R to 10R is started, as shown in FIG. 99(H), the display screen 7a displays a character image of "Currently 523 balls won!" A character image of "Schedule" is displayed. The text image of "Currently 523 balls acquired!!" indicates the number of balls currently acquired in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. The character image of "1500 balls to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is continuously displayed from FIG. It suggests that 1500 balls can be acquired by jackpot game + 10R jackpot game). In other words, it is a look-ahead scheduled acquired ball number suggestion effect during the jackpot game, and by the look-ahead, "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the reserved special lottery that was the second and third in FIG. 99 (B). suggests that However, the player is not sure whether the display of "1500 balls will be obtained in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd pending lotteries of the special figure 1 in FIG. I'm not sure if it's the 1st jackpot or the 2nd or 4th jackpot.

When the 1R to 10R round games are completed, as shown in FIG. 99(I), the display screen 7a displays a text image of "Jackpot game ends, get 1000 balls this time!" 1500 pitches to be acquired" is displayed. The text image of "1000 balls won this time after finishing the jackpot game!!" indicates the number of balls won in the executed 10R jackpot game. 1500 balls are expected to be obtained in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is continuously displayed from FIG. It suggests that 1500 balls can be acquired by jackpot game). In other words, it is a look-ahead scheduled acquired ball number suggestion effect during the jackpot game, and by the look-ahead, "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the reserved special lottery that was the second and third in FIG. 99 (B). suggests that However, the player is not sure whether the display of "1500 balls will be obtained in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd pending lotteries of the special figure 1 in FIG. I'm not sure if it's the 1st jackpot or the 2nd or 4th jackpot.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the hold icon 9A, which was second in FIG. be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped in the jackpot mode of "666". At this time, a character image of "5R jackpot" indicating the type of jackpot to be executed thereafter is also displayed. After the variation icon 9C is consumed, a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 99(L), the display screen 7a displays a text image of "Jackpot game start!! Plan to win 500 balls this time" and "1000 balls in the next and subsequent jackpot games" on the display screen 7a. A character image of "Scheduled to acquire ball" is displayed. The text image of "Start of jackpot game!! Plan to win 500 balls this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 5R jackpot game, and is a game in which 500 balls can be obtained. The text image of "1000 balls to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" suggests that 1000 balls can be obtained by the jackpot game (10R jackpot game) newly started after the 5R jackpot game to be started from now on. there is In other words, it is an effect that suggests the number of balls to be prefetched to be acquired during the jackpot game, and suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special lottery that was the third in FIG. 99(B) by the prefetch. . However, the player is asked whether the display of "1000 balls will be obtained in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special figure 1 in FIG. 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. Not sure.

When the round game of 1R to 5R is started, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the display screen 7a displays a character image of "Currently 132 balls won!" A character image of "Schedule" is displayed. The text image of "Currently 132 balls acquired!!" indicates the number of balls currently acquired in the 5R jackpot game currently being executed. The text image "1000 balls to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" continues to be displayed from FIG. It suggests that 1000 balls can be acquired by jackpot game). In other words, it is an effect that suggests the number of balls to be prefetched to be acquired during the jackpot game, and suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special lottery that was the third in FIG. 99(B) by the prefetch. . However, the player is asked whether the display of "1000 balls will be obtained in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special figure 1 in FIG. 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. Not sure.

When the 1R to 5R round games are completed, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the display screen 7a displays a text image of "Jackpot game ends, get 500 balls this time!" 1000 pitches to be acquired" is displayed. The text image of "Jackpot game ended, got 500 balls this time!!" indicates the number of balls won in the executed 5R jackpot game. The character image of "1000 balls to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is continuously displayed from FIG. ) suggests that 1000 balls can be obtained. In other words, it is an effect that suggests the number of balls to be prefetched to be acquired during the jackpot game, and suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special lottery that was the third in FIG. 99(B) by the prefetch. . However, the player is asked whether the display of "1000 balls will be obtained in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special figure 1 in FIG. 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. Not sure.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(C), the hold icon 9A, which was the third in FIG. be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped in the jackpot mode of "777". At this time, a character image of "10R jackpot" indicating the type of jackpot to be executed thereafter is also displayed. After the variation icon 9C is consumed, a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a character image of "Jackpot game start!! Plan to win 1000 balls this time" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening effect. The text image of "Jackpot game start!! Expected to win 1000 balls this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 10R jackpot game and a game in which 1000 balls can be obtained. This time, the text image of ``Expected to acquire XX balls in next and subsequent jackpot games'' is not displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game to be started from now on based on the hold at the time of FIG. 99(B) by the look-ahead.

When the round game of 1R to 10R is started, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a character image of "Currently 689 balls won!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The character image of "Currently 689 balls acquired!!" indicates the number of balls currently acquired in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. The text image of ``Expected to acquire XX balls in next and subsequent jackpot games'' is not displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game to be started from now on based on the hold at the time of FIG. 99(B) by the look-ahead.

When the round games of 1R to 10R are finished, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a character image of "Jackpot game ends, get 1000 balls this time!" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the ending effect. The text image of "1000 balls won this time after finishing the jackpot game!!" indicates the number of balls won in the executed 10R jackpot game. The text image of ``Expected to acquire XX balls in next and subsequent jackpot games'' is not displayed.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the hold icon 9A, which was fourth in FIG. be started.

FIG. 100(I) is another example of the display rendering of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the expected number of acquired balls related information display effect, the look-ahead expected number of acquired balls suggestion effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 100(I), a character image of "10R jackpot...1000 balls", a character image of "5R jackpot...500 balls", and a character image of "10R jackpot...1000 balls" are displayed. be done. These character images are read ahead, and after that, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1, 1000 balls by 10R jackpot, 5R jackpot It suggests that 500 balls can be obtained. That is, it suggests the number of balls to be acquired and the type of winning. However, the player can determine whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" is the jackpot of the 1st to 3rd pending lotteries in special figure 1 or the jackpots of the 2nd to 4th lotteries. , 3rd and 4th jackpots or 1st, 2nd and 4th jackpots.

FIG. 100(J) is another example of the display rendering of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 100(J) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 99(C). In FIG. 100(J), a character image of "1. lots of balls", a character image of "2. fair balls", and a character image of "3. lots of balls" are displayed. These character images are read ahead, and after that, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1, and a lot of balls (1000 It suggests that a reasonable number of balls (500 balls) can be obtained with the 5R jackpot. However, the player can determine whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" is the jackpot of the 1st to 3rd pending lotteries in special figure 1 or the jackpots of the 2nd to 4th lotteries. , 3rd and 4th jackpots or 1st, 2nd and 4th jackpots.

FIG. 100(K) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 100(K) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 99(C). In FIG. 100(K), an image of "1. ★★★★★", an image of "2. ★★★", and an image of "3. ★★★★★" are displayed. These images are read ahead, and after that, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1, and the 10R jackpot results in ★ 5 balls (1000 ball), suggesting that a 5R jackpot will yield 3 * 3 balls (500 balls). However, the player can determine whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" is the jackpot of the 1st to 3rd pending lotteries in special figure 1 or the jackpots of the 2nd to 4th lotteries. , 3rd and 4th jackpots or 1st, 2nd and 4th jackpots.

FIG. 100(L) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 100(L) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 99(C). In FIG. 100(L), an image of "★★★★★", an image of "★★★", and an image of "★★★★★" are displayed. These images are read ahead, and after that, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1, and the 10R jackpot results in ★ 5 balls (1000 ball), suggesting that a 5R jackpot will yield 3 * 3 balls (500 balls). Also, in FIG. 100(L), the colors of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are changed. As a result, it is suggested that the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lottery of special figure 1 will be hit.

FIG. 101(A) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, instead of the predictive expected winning ball number suggesting effect during the jackpot game of FIG. . In FIG. 101(A), when the jackpot game is started, a text image of "Jackpot game start!! Win 10R this time" and "Total 15R will be won in the next jackpot game" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening effect. A character image is displayed. The text image of "Jackpot game start!! Win 10R this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 10R jackpot game and a game in which 1000 balls can be won. The text image of ``Total 15R to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games'' means that a total of 15R (1500 balls) can be obtained by a new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) after the 10R jackpot game to be started from now on. suggests that In other words, the look-ahead suggests that the "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special drawing lotteries that were second and third in FIG. However, the player is not sure whether the display of "total 15R will be obtained in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd pending lotteries of the special figure 1 in FIG. I'm not sure if it's the 1st jackpot or the 2nd or 4th jackpot.

FIG. 101(B) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, instead of the predictive expected winning ball number suggesting effect during the jackpot game of FIG. . In FIG. 101(B), the display screen 7a displays a character image of "currently used 3Rs, remaining 7Rs" and a character image of "total 15Rs to be won in next and subsequent jackpot games". The character image of "currently 3R completed, remaining 7R" indicates the number of rounds completed at present in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. From here, the number of balls acquired so far is suggested. The character image of "Total 15R to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is continuously displayed from FIG. 101(A), and the jackpot game (5R It suggests that a total of 15R (1500 balls) can be acquired by jackpot game + 10R jackpot game). In other words, the look-ahead suggests that the "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special drawing lotteries that were the second and third in FIG. 99(B). However, the player is not sure whether the display of "total 15R will be obtained in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd pending lotteries of the special figure 1 in FIG. I'm not sure if it's the 1st jackpot or the 2nd or 4th jackpot.

FIG. 101(C) is another example of the display rendering of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, instead of the predictive expected winning ball number suggesting effect during the jackpot game of FIG. . In FIG. 101(C), when the jackpot game is started, the display screen 7a during the opening production displays the text image of “Jackpot game start!! A character image is displayed. The text image of "Jackpot game start!! Win 5R this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 5R jackpot game and a game in which 500 balls can be won. The character image of ``scheduled to win a total of 15R in the next and subsequent jackpot games'' indicates that a total of 10R (1000 balls) can be obtained in a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) newly started after the 5R jackpot game to be started from now on. It suggests. In other words, the look-ahead suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special figure lottery that was the third in FIG. 99(B). However, the player is asked whether the display of "total 10R will be obtained in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of the special figure 1 in FIG. 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. Not sure.

FIG. 101(D) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, instead of the predictive expected winning ball number suggesting effect during the jackpot game of FIG. . In FIG. 101(D), the display screen 7a displays a character image of "currently spent 2R, remaining 3R" and a character image of "total 10R to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games". The text image of "currently 2R completed, remaining 3R" suggests the number of rounds completed at present in the 5R jackpot game currently being executed. From here, the number of balls acquired so far is suggested. The character image of "Total 10R to be won in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is continuously displayed from FIG. 101(C), and the jackpot game (10R It suggests that a total of 10R (1000 balls) can be acquired by jackpot game). In other words, the look-ahead suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special figure lottery that was the third in FIG. 99(B). However, the player is asked whether the display of "total 10R will be obtained in the next and subsequent jackpot games" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of the special figure 1 in FIG. 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. Not sure.

FIG. 101(E) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. 101(E) may be executed instead of the effect of FIG. 100(E) in the expected number of acquired balls related information display effect. In FIG. 101(E), when the jackpot game is started, a character image of "Jackpot game start!! Earn 10R this time" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening effect. The text image of "Jackpot game start!! Win 10R this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 10R jackpot game and a game in which 1000 balls can be won. This time, the text image of ``Expected to acquire XX balls in next and subsequent jackpot games'' is not displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game to be started from now on based on the hold at the time of FIG. 99(B) by the look-ahead.

FIG. 101(F) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. 101(F) may be executed instead of the effect of FIG. 100(F) in the expected number of acquired balls related information display effect. In FIG. 101(F), a character image of "currently used 7R, remaining 3R" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The character image of "currently 7R completed, remaining 3R" suggests the number of rounds completed at present in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. From here, the number of balls acquired so far is suggested. The text image of ``Expected to acquire XX balls in next and subsequent jackpot games'' is not displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game to be started from now on based on the hold at the time of FIG. 99(B) by the look-ahead.

FIG. 101(G) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, instead of the predictive expected winning ball number suggesting effect during the jackpot game of FIG. . In FIG. 101(G), when the jackpot game is started, an image of "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" and "Next time ★★★★★★★★★" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening effect. ★★★★★★" image is displayed. The image of "this time ★★★★★★★★★★" (10 stars) suggests that the jackpot game to be started from now is a 10R jackpot game and a game in which 1000 balls can be obtained. there is The image of "next time ★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" (15 stars) is a new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) to be started after the 10R jackpot game to be started It suggests that a total of 15R (1500 balls) can be obtained by playing games). In other words, the look-ahead suggests that the "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special drawing lotteries that were second and third in FIG.

FIG. 101(H) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 101(H) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 99(C). In FIG. 101(H), the colors of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are changed. As a result, it is suggested that the first, second, and third lottery of special figure 1 will be hit by the look-ahead. Then, the first pending icon 9A displays "1000 balls" in a balloon, the second pending icon 9A displays "500 balls" in a balloon, and the third pending icon 9A displays "1000 balls" in a balloon. is displayed. As a result, by looking ahead, after this, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1, and 1000 balls are acquired by the 10R jackpot and 500 balls by the 5R jackpot. suggesting that it can be done. That is, it suggests the number of balls to be acquired and the type of winning.

FIG. 101(I) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 101(I) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 99(C). In FIG. 101 (I), the colors of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are changed. As a result, it is suggested that the first, second, and third lottery of special figure 1 will be hit by the look-ahead. In addition, character images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are displayed. The character images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are read ahead, and after this, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd lotteries of special figure 1. , suggesting that 1000 balls can be obtained with a 10R jackpot and 500 balls can be obtained with a 5R jackpot. That is, it suggests the number of balls to be acquired and the type of winning.

FIG. 101(J) is another example of the display effect of the information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 101(J) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. In FIG. 101(J), "1000 balls" is displayed in a balloon on the first pending icon 9A. This suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of the special figure 1 after this by looking ahead, and that 1000 balls can be obtained by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third pending icons 9A do not have a speech bubble despite the big win (the big win is not suggested). In this way, by prefetching, of the special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5), only a part of the winning reservations is suggested with information about the number of scheduled acquired balls, and the winning However, there may be cases where there is a hold that does not suggest information about the number of balls to be acquired.

FIG. 101(K) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled number of acquired balls related information display effect, instead of the look-ahead estimated number of acquired balls suggesting effect of FIG. In FIG. 101(K), a character image of "10R jackpot" is displayed. The character image of "10R jackpot" suggests that the "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of the special figure 1 after this, and 1000 balls can be obtained by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third pending icons 9A do not suggest a big win despite the big win. In this way, by prefetching, of the special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5), only a part of the winning reservations is suggested with information about the number of scheduled acquired balls, and the winning However, there may be cases where there is a hold that does not suggest information about the number of balls to be acquired. However, the player does not clearly know which lottery jackpot among the 1st to 4th reserves in the special figure 1 is displayed as "10R jackpot".

FIG. 101(L) is another example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be obtained. In the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect, the look-ahead scheduled winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 101(L) may be executed instead of the look-ahead expected winning ball number suggesting effect of FIG. 99(C). In FIG. 101(L), a character image of "1000 balls" is displayed. The character image of "1000 balls" suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of the special figure 1 after this, and 1000 balls can be obtained by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third pending icons 9A do not suggest a big win despite the big win. In this way, by prefetching, of the special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5), only a part of the winning reservations is suggested with information about the number of scheduled acquired balls, and the winning However, there may be cases where there is a hold that does not suggest information about the number of balls to be acquired. However, the player does not clearly know which lottery jackpot among the 1st to 4th reserves of the special figure 1 is displayed as "1000 balls". Therefore, it is not known whether "1000 balls" is obtained by one "10R jackpot" or two "5R jackpots" in total.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the information display effect related to the number of balls to be obtained will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99(C), during the fluctuation, the information related to the scheduled number of winning balls included in the hold by prefetching, "2500 balls to be obtained after this" is displayed. A first effect can be executed in which a character image and character images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 100(I) to (L) and FIGS. 101(H) to (L).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99(G) to 99(I), after the first effect, during the jackpot game, the information related to the scheduled winning number of winning balls included in the hold. It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying a message "1500 balls to be won in the next jackpot game" on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 99(L), FIGS. 100(A) to (B), FIGS. 101(A) to (D) and (G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99(C), in the first effect, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "10R jackpot", which is information related to the winning type included in the reservation by the look-ahead. is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 100(I) and FIGS. 101(H) to 101(K).

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be acquired will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, an example of the display effect of information related to the number of balls to be acquired will be described using FIGS. 99(A) to (L) and FIGS. ) shows another example of the effect, and FIG. 101 shows another example of the effect. These effects may be executed in combination at random as appropriate. For example, the gaming machine 1, at the timing of the performance of FIG. 99(C), randomly executes the performance of FIG. Either one may be executed. Further, after FIG. 99(C) is executed, any one or more effects of FIGS. 100(H) to (L) may be executed. Further, for example, the gaming machine 1 randomly executes the effects shown in FIGS. ) (B) may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described effect of displaying the information related to the number of balls to be acquired, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed or displayed oppositely. However, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not have to be displayed in the scheduled winning ball number related information display effect. In addition, in the above-described display effect of the information related to the number of balls to be acquired, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. However, at least one of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C does not need to be displayed in the scheduled acquired ball number related information display effect.

[Modification 3]
In FIG. 101(G), an image of "this time ★★★★★★★★★★" and an image of "next time ★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening effect. The image should be displayed. These images may be continuously displayed during the round game. In this case, during the round game, the number of stars in "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" may disappear one by one each time the round is played. This will give you an indication of the current number of lands and the number of rounds remaining.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
During the variation, capable of executing a first effect of displaying information related to the number of balls to be obtained per hit included in the reserve by look-ahead on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the first effect, during the jackpot game, a second effect of displaying on the display means information related to the number of balls to be obtained for the winning that is included in the hold, can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
In the first effect, the display means displays information related to the winning type included in the hold by prefetching,
A gaming machine characterized by:

102 to 104, the expectation-increasing item effects 1 to 3 will be described below. The expectation-increasing item effects 1 to 3 are executed in the variation effects of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to display the image.

[Expectation level up item production 1]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the expectation-increasing item effect 1. FIG. In the expectation-increasing item presentation 1, a plurality of bomb images representing bombs are displayed when the special drawing lottery is pending while the display screen 7a is fluctuating. Here, two bomb images are displayed. This bomb is an item that raises expectations. One of the bombs explodes, and the color of the displayed hold is changed to a color with a high degree of expectation. Also, when the telop notice that appeared as a result of the subsequent change is being displayed, the remaining one bomb explodes, and the display content of the telop notice is changed to a display content with a high degree of expectation.

First, as shown in FIG. 102(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being changed are displayed. In addition, it is in a state where four reserves of the first special figure are accumulated. That is, in a state in which the pending icon 9C (the variation icon corresponding to the variation) and the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure pending are displayed. be. The reservation icon 9A4 corresponding to the fourth of the first special figure reservation is changed to blue (hatching 1). Note that hatching will be described later.

Here, the colors in which the hold changes are “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”, and represent the expectation of winning the special lottery, with “gold” being the highest. , “red” is the second highest, “green” is the third highest, and “blue” is the fourth highest. In the figure, they are represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 102(J). Unchanged white reserves are unhatched, blue reserves are represented by hatch 1, green reserves are represented by hatch 2, red reserves are represented by hatch 3, and gold reserves are hatched. It is represented by 4. Colors in FIGS. 102 to 104 are represented by hatching shown in FIG. 102(J).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), two bomb images, which are items for increasing expectations, are displayed. A first bomb image IT1 and a second bomb image IT2 are displayed. The bomb images IT1 and IT2 are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the expectation-increasing effect is performed twice. It is digested from the first bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), one of the bombs, which is an item for performing an expectation-increasing effect, performs an explosion IT11 effect. An explosion IT11 is produced in the reservation display area to cover the reservation icon 9C and the first special figure reservation 9A. The bomb that is digested here is the first bomb. After the bomb IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT2 is moved and displayed at the position of the bomb image IT1, and the bomb image IT2 becomes the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the explosion has ended, and the pending icon 9A4 has changed from blue (hatching 1) with an expectation level of 5 to green with an expectation level of 10 (hatching 2). As a result, the degree of expectation for winning the special figure lottery is higher than when it is blue. That is, the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 has been extinguished, and the mode of the pending icon 9A4 has changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation for winning the special figure lottery.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the green (hatching 2) hold repeats the shift movement, and the hold icon 9A1 (hold corresponding to the first of the first special figure hold) is the hold icon 9C (the relevant This is the change icon corresponding to the change). After the movement, only the green (hatched 2) pending icon 9C is displayed in the pending display area. Here, it is the start of fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, a telop announcement is made. Here, a telop YK1 of "Reach?" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1, which is the item that performs the expectation-increasing effect, explodes IT11. Explosion IT11 is performed in front of the telop YK1 to cover the telop YK1. After the bomb represented by this bomb image IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), the explosion has ended, and the telop YK1 has changed from "Is it reachable?" Compared to "Reach?", the expectation of winning the special lottery is higher. That is, the bomb image IT1 is digested, and the mode of the telop YK1 is changed to a mode with a higher expectation of winning the special drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the telop notice YK1 is erased, and the telop notice ends.

[Expectation level up item production 2]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the expectation-increasing item effect 2. FIG. The expectation-increasing item effect 2 is an effect in which one bomb, which is an expectation-increasing item, explodes and is extinguished while the display screen 7a is changing, and the bomb is additionally displayed in the subsequent change.

This expectation level increasing item effect 2 is the same effect as the expectation level increasing item effect 1 shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(D) of the expectation-increasing item effect 1 will be omitted here. Description will be made from FIG. 103(A), which is the same effect as FIG.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the green (hatching 2) hold repeats the shift movement, and the hold icon 9A1 (hold corresponding to the first special figure hold) is the hold icon 9C (for the change corresponding change icon). After the movement, only the green (hatched 2) pending icon 9C is displayed in the pending display area.
Here, it is the start of fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. After that, a bomb image IT2 representing a second bomb, which is an expectation-increasing item, is additionally displayed. With this, one bomb, which is an item that raises expectations, will be reduced from one to two. This indicates that the expectation-increasing effect is performed twice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a telop notice is given, and the telop YK1 is displayed as "Reach?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the first expectation-increasing item, a bomb, is extinguished, and an explosion IT11 is performed in front of the telop YK1 to cover the telop YK1. After the bomb IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT2 is moved and displayed at the position of the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the explosion has ended, and the telop YK1 has changed from "Reach?" with an expectation level of 3 to "Extreme heat!" Compared to "Reach?", the expectation of winning the special lottery is higher. That is, the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 is extinguished, and the mode of the telop YK1 is changed to a mode with a higher expectation of winning the special drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), the telop notice has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the bomb, which is an expectation-increasing item, is extinguished, and an explosion IT11 is performed. After this bomb is extinguished, the bomb image IT1 is gone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), when the explosion ends and the ready-to-win effect develops, the character CRA with an expectation level of 50 is displayed. When this character CRA is displayed, if it develops into a ready-to-win effect, it becomes an advantageous situation in the subsequent ready-to-win effect, and the degree of expectation for winning the special drawing increases.

[Expectation level up item production 3]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the expectation-increasing item effect 3. FIG. In the expectation-increasing item presentation 3, a plurality of bombs, which are expectations-increasing items, are displayed while the display screen 7a is fluctuating, and one of the bombs is displayed in a manner different from a normal bomb. It is a production that the bomb is digested. The hold that changes due to the explosion of the bomb is the change due to the explosion of the bomb in the normal mode, and the degree of expectation of winning increases, but the change due to the explosion of the bomb in a different mode from the normal bomb increases the expectation of winning. The higher it gets, the bigger it gets.

First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed. In addition, it is in a state where four reserves of the first special figure are accumulated. That is, in a state in which the pending icon 9C (the variation icon corresponding to the variation) and the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure pending are displayed. be. The reservation icon 9A4 corresponding to the fourth of the first special figure reservation is blue (hatching 1). It should be noted that the expectation level of the special lottery hit by the reserved color here is the same as the expectation level of the special lottery hit by the reserved color in the above-mentioned "expectation level up item production 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), two bombs, which are items for increasing expectations, are displayed. A bomb image IT1 representing the first bomb and a bomb image IT2 representing the second bomb are displayed. The bomb images IT1 and IT2 are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the expectation-increasing effect is performed twice. It is digested from the first bomb image IT1. In the bomb image IT1, the character "DANGEROUS" is displayed, and when this bomb is extinguished, the bomb explodes in a different manner than when the bomb without the "DANGEROUS" character is extinguished. There is a high possibility that the degree of expectation for winning will increase due to the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), one reservation is digested, and three reservations of the first special figure are accumulated. That is, the pending icon 9C (the variation icon corresponding to the variation) and the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first, second, and third special figure pending are displayed. The suspension in blue (hatching 1) is the suspension icon 9A3 corresponding to the third one of the first special figure suspension.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104D, an effect is performed in which the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 displaying the characters "dangerous" explodes IT11. Explosion IT11 is performed in the pending display area to cover up the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. The bomb that is digested here is the first bomb, and after this bomb image IT1 is digested, the bomb image IT2 moves and is displayed at the position of the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the explosion has ended, and the hold icon 9A3 has changed from blue (hatching 1) with an expectation level of 5 to red with an expectation level of 50 (hatching 3). As a result, the degree of expectation for winning the special figure lottery is higher than when it is blue. Also, as shown in FIG. 102(D), when the bomb without the character "DANGEROUS" was extinguished, the color changed to green (hatching 2), but in FIG. The bomb with the letter , has been extinguished and turned red (hatching 3). In other words, the bomb with the character "dangerous" displayed differs from the bomb with the normal form in the way the bomb is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the red (hatching 3) hold repeats the shift movement, and the hold icon 9A1 (hold corresponding to the first of the first special figure hold) is the hold icon 9C (the relevant This is the change icon corresponding to the change). After the movement, only the red (hatched 3) pending icon 9C is displayed in the pending display area. Here, it is the start of fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 explodes IT11. Explosion IT11 is performed in the pending display area to cover the pending icon 9C. After this bomb IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(I), the explosion has ended, and the hold icon 9C has changed from red (hatching 3) with an expectation level of 50 to gold (hatching 4) with an expectation level of 100. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning the special figure lottery is higher than when it is red. In addition, since the degree of expectation is 100, the special figure lottery of the change corresponding to the gold pending icon 9C indicates that the hit has been decided.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of the expectation-increasing item effects 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "expectation level increasing item presentation 1" and "expectation level increasing item presentation 3". One of them is a bomb image IT1, and one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon 9A4 that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in a special lottery or a general lottery, and bomb images IT1 and IT2. , and the pending icon 9A4 are displayed (FIG. 102(B)), and after the first effect (FIG. 102(B)), a bomb image that is one of the bomb images IT1 and IT2 is displayed. A second effect (FIGS. 102(C) and (D)) for changing the mode of the pending icon 9A4 displayed after IT1 is consumed to a mode with a higher expectation of winning, and a second effect (FIG. 102 After (C), (D)), one of the remaining displayed bomb images IT1 is extinguished, and the pending icon whose mode has changed in the second rendering (FIGS. 104 (D), (E)) 9C or telop notice telop YK1 is changed to a mode with a higher expectation of winning (((H), (I) of FIG. 104), ((G), (H) of FIG. 102)) and are executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform in advance that an effect will be performed in which the degree of expectation for winning is changed to a higher level, and thus it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the bomb image IT1 is displayed after the first effect (Fig. 102(B)) as shown in "expectation level increasing item effect 1" and "expectation level increasing item effect 2". In this state, a fourth effect (FIG. 103(B)) in which a new bomb image IT2 is additionally displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform in advance that an effect will be performed in which the degree of expectation for winning is changed to a higher level, and thus it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in "expectation-increasing item effect 3", the second effect (FIGS. 104(D) and (E)) is replaced by the first effect (FIG. 104(B)). is executed during a different variation than According to this configuration, it is possible to inform in advance that an effect will be performed in which the degree of expectation for winning is changed to a higher level, and thus it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the "expectation-increasing item effect 1", in the second effect (FIGS. 102(C) and (D)), the state of the hold icon 9A4 is changed. It is that the color of the icon 9A4 changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform in advance that an effect will be performed in which the degree of expectation for winning is changed to a higher level, and thus it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "expectation level increasing item effect 1" and "expectation level increasing item effect 3", in the first effect (FIG. 104(B)), the bomb image IT1 and the bomb image IT2 may be displayed in different manners, and in the second rendering (FIGS. 104(D) and (E)), the manner of the pending icon 9A3 changes (from blue to red) and the change in the mode of the pending icon 9A4 of the "expectation level increasing item effect 1" (from blue to green) differ in the extent to which the degree of expectation for winning increases.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the expectation-increasing item effects 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, two bomb images representing bombs are displayed, and an effect of changing to a mode with a higher degree of expectation for winning is performed twice, but the number of bomb images does not have to be two. For example, it may be one or three or more.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation of winning is the degree of expectation of winning of the special drawing lottery, but it may be the degree of expectation of winning the normal drawing lottery.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the suspension is the suspension of the first special symbol, but it may be the suspension of the second special symbol.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the effect of changing to a mode in which the expectation of winning after the bomb is additionally displayed is different from the effect when it is not additionally displayed, but it is different from the effect after it is additionally displayed. The same effect may be performed when the additional display is not performed.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when the bomb is defused, the second bomb moves to the position of the first bomb. You can wait to be digested in the second position.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the variation in which the bomb image is additionally displayed and the variation in which the bomb image is extinguished are different variations, but they may be the same variation.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the bomb is displayed without any trigger, but it may be displayed when a specific decorative pattern stops.

[Modification 8]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the bomb explodes when displayed, but it may disappear without exploding even if the bomb is displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestive image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery or the normal drawing lottery,
a first effect in which the plurality of predetermined images and the suggestive image are displayed;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, one of the plurality of predetermined images is digested and the mode of the displayed suggestive image is changed to a mode with a higher expectation of winning;
After the second effect, one of the remaining predetermined images is digested, and the suggestive image whose aspect has changed in the second effect or a suggestive image different from the suggestive image whose aspect has changed. A third effect that changes the mode of the win to a mode with a higher expectation of winning, and
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
After the first effect, in a state in which the predetermined image is displayed, a fourth effect in which the new predetermined image is additionally displayed is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
The second effect is executed during a variation different from the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3,
In the second rendering, changing the aspect of the suggestive image means that the color of the suggestive image changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-4,
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images may be displayed in different modes,
In the second effect and the third effect, depending on the aspect of the predetermined image to be digested, the extent to which the degree of expectation of winning increases due to the change in the aspect of the suggestive image differs.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The numerical total effects 1 to 5 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. FIG. These numerical sum productions 1 to 5 are executed in the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to display the image.

[Number total production 1]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the numerical total effect 1. FIG. The numerical value total effect 1 is an effect suggesting the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game that starts after the change during the change that the winning game is decided on the display screen 7a. Each time the button is pressed, a numerical value is displayed, and when the final button is pressed, a numerical value greater than or equal to the sum of the displayed numerical values is displayed, suggesting the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game starting after the variation.

First, as shown in FIG. 105A, during fluctuation, the left decorative design 8L is "7", the middle decorative design 8C is "7", and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped at "7". In other words, it is determined that the winning game will be performed after the variation is completed. In addition, the pending icon 9A of the pending of the first special figure and the pending icon 9C of the change (also referred to as the change icon) are displayed. It is in Hold 4 state. It does not have to be in the state of hold 4. A pending icon 9B may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a telop TR1 of "How many can you get?" is displayed, indicating that the effect of displaying the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game after the variation is started. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and displayed on the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), an image BTN1 prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 63 and an image TM1 showing a time limit for the repeated hitting are displayed. The image BTN1 for prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 63 is provided with characters of "continuous hit" to prompt repeated hitting. Immediately after the image TM1 representing the time limit was displayed, the bar was displayed all the way to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. This numerical value “5” ST1 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63 . In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit. It should be noted that, as for the period during which the continuous hitting can be performed, a period in which the depression of the effect button 63 is invalidated immediately after the effect button 63 is pressed may be provided.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), numerical value "5" ST1, numerical value "8" ST2, numerical value "5" ST3, numerical value "12" ST4, and numerical value "10" ST5 are displayed. The effect button 63 is pressed five times, and the numerical values ST1 to ST5 are images displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed. In addition, all these numerical values may be different or may be the same. Furthermore, two or more numerical images may be displayed by pressing the effect button 63 once. Also, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the performance button 63 is continued to be pressed thereafter, and the numerical value "8" ST6, the numerical value "5" ST7, and the numerical value "8" ST8 are displayed at each depression. . Also, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar is removed, indicating that the time limit has expired and the numeric value will not be displayed even if the effect button 63 is pressed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the period during which the production button 63 can be repeatedly hit has ended, so the image BTN1 prompting the production button 63 to be repeatedly hit disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), an image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 and an image TM2 representing a time limit during which the effect button 63 can be pressed are displayed. The image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 is provided with the characters "Press!" to prompt the user to press it. Immediately after the image TM2 representing the time limit was displayed, the bar was displayed all the way to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), the numerical values ST1 to ST8 displayed each time the button is pressed are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. This numerical value “800” ST100 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63 . The numerical value "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game that starts after the fluctuation ends. It should be noted that the numerical value ST100 (800) displayed here is greater than or equal to the total value of the numerical values ST1 to ST8 (5, 8, 5, 12, 10, 8, 5, 8) displayed during repeated hits. In addition, when a win is included in the reserve, a numerical value including the number of game balls that can be acquired in the win game due to the win in the reserve is displayed. It should be noted that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game by winning in the reserve.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(J), the variation is completed, and the left decorative design 8L is "7", the middle decorative design 8C is "7", and the right decorative design 8R is "7". . It indicates that the fluctuation has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(K), the game shifts to a winning game, a telop "big win!" TR2 is displayed, and the big winning game is started.

[Number total production 2]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining numerical total effects 2, 3, and 4. FIG. 106(A) to (H) is a numerical total effect 2, and during the variation in which the winning game is determined to be performed on the display screen 7a, the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game starting after the variation is calculated. It is a suggestive performance. Numerical values are sequentially displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a numerical value equal to or greater than the sum of the displayed numerical values is displayed to indicate the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game that starts after the fluctuation.

Although it is the numerical total effect 2, as shown in FIG. 106(A), it is changing, and the left decorative design 8L is "7", the middle decorative design 8C is "7", and the right decorative design 8R is "7". Stopped. In other words, it is determined that the winning game will be performed after the variation is completed. In addition, the pending icon 9A of the pending of the first special figure and the pending icon 9C of the change (also referred to as the change icon) are displayed. It is in Hold 4 state. It does not have to be in the state of hold 4. A pending icon 9B may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a telop TR1 of "How many can you get?" is displayed, indicating that the effect of displaying the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game after the variation is started. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced and displayed on the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the telop TR1 of "How many can you get?" is erased and the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106D, numerical value "5" ST1, numerical value "8" ST2, numerical value "5" ST3, numerical value "12" ST4, and numerical value "10" ST5 are displayed. These numeric images are the displayed images in sequence. Note that two or more numerical values may be displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), after that, the numerical value "8" ST6, the numerical value "5" ST7, and the numerical value "8" ST8 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the numerical values ST1 to ST8 displayed each time the button is pressed are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. The numerical value "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game that starts after the fluctuation ends. The numerical value ST100 (800) displayed here is greater than or equal to the sum of the displayed numerical values ST1 to ST8 (5, 8, 5, 12, 10, 8, 5, 8). In addition, when a win is included in the reserve, a numerical value including the number of game balls that can be acquired in the win game due to the win in the reserve is displayed. It should be noted that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game by winning in the reserve.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the variation is completed, and the left decorative design 8L is "7", the middle decorative design 8C is "7", and the right decorative design 8R is "7". . It indicates that the fluctuation has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), the game shifts to a winning game, a telop "big win!" TR2 is displayed, and the big winning game is started.

[Number total production 3]
The effect of FIG. 106(I) is a numerical total effect 3, and as another example of the effects of FIGS. It is an effect that displays a numerical value that is greater than or equal to the sum of the numerical values.

As for the numerical value total effect 3, as another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(H), two numerical values are displayed one by one, and the displayed numerical values are totaled after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is an effect that displays a numerical value greater than or equal to the numerical value. This will be described with reference to FIG. 106(I).

106(A) to (C) are common to the numerical total effect 2 described above, and FIG. 106(I) follows after FIG. 106(C). Description of FIGS. 106A to 106C is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 106(I), numerical value "5" ST1 and numerical value "8" ST2 are displayed. Two numbers are displayed. These numeric images are the displayed images in sequence.

After that, the displayed numerical values ``5'' ST1 and ``8'' ST2 are erased, and the numerical value ``800'' ST100 is displayed. , so the description is omitted.

[Number total production 4]
106(J) to (L) are numerical total effects 4, and as another example of the "numerical total effects 1" described above, two numerical values are displayed each time the button is pressed. When the final button is pressed, a value greater than or equal to the sum of the displayed values is displayed.

Regarding the numerical total effect 4, as another example of the effect of the above-mentioned "numerical total effect 1", two numerical values are displayed one by one each time the button is pressed, and are displayed when the button is pressed thereafter. It is an effect that displays a numerical value that is greater than or equal to the sum of the numerical values. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 106(J) to (L).

105(A) and (B) are common to the above-described "numerical value sum effect 1" effect, and FIG. 106(J) follows after FIG. 105(B). Description of FIGS. 105A and 105B is omitted.

After FIG. 105(B), as shown in FIG. 106(J), an image BTN1 prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 63 and an image TM1 showing a time limit for the repeated hitting are displayed. The image BTN1 for prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 63 is provided with characters of "continuous hit" to prompt repeated hitting. Immediately after the image TM1 representing the time limit was displayed, the bar was displayed all the way to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(K), the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. This numerical value “5” ST1 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63 . In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(L), the numerical value "5" ST1 and the numerical value "8" ST2 are displayed. This numerical value "8" ST2 is an image displayed by further pressing the effect button 63 after the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar disappears, indicating that the time limit has expired.

After that, an image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 and an image TM2 indicating the time limit for pressing the effect button 63 are displayed. The image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 is provided with the characters "Press!" to prompt the user to press it. Immediately after the image TM2 representing the time limit was displayed, the bar was displayed all the way to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), the numerical values ST1 and ST2 displayed each time the button is pressed are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 and ST2 may remain displayed. This numerical value “800” ST100 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63 . The numerical value "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game that starts after the fluctuation ends. It should be noted that the numerical value ST100 (800) displayed here is greater than or equal to the total value of the numerical values ST1 and ST2 (5, 8) displayed during repeated hits. In addition, when a win is included in the reserve, a numerical value including the number of game balls that can be acquired in the win game due to the win in the reserve is displayed. It should be noted that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game by winning in the reserve.

After that, the explanation is omitted because it is common to FIGS.

[Number total production 5]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the numerical total effect 5. FIG. The numerical value total effect 5 is a effect suggesting the number of fluctuations of the time saving state which starts after the end of the winning game before the end of the winning game. Each time the button is pressed, a numerical value is displayed, and with the final button depression, the sum of the displayed numerical values is displayed, suggesting the number of fluctuations in the time-saving state that will begin after the end of winning.

First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), it is during the end interval of the winning game, and the telop "end of jackpot" TR3 is displayed to indicate that the winning game is over.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a telop TR4 of "Get time saving!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), an image BTN1 prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 63 and an image TM1 representing a time limit for the repeated hitting are displayed. The image BTN1 for prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 63 is provided with characters of "continuous hit" to prompt repeated hitting. Immediately after the image TM1 representing the time limit was displayed, the bar was displayed all the way to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), the numerical value "1" ST1 is displayed. This numerical value “1” ST1 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63 . In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit. It should be noted that, as for the period during which the continuous hitting can be performed, a period in which the depression of the effect button 63 is invalidated immediately after the effect button 63 is pressed may be provided.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a numerical value "1" ST1, a numerical value "1" ST2, a numerical value "2" ST3, a numerical value "1" ST4, and a numerical value "3" ST5 are displayed. The effect button 63 is pressed five times, and the numerical values ST1 to ST5 are images displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed. In addition, all these numerical values may be different or may be the same. Furthermore, two or more numerical images may be displayed by pressing the effect button 63 once. Also, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the effect button 63 is continued to be pressed thereafter, and further, the numerical value "5" ST6, the numerical value "1" ST7, and the numerical value "2" ST8 are displayed each time the button is depressed. . Also, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar is removed, indicating that the time limit has expired and the numeric value will not be displayed even if the effect button 63 is pressed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), the period during which the effect button 63 can be repeatedly hit has ended, so the image BTN1 prompting the effect button 63 to be repeatedly hit disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), an image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 and an image TM2 representing the time limit during which the effect button 63 can be pressed are displayed. The image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 is provided with the characters "Press!" to prompt the user to press it. Immediately after the image TM2 representing the time limit was displayed, the bar was displayed all the way to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(I), the numerical values ST1 to ST8 displayed each time the button is pressed are erased, and the numerical value "50" ST200 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. This numerical value "50" ST200 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. FIG. The numerical value "50" in this image represents the number of fluctuations in the time saving state that starts after the end of winning. The numerical value ST200 (50) displayed here is greater than or equal to the total value of the numerical values ST1 to ST8 (1, 1, 2, 1, 3, 5, 1, 2) displayed during repeated hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(J),
A telop TR5 of "time saving 50 times" is displayed, indicating that the number of changes in the time saving state performed after the end of the winning game is 50 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (K), it shifts from the winning game to the time-saving state, and fluctuation is started in the time-saving state. This time saving state is continued 50 times. In addition, you may continue 50 times or more.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the numerical total effects 1 to 5 is shown below.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "numerical value sum effect 1", and one of the plurality of types of images has a numerical value of "5" ST1. , one of the plurality of types of images is the numerical value "8" ST2, one of the plurality of types of images is the numerical value "800" ST100, and the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. After the first effect (Fig. 105(D)) and the first effect (Fig. 105(D)), the value "8" ST2 is additionally displayed while the value "5" ST1 is displayed. The second effect (Fig. 105(E)), and after the second effect (Fig. 105(E)), the third effect (Fig. 105(I)) in which the number "800" ST100 is displayed. It is feasible, and the value of the value "800" ST100 is greater than or equal to the sum of the value of the value "5" ST1 and the value of the value "8" ST2. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance the number of game balls that can be acquired by winning games, and to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "numerical total effect 1", the effect button 63 that can be operated by the player is further provided. and one of the plurality of types of images is an image BTN2 that represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and prompts it to be pressed. ) and the second effect (FIG. 105(E)) are performed when the effect button 63 is operated in a state in which the image BTN1 prompting to repeatedly hit the effect button 63 is displayed, and the third effect ( FIG. 105(I)) is performed when the effect button 63 is operated while the image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance the number of game balls that can be acquired by winning games, and to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in the "numerical total effect 1", the numerical value "8" ST2 is different from the numerical value "5" ST1. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance the number of game balls that can be acquired by winning games, and to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the "numerical total effect 1", the numerical value of the numerical value "800" ST100 is the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game when the special drawing lottery of the variation is winning. It is a numerical value representing the total number of the number and the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game when the reserved special figure lottery is a win (FIG. 105 (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance the number of game balls that can be acquired by winning games, and to improve interest.

[Modification]
Modifications of the numerical total effects 1 to 5 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the image BTN1 prompting to repeatedly hit the effect button 63 and the image BTN2 prompting to press the effect button 63 are different images, but they may be the same image.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, when the effect button 63 is pressed while the image BTN1 prompting to repeatedly hit the effect button 63 is displayed, a numerical image is displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed, but there are cases where the numerical image is not displayed. There may be.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the numerical value "800" of the image representing the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning game starting after the end of the variation is displayed once, and then a numerical image representing a numerical value equal to or greater than the displayed numerical value is displayed. good.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, "numerical total effect 1 to 4" is performed during variation before winning game, but may be performed during winning game.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, "numerical total effect 5" is performed during the winning game before the time saving state, but it may be performed during the fluctuation after shifting to the time saving state after the winning game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first numerical image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second numerical image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a third numerical image;
a first effect in which the first numerical image is displayed;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, the second numerical image is additionally displayed while the first numerical image is displayed;
a third effect in which the third numerical image is displayed after the second effect, and
the numerical value of the third numerical image is a numerical value equal to or greater than the sum of the numerical values of the first numerical image and the numerical values of the second numerical image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 further comprises
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
The first effect and the second effect are performed when the operation means is operated while the first operation means image is displayed,
The third effect is performed when the operation means is operated while the second operation means image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
The numerical values of the second numerical image are different from the numerical values of the first numerical image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-3,
The numerical value of the third numerical image is the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game when the special figure lottery of the variation is a win, and the winning game when the reserved special figure lottery is a win. A numerical value that represents the total number of game balls that can be acquired in
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suspended prefetch effects 1 to 3 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. The reserved look-ahead effects 1 to 3 are executed during the winning game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to display the image.

[Reservation look-ahead effect 1]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the reserved prefetch effect 1. FIG. In the pending look-ahead effect 1, when the effect of the jackpot game is being performed on the display screen 7a, the game ball enters the big winning hole (either the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35, or both, as shown in FIG. 108). ~ Same in Figure 110) Each time the ball is entered, an image representing that the ball is entered is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the image indicates the degree of expectation for winning the special drawing lottery, and then the image disappears. is. In addition, an image different from the image showing that the player has entered the ball is displayed in the same color as the image that shows that the player has entered the ball, and the image also suggests the degree of expectation for winning the special figure lottery. Incidentally, when there are two big winning holes, both big winning holes may be used, or one of the big winning holes may be used (the same applies to FIGS. 108 to 110).

During this jackpot game, the character CRA and the character CRB face each other, and depending on whether the character CRA wins or loses, the pending special drawing is announced during the jackpot. When the character CRA wins, it is determined that the reserved special figure lottery is won, and when the character CRA loses, it is not determined that the reserved special figure lottery is won. In this embodiment, the character CRA and the character CRB face each other in the first round, and the result of the confrontation between the character CRA and the character CRB is displayed in the second round. Note that the number of rounds in which these effects are performed may be a different number of rounds.

First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a "big win!" telop TR1 is displayed at the big win start interval to notify that the big win game will start. A pending icon 9A is displayed. It should be noted that the pending icon 9B may be displayed, or not all pending icons may be displayed (similarly in FIGS. 108 to 110).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a round number display TRR of "1R" representing the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and one round starts. That is, the big prize opening is opened. With the opening of the big winning opening, the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, a character CRA and a character CRB are displayed facing each other. The effect KSG representing the strength of the sword is attached to the tip of the sword of the character CRA. At this point, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of character CRA is white (no hatching). The color of this effect KSG suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. Details will be described later.

The effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA is the strongest in red, the second strongest in green, the third strongest in blue, and the fourth strongest (weakest) in white. As shown in FIG. 108(L), white is indicated by no hatching, blue is indicated by hatching 1, green is indicated by hatching 2, and red is indicated by hatching 3. Also, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) of a big win is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG.

Next, in FIG. 108(C), it is a state in which a game ball enters the big winning hole. An image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the ball is entered. This image NGZ is displayed at a position near the big winning opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). It should be noted that the position may not be close to the big prize winning opening. At this point, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of character CRA is white (no hatching). The color of the image NGZ, which indicates that the player has entered the ball, suggests the degree of expectation for the big win. Details will be described later.

In the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball, red is the strongest, green is the second, blue is the third, and white is the fourth (weakest). As shown in FIG. 108(L), white is indicated by no hatching, blue is indicated by hatching 1, green is indicated by hatching 2, and red is indicated by hatching 3. Also, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) of a big win is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG.

Next, in FIG. 108(D), an image NGZ representing that the ball has been hit is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). It may spread gradually and be displayed on the whole, or may be displayed on the whole in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 108E, the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter. The effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA has already changed from white (no hatching) to blue (hatching 1). In this embodiment, when the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, the color of the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is changed to the same color as the image NGZ. However, when the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed, the color of the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA may be changed to the same color as the image NGZ.

Next, in FIG. 108(F), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered has been completed. The color of the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA remains blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 108(G), it is a state in which a game ball has newly entered the big winning hole. An image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is newly displayed as the ball is entered. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2). At this point, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of character CRA is blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 108(H), an image NGZ representing that the ball has been hit is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 108(I), the green (hatching 2) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the green (hatching 2) becomes lighter. The effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA has already changed from blue (hatching 1) to green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 108(J), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered has been completed. The color of the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA remains green (hatching 2).

After this, every time a new game ball enters the big winning hole, the image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered is displayed, and the image NGZ disappears by fading out. The image NGZ representing that the ball has entered may be displayed in a different color (eg, red). Also, as the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed in a different color, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA may also be displayed in a different color.
After repeating this, one round ends.

Next, in FIG. 108(K), the process moves to the second round. A round number display TRR of "2R" representing the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and two rounds have started. After an effect in which the character CRA and the character CRB confront each other, a telop TR2 of "Victory" is displayed, indicating that the character CRA has won. As a result, it is determined that there is a hit in the reserved special drawing lottery.

[Holding look-ahead effect 2]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the pending prefetch effect 2. FIG. In the pending look-ahead effect 2, an image indicating that the ball has entered is displayed on the display screen 7a each time the game ball enters the big winning hole while the effect of the jackpot game is being performed on the display screen 7a. , is an effect when a new game ball enters the big winning hole while an image showing that the ball has entered is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a round number display TRR of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and one round starts. That is, the big prize opening is opened. With the opening of the big winning opening, the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, a character CRA and a character CRB are displayed facing each other. The effect KSG representing the strength of the sword is attached to the tip of the sword of the character CRA. At this point, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of character CRA is white (no hatching).

Next, in FIG. 109(B), it is a state in which a game ball enters the big winning hole. An image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the ball is entered. This image NGZ is displayed at a position near the big winning opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). At this point, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of character CRA is white (no hatching).

Next, in FIG. 109(C), an image NGZ representing that the ball has been hit is spread over the entire display screen 7a and displayed. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). In addition, you may display on the whole in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 109(D), an image NGZ representing that the ball has been hit is displayed spread over the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109E, the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter. The effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA has already changed from white (no hatching) to blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109(F), while the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a is fading out, a new game ball enters the big winning hole. be. An image NGZA representing that the ball has been entered is newly displayed as the ball is entered. That is, a new image NGZA is newly displayed overlapping the faded-out image NGZ. This image NGZA is displayed in blue (hatching 1). In this embodiment, the image NGZ and the image NGZA have the same color, but they may have different colors.

Next, in FIG. 109(G), the blue (hatched 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, but the image NGZA representing that the ball has been newly entered is displayed. It spreads and is displayed on the whole screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). In addition, you may display on the whole in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 109(H), the image NGZ has finished fading out, and the image NGZA representing that the ball has been newly entered is displayed spread over the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109I, the blue (hatching 1) image NGZA displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 109(J), the fade-out of the image NGZA representing that the ball has been entered has been completed. The color of the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is blue (hatching 1).

[Reservation look-ahead effect 3]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the pending prefetch effect 3. FIG. In the pending look-ahead effect 3, an image representing that the ball has entered is displayed on the display screen 7a every time the game ball enters the big winning hole while the effect during the jackpot game is being performed on the display screen 7a, The image suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery, and then the image disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a round number display TRR of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and one round starts. That is, the big prize opening is opened. With the opening of the big winning opening, the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening.

Next, in FIG. 110(B), it is a state in which a game ball has entered the big winning hole. An image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the ball is entered. This image NGZ is displayed at a position near the big winning opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). It should be noted that the position may not be close to the big prize winning opening.

Next, in FIG. 110C, the image NGZ, which is displayed in blue (hatching 1) and indicates that the ball has been hit, fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(D), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered has been completed.

Next, FIG. 110(E) shows a state in which a game ball has newly entered the big winning hole. An image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is newly displayed as the ball is entered. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 110(F), the image NGZ, which is displayed in green (hatching 2) and indicates that the ball has been entered, fades out, and the green (hatching 2) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(G), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered has been completed.

Next, FIG. 110(H) shows a state in which a game ball has newly entered the big winning hole. An image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is newly displayed as the ball is entered. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 110(I), the image NGZ, which is displayed in green (hatching 2) and indicates that the ball has been entered, fades out, and the green (hatching 2) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(J), while the image NGZ, which is displayed in green (hatching 2) and indicates that a ball has entered, is fading out, a state in which a new game ball enters the big winning hole. is. An image NGZA representing that the ball has been entered is newly displayed as the ball is entered. That is, a new image NGZA is newly displayed overlapping the faded-out image NGZ. This image NGZA is displayed in red (hatching 3). In this embodiment, the image NGZ and the image NGZA have different colors, but they may have the same color.

Next, in FIG. 110(K), the green (hatching 2) image NGZ has completed fading out, and the red (hatching 3) image NGZA indicating that the ball has been entered fades out, and the red (hatching 3) image NGZA fades out. 3) becomes thinner.

Next, in FIG. 110(L), the fade-out of the image NGZA representing that the ball has been entered has been completed.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effect of the pending lookahead effects 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in "suspended look-ahead effect 1", a large winning opening into which game balls can enter during a winning game, and a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images are provided. One of the plurality of types of images is an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered, and is displayed after the image NGZ is displayed each time the game ball enters the big winning hole during the winning game. 108(C)-(E), (G)-(I)) in which the image NGZ disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery every time a game ball enters the big winning hole during a winning game, and as a result, it is possible to perform a pending look-ahead, which is interesting. can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered is displayed in the first effect (FIGS. 109B to 109H), as shown in the "suspended look-ahead effect 2", The image NGZ showing that the ball has entered starts fading out, and when a new game ball enters the big winning hole, the image that shows that the new ball has entered is superimposed on the image NGZ showing that the ball has entered, which is fading out. A second effect in which NGZA is displayed (FIGS. 109(F) to (H)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery every time a game ball enters the big winning hole during a winning game, and as a result, it is possible to perform a pending look-ahead, which is interesting. can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in the "suspended look-ahead effect 1", during a specific game is during a jackpot game, and the image NGZ representing that a ball has been entered is suspended by color. The figure suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery (Fig. 108(L)). According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery every time a game ball enters the big winning hole during a winning game, and as a result, it is possible to perform a pending look-ahead, which is interesting. can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images is the character CRA, which indicates the degree of expectation of winning in the reserved special drawing by color, as shown in "suspended look-ahead effect 1". The effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is displayed during the jackpot game, and the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is displayed in the first production (Fig. 108 (C) to (E), (G) to (I) ), when the image NGZ representing that the ball has been entered is displayed, the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is displayed in the same color as the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the third presentation (FIG. 108 (C ) to (E), (G) to (I)), and the image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered in the first rendering (Fig. 108 (C) to (E), (G) to (I)) disappears. 108(F), (J)) in which the display of the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA does not disappear and is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery every time a game ball enters the big winning hole during a winning game, and as a result, it is possible to perform a pending look-ahead, which is interesting. can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the pending lookahead effects 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the reservation that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery by the color targets all the reservations, but it may be the specific reservations. For example, after a jackpot game, the reservation that is consumed first may be targeted.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect of notifying that there is a hit in the reserved special drawing lottery is performed during the round, but it may be performed at the jackpot end interval.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect G2-1]
a ball entrance through which a game ball can enter during a specific game;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
capable of executing a first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed and then the displayed predetermined image disappears every time a game ball enters the ball entrance during the specific game;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1,
After the predetermined image is displayed in the first effect, the predetermined image starts fading out. Capable of executing a second effect in which an image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1 or aspect G2-2,
The specific game is during a winning game,
The predetermined image suggests the expected degree of winning in the special drawing lottery reserved by color,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestive image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the reserved special drawing lottery by color,
The suggestive image is displayed during the winning game,
a third effect in which, when the predetermined image is displayed in the first effect, the suggestive image is displayed in the same color as the displayed predetermined image;
a fourth effect in which when the predetermined image disappears in the first effect, the suggestive image does not disappear and the display is maintained;
A gaming machine characterized by:

111 to 113, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine will be described below. 111 is a schematic diagram of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10, FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram of the first movable accessory 14, and FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram of the fixed winning device 19. .

111(A) is a front upper left perspective view of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10, viewed from the front upper left, and FIG. 111(B) is arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10. FIG. 111(C) is a rear upper left perspective view of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 as seen from the rear upper left. 111(D) is a rear upper right perspective view of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10, viewed from the rear upper right, and FIG. FIG. 111(F) is a front view of a decorative substrate attached to the interior of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10, as viewed from the front. .

112(A) is a front upper left perspective view of the first movable accessory 14 seen from the front upper left, and FIG. 112(B) is a rear upper left perspective view of the first movable accessory 14 seen from the rear upper left. 112(C) is a partially enlarged view of a part of the light emitting part of the first movable accessory 14, and FIG. 112(D) is a part of the light emitting part of the first movable accessory 14. It is an enlarged view of the wiring connection part in the state which removed the cover body.

113(A) is a front upper left perspective view of the fixed prize winning device 19 as seen from the front upper left, FIG. 113(B) is a front upper right perspective view of the fixed prize winning device 19 as seen from the front upper right, FIG. 113(C) is a rear upper left perspective view of the fixed prize winning device 19 viewed from the rear upper left, FIG. 113(D) is a rear upper right perspective view of the fixed prize winning device 19 viewed from the rear upper right, and FIG. FIG. 113(F) is a front view of the fixed prize winning device 19 as seen from the front, and FIG.

Here, first, the structure of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 will be described, followed by the structure of the first movable accessory 14 and the structure of the fixed winning device 19 in this order. Next, as the wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 will be described. The suppression effect and the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed winning device 19 will be described in order.

[Structure of Decorative Portion 10a Arranged in Lower Right of Center Decorative Portion 10]
First, the structure of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 will be described with reference to FIG. A decorative portion 10 a is arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 . Since the decorative portion 10a is capable of emitting multicolor light, the game device is capable of emitting multicolor light.

As shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B, the decorative portion 10a includes a base body 10ab made of a plate-like colorless and transparent synthetic resin material to which a decorative substrate 10aa is attached on the front side (surface side); and a cover body 10ac made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material covering the entire front surface of the base body 10ab.

As shown in FIG. 111(F), a plurality of top-view type lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa. , a plurality of connectors 10aab to which electrical wiring is connected are mounted. On the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, two lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally as the first stage, which is the lowest stage, separated by a predetermined distance. Three lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally at a predetermined distance as a second stage above the second stage, and four lamps 10aaa are arranged as a third stage above the second stage. are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance, and two lamps 10aaa are arranged at a predetermined distance approximately horizontally as the fourth stage, which is the uppermost stage, above the third stage. . The top-view type lamp 10aaa, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting color light, has a light-emitting surface parallel to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa. The emitted light is directed in a direction perpendicular to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa (that is, toward the player side), and brightly illuminates the cover body 10ac. Hereinafter, the light emission mode for illuminating the cover body 10ac may be simply referred to as "the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a".

The two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are managed as the first lamp group, the three lamps 10aaa in the second stage are managed as the second lamp group, and the 4 lamps in the third stage are managed as the second lamp group. The lamps 10aaa are managed as a third lamp group, and the two lamps 10aaa in the uppermost fourth stage are managed as a fourth lamp group.

Further, on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 10aa, the lower connector 10aab is arranged along the left side of the decoration board 10aa on the left side of the first stage, which is the lowest stage. The upper connector 10aab is arranged on the left side of the second stage and above the lower connector 10aab along the left side of the decoration board 10aa.

Thus, a total of 11 lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, and two connectors 10aab are arranged. It is

As shown in FIGS. 111(C) and (D), on the LED non-mounting surface, which is the rear side opposite to the front side (front side) of the decoration board 10aa, the front side (front side) of the decoration board 10aa is provided. An LED control IC 10aac capable of gradation lighting of a total of 11 lamps 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface is arranged. The LED control IC 10aac is assigned an identification ID by a plurality of resistors (not shown), receives serial data from the outside based on a clock signal, and includes an identification ID for identifying itself in the input serial data. In some cases, input serial data is captured, and based on the captured serial data, currents output from a plurality of channels are adjusted, thereby enabling gradation control of a total of eleven lamps 10aaa. .

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage. The two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are controlled in gradation as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. . A second channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the three lamps 10aaa in the second stage. The three lamps 10aaa in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. A third channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the four lamps 10aaa in the third stage. The four lamps 10aaa in the third stage are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. The fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the two lamps 10aaa in the uppermost fourth stage. The two lamps 10aaa in the fourth stage are gradation-controlled as a fourth lamp group by adjusting the current output from the fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed.

In addition to the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the ground (GND) line and the power supply line are input through the lamp control board 107 to the upper connector 10aab. are electrically connected to the upper electric wiring 10aad. The lower connector 10aab is electrically connected to a lower electrical wiring 10aad electrically connected to a decorative substrate (not shown) for gradation lighting of the stage section 11 below the center decorative section 10. FIG.

The lower connector 10aab receives control signals (serial data, clock signals), a ground (GND) line, and a power supply line from the upper connector 10aab input through the upper electrical wiring 10aad. It is a connector for transmission to a decoration substrate (not shown) for gradation lighting of the stage portion 11 under the center decoration portion 10 via the center decoration portion 10 .

The upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are composed of four electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wirings having a white color. . The first to fourth electric wires have a part number and a name different from their own color (for example, black because the first electric wire is gray close to white), and the second to fourth electric wires is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Since the first electric wire is gray close to white, the gray close to white, which is the color of the first electric wire, is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electric wires.

A first electric wire having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, a second electric wire having a white color is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and a third electric wire having a white color is , a line for transmitting a clock signal among control signals, and a fourth electric wiring having a white color is a power supply line.

Both the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are white connectors, and have the same color as the white of the second to fourth electric wires. The upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab may be ivory. Since ivory is a color close to white, it is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings.

In this embodiment, a green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa. A solder resist is an insulating protective film that protects circuit patterns from dust, moisture, heat, and the like. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decoration board 10aa is inexpensive, and the main control board 80, relay board 88, payout control board 110 shown in FIG. 4 are also coated on the front side (surface side) and the rear side of various boards such as the sub-control board 90, the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board board 107, the relay board 108, and the like. However, instead of the green solder resist, the solder resist having the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa. good too. The decorative substrate 10aa has through holes formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions and mounting bosses formed on the front side of the base body 10ab.

Here, the method of assembling the decorative portion 10a will be briefly described. The decorative substrate 10aa is fixed to the base member 10ab by screwing a screw (not shown) from the front side (surface side) of the mounting boss toward the screw hole formed in the mounting boss. The mounting boss has a stepped surface, which has a diameter twice as small as the diameter of the base of the mounting boss, at a position a predetermined distance forward from the front side of the base body 10ab. . When the decorative substrate 10aa is fixed to the base body 10ab, the step surface is in surface contact with the rear surface of the decorative substrate 10aa. Due to this stepped surface, a space is formed between the rear surface of the LED control IC 10aac arranged on the rear surface side of the decorative substrate 10aa (the surface on which the manufacturer, product number, etc. are printed) and the surface of the base body 10ab. there is In other words, the rear surface of the LED control IC 10aac arranged on the rear surface side of the decorative substrate 10aa (the surface on which the manufacturer, product number, etc. are printed) does not come into contact with the surface of the base body 10ab. The shape of the base member 10ab is not deformed by the heat emitted from the base member 10ab.

Upper electrical wiring 10aad and lower electrical wiring 10aad are electrically connected to upper connector 10aab and lower connector 10aab of decoration substrate 10aa, and upper electrical wiring 10aad and lower electrical wiring 10aad are used as decorations. Bend 180 degrees from the front side (surface side) of the board 10aa toward the rear side of the decorative board 10aa, cover the front side (surface side) of the base body 10ab with the cover body 10ac, and cover the front side (surface side) of the base body 10ab. surface). As a result, a plurality of claws (hook-shaped claws) (not shown) formed on the rear surface side of the cover body 10ac are respectively hooked on the outer peripheral rear surface side of the base body 10ab, thereby fixing the cover body 10ac to the base body 10ab. do. A notch portion 10aba serving as a wiring opening is formed in the base body 10ab, and the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad are drawn out through the notch 10aba. Although the heat generated by the LED control IC 10aac is dissipated into the internal space formed by the base member 10ab and the cover member 10ac, the heat in the internal space is released to the outside through the notch portion 10aba. .

As shown in FIGS. 111A, 111B, and 111E, the decorative portion 10a assembled in this manner is passed through a cover body 10ac made of a transparent synthetic resin material from the front to turn off the lamp 10aaa. In this state, upper electric wiring 10aad (first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, second to fourth electric wiring having white color) and lower electric wiring 10aad (first electric wiring having a gray color close to white) are connected. , the second to fourth electrical wirings having white) can be easily visually recognized, the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab can be easily visually recognized, and the decorative substrate 10aa can be easily visually recognized. In addition, a total of eleven lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, can be easily visually recognized.

The decorative portion 10a is fitted with two mounting bosses 10abb formed on the back side of the base body 10ab into holes (not shown) formed on the rear side of the center decorative portion 10. As shown in FIG. Subsequently, the decoration portion 10a is fixed to the center decoration portion 10 by screwing a screw (not shown) from the rear surface side of the center decoration portion 10 toward the screw hole formed in the mounting boss.

In this embodiment, the cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a part of the front surface and a part of the side surface of the cover body 10ac may be configured to have a plated layer with a metallic luster, or may be painted with a colored paint with a three-dimensional design. It can be configured as follows. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 10aaa is extinguished, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) is passed through the transparent region of the cover body 10ac. electrical wiring) and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) are easily visible.

Further, in this embodiment, the cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the cover body 10ac may be made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored materials include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 10aaa is extinguished, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) passes through the colored transparent region. and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) are visible.

[Structure of the first movable accessory 14]
Next, the structure of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as with the second movable accessory 15, when the first movable accessory 14 is activated during the variation effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, the effect is greater than when the first movable accessory 14 is not activated. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a win will occur after the variable performance (variable display) of the symbols is completed (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). When the performance symbols are arranged in the same pattern and activated during temporary stop display, more profit is given to the player than when the first movable accessory 14 is not activated. It is also possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is high. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the actuation (movement) of the first movable accessory 14 .

The first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7, is stationary at the retracted position, and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to be displayed. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and can stand still at any advanced position in front of the screen 7a. Since a part of the image display device 7 can be covered from the top to the bottom and can emit multicolor light, the game device can emit multicolor light.

As shown in FIGS. 112A and 112B, the movable accessory 14 includes a base body 14a formed by appropriately bending a metal flat plate elongated in the left-right direction, a stepping motor 14b for left-right movement, and a left-right movement stepping motor 14b. It is composed of a moving mechanism unit 14c, a cable housing gutter unit 14d, and a decoration light emitting part 14e. A lateral movement mechanism unit 14c and a cable housing gutter unit 14d are attached to the base body 14a. .

The left-right movement mechanism unit 14c includes a left support member 14ca made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, a right side support member 14cb made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, and a left and right support member 14cb made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material. It is composed of a moving body 14cc, a driven moving body 14cd made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, a toothed belt 14ce, and a metal tension spring 14cf. The left support member 14ca supports one end (left end) of two metal guide shafts, the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, so as to be parallel to each other. The right support member 14cb supports the other ends (right ends) of two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, so as to be parallel to each other. Both ends of the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, which are two metal guide shafts, are supported in parallel by the left side support member 14ca and the right side support member 14cb. The member 14ca and the right support member 14cb are fixed to the metal base body 14a. A left-right moving body 14cc and a driven moving body 14cd are inserted through the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, which are two metal guide shafts.

The left support member 14ca further has a left/right movement stepping motor 14b attached thereto, and a cantilever shaft 14caa is attached so as to be parallel to the output shaft of the left/right movement stepping motor 14b. A driving gear 14cab is attached to the output shaft of a stepping motor 14b for left-right movement, and a transmission gear 14cad integrally formed with a toothed drive pulley 14cac is inserted through a cantilever shaft 14caa. and the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of 14b are in mesh with each other. A toothed drive pulley 14cac around which the toothed belt 14ce is wound is formed in front of the transmission gear 14cad.

When the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b rotates, this rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear 14cad that meshes with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b, thereby transmitting the rotation to the toothed driving pulley 14cac. Since the gear 14cad is integrally formed, the toothed driving pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate around the cantilever shaft 14caa. Rotation of the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac.

The driven moving body 14cd inserted through the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, which are two metal guide shafts, moves (guided) left and right along the two metal guide shafts. It can move (slide) smoothly (smoothly) in any direction, and is attached with a cantilever shaft 14cda. A toothed driven pulley 14cdb is passed through the cantilever shaft 14cda, and a toothed belt 14ce wound around a toothed drive pulley 14cac is wound thereon. A shaft 14cdc with a locking hole is also attached to the driven moving body 14cd, into which one end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted and locked. The other end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted into a locking hole provided on the front side of the right end of a base body 14a formed by appropriately bending a horizontally elongated iron flat plate.

As a result, the driven moving body 14cd inserted through the front side guide shaft 14cg and the rear side guide shaft 14cg, which are two metal guide shafts, is connected to the right end side of the base body 14a and the tension spring 14cf. In this state, the restoring force of the tension spring 14cf allows the base body 14a to be pulled laterally along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts toward the right end side of the base body 14a. By the restoring force of the tension spring 14cf, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed driving pulley 14cac and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb is pulled with an appropriate force, thereby suppressing slackness of the toothed belt 14ce. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the toothed belt 14ce, and prevent the toothed belt 14ce from coming loose and coming off the toothed driving pulley 14cac or the toothed driven pulley 14cdb. be able to.

A left-right moving body 14cc inserted through two metal guide shafts, the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, moves left and right along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts. It is designed to be able to move (slide) smoothly (smoothly) in any direction. A belt fixing member 14cca is attached to the lower side of the laterally moving body 14cc with the toothed belt 14ce sandwiched therebetween, and the toothed belt 14ce is sandwiched and fixed between the lower side of the laterally moving body 14cc and the belt fixing member 14cca. It is in a state of As a result, when the toothed belt 14ce rotates clockwise, the left-right moving body 14cc moves (smoothly) leftward along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts (slide movement). ), and when the toothed belt 14ce rotates counterclockwise, it smoothly (smoothly) moves (slides) to the right (guided) along two metal guide shafts. )be able to.

As shown in FIG. 112(C), a decoration substrate 14ccb is arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc, and a cover body 14ccc made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material is arranged so as to cover the decoration substrate 14ccb. installed. The cover body 14ccc is formed with notches 14ccca that serve as wiring openings for passing flexible flat cables 14ccbe and flexible flat cables 14ccbf, which will be described later.

A plate-like protruding piece 14ccd that protrudes rearward is formed at the center of the rear side of the left/right moving body 14cc. The projecting piece 14ccd can block the optical axis of the optical left/right moving body position detection sensor 14az. The optical left-right moving body position detection sensor 14az is formed by appropriately bending a metal flat plate elongated in the left-right direction. are arranged as follows. When the projecting piece 14ccd of the left lateral moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the left lateral moving body position detecting sensor 14az, the left lateral moving body position detecting sensor 14az emits a decorative light emitted from the front side of the lateral moving body 14cc. This is when the current position of the portion 14e is at the retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7. FIG. The center left/right moving body position detection sensor 14az emits a decorative light attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc when the projecting piece 14ccd of the left/right moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the center left/right moving body position detection sensor 14az. When the current position of the portion 14e is at the center position of the image display device 7 (the position on the straight line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the image display device 7). The right laterally moving body position detection sensor 14az emits a decorative luminescence attached to the front side of the laterally moving body 14cc when the projecting piece 14ccd of the laterally moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the right laterally moving body position detection sensor 14az. This is when the current position of the portion 14 e is at the retracted position on the right side of the image display device 7 . Signals output from the three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors 14az are input to the sub control board 90, and the production control microcomputer 91 detects the input three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors. Based on the signal from 14az, the current position of the decoration light emitting part 14e attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc can be identified.

As shown in FIG. 112(D), a plurality of lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted on the LED mounting surface, which is the upper surface side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, and electrical wiring is provided. A plurality of connectors 14ccbb to be connected are mounted. Four side-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged substantially horizontally as the first stage on the front side of the LED mounting surface, which is the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb. Four top-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged substantially horizontally at a predetermined distance as the second stage on the side.

The four side-view type lamps 14ccba in the first stage are managed as a first lamp group, and the four top-view type lamps 14ccba in the second stage are managed as a second lamp group. A decorative light-emitting portion 14e is attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc, as will be described later. Ten top-view type lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted as the third stage in the decorative light-emitting portion 14e. Ten top-view type lamps 14eca in the third stage in the decoration light-emitting portion 14e are managed as a third lamp group.

In addition, on the left side of the LED mounting surface, which is the upper surface side (surface side) of the decoration board 14ccb, the upper connector 14ccbb is arranged along the left side of the decoration board 14ccb, and the lower connector 14ccbb is arranged at the center of the lower side of the decoration board 14ccb. are placed.

Thus, a total of eight lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the upper surface side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, and two connectors 14ccbb are arranged. It is

On the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ccb, eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ccb, and decoration light-emitting portions 14e described later. An LED control IC 14ccbc capable of gradation lighting of the ten lamps 14eca is arranged. The LED control IC 14ccbc is assigned an identification ID by a plurality of resistors (not shown), receives serial data from the outside based on a clock signal, and includes an identification ID for identifying itself in the input serial data. In some cases, input serial data is captured, and based on the captured serial data, currents output from a plurality of channels are adjusted so that a total of 18 lamps can be gradation-controlled.

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the four lamps 14ccba in the first stage. The four lamps 14ccba in the first stage are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. A second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the four lamps 14ccba in the second stage. The four lamps 14ccba in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the ten lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decoration light-emitting portion 14e, which will be described later. The 10 lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decorative light emitting unit 14e, which will be described later, are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. It is

In addition to the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the ground (GND) line and the power supply line are input through the lamp control board 107 to the upper connector 14ccbb. A flexible and lightweight flexible flat cable 14ccbe is electrically connected. The connector 14ccbb on the lower side is electrically connected to a flexible and lightweight flexible flat cable 14ccbf, which is electrically connected to a decorative substrate 14ec, which will be described later, of the decorative light emitting portion 14e attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc. be.

The connector 14ccbb on the lower side is a connector for transmitting, via a flexible flat cable 14ccbf, a control signal for ten lamps 14eca of a decorative light emitting unit 14e, which is gradation-controlled by the LED control IC 14ccbc. .

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe is mounted on the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material attached to the front side of the metal base body 14a formed by bending. state. The cable accommodation gutter unit 14d has a gutter portion 14da integrally formed on the front surface of a housing having a truss structure. The gutter portion 14da is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open upper surface.

Above (directly above) corresponding to the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d, the upper connector 14ccbb of the decoration board 14ccb arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the lateral moving body 14cc is arranged. As a result, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe placed on the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d is lifted upward and electrically connected to the upper connector 14ccbb of the decoration board 14ccb so as to draw an arc. Thus, when the left/right moving body 14cc moves rightward, the arc portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe moves rightward accordingly. At this time, the circular arc does not fluctuate greatly in the vertical direction. Further, when the left/right moving body 14cc moves leftward, the arc portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe moves leftward accordingly. At this time, the circular arc does not fluctuate greatly in the vertical direction. In addition, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is in a state in which the arcuately raised portion protrudes from the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d (a state in which a portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is exposed).

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe is flexible and lightweight, and is configured as one wide package composed of four electric wires, and has a white color as a whole. It has a gray color close to white along the edges. A first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe having a gray color close to white. A third electric wire is arranged spaced apart by a distance from the third electric wire, and a fourth electric wire is arranged spaced apart from the third electric wire by a predetermined distance dimension. The product number and name are printed on the flexible flat cable 14ccbe in a color different from its own color (for example, black because the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbe is white). In addition, since the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is gray close to white, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is gray close to white. The color is the same as the overall white color of 14ccbe. Also, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is gray close to white, and the first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. It can be said that it has a gray color close to white, and that the second to fourth electrical wirings have a white color.

The first electrical wiring is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and the third electrical wiring is a line for transmitting clock signals among control signals. Yes, and the fourth electrical wiring is a power supply line.

Like the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is flexible and lightweight. Along one end of the flat cable 14ccbf there is a gray color close to white. A first electric wiring is arranged along one end of a flexible flat cable 14ccbf having a gray color close to white, and a second electric wiring is spaced apart from the first electric wiring by a predetermined distance, and the second electric wiring is separated by a predetermined distance. a third electrical wire spaced apart by a predetermined distance, a fourth electrical wire spaced from the third electrical wire by a predetermined distance dimension, and a fifth electrical wire spaced from the fourth electrical wire by a predetermined distance dimension, respectively. The flexible flat cable 14ccbf has a shorter overall width than the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. It is shorter than the predetermined distance dimension, which is the distance dimension to the wiring.

The product number and name are printed on the flexible flat cable 14ccbf in a color different from its own color (for example, black because the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is entirely white). In addition, since the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is gray close to white, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is gray close to white. The color is the same as the overall white color of 14ccbf. Also, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is gray close to white, and the first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. It can be said that it has a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wirings have a white color.

The first electrical wiring is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring is a line for transmitting the first control signal (red luminance control signal), and the third electrical wiring is a line for transmitting the second control signal ( The fourth electrical wiring is a line for transmitting a third control signal (control signal for blue luminance), and the fifth electrical wiring is a power supply line.

Although the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is configured as one package, it may be configured as individual electrical wiring. In this case, the first electrical wiring has a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wirings have a white color. The first to fifth electric wires have a different color (for example, black because the first electric wire is gray close to white), the second to fifth electric wires is white, it is printed in black, for example. Since the first electric wire is gray close to white, the gray close to white, which is the color of the first electric wire, is the same color as the white of the second to fifth electric wires. Further, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring having white is a line for transmitting the first control signal (control signal of red luminance), The third electric wiring having white color is a line that transmits the second control signal (control signal of green luminance), and the fourth electric wiring having white color transmits the third control signal (control signal of blue luminance). The fifth electrical wire, which is a transmission line and has a white color, is a power supply line.

Both the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb are connectors having white color, and are the same color as the white color that is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the colors of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). the same color as white), and the same color as the white that is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). . The upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb may be ivory. Since ivory is a color close to white, it is the same color as the white color of the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). The color is the same as the white color of the entire flat cable 14ccbf (the white color of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf).

In this embodiment, a green solder resist is applied to the upper surface side (surface side) and the rear surface side of the decoration substrate 14ccb. A solder resist is an insulating protective film that protects circuit patterns from dust, moisture, heat, and the like. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decoration board 10aa is inexpensive, and the main control board 80, relay board 88, payout control board 110 shown in FIG. 4 are also coated on the front side (surface side) and the rear side of various boards such as the sub-control board 90, the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board board 107, the relay board 108, and the like. However, instead of the green solder resist on the upper surface side (surface side) and the rear surface side of the decoration substrate 14ccb, the solder resist has the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. may be applied respectively.

Note that the top-view type lamp 14ccba, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, has a light-emitting surface that is parallel to the upper surface side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ccb. The light emitted by the lamp 14ccba is directed in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, that is, directed upward to brightly illuminate the cover body 14ccc. On the other hand, the side-view type lamp 14ccba, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, has a light-emitting surface that is not parallel to the top surface of the decoration substrate 14ccb, but is located on the top surface of the decoration substrate 14ccb. ) and 90 degrees (perpendicular). Here, the light emitted from the side-view type lamp 14ccba is parallel to the upper surface side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb and directed forward. When the light is reflected downward by the lower reflecting portion formed inside the front side of the cover body 14ccc, it is incident on the upper portion of the decorative light emitting portion 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. there is

The decorative light-emitting portion 14e includes a T-shaped base body 14ea made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material having a shape in which a plate-shaped English letter T is vertically elongated, and a T-shaped base body 14ea which is vertically elongated. and a cover body 14eb formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material covering the entire front surface of the elongated portion.

A decorative substrate 14ec is attached to the front surface of the portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea that is vertically elongated. As shown in FIGS. 112A, 112C, and 112D, a top-view type lamp, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, is mounted on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec. 14eca are mounted, and a connector 14ecb to which the flexible flat cable 14ccbf described above is electrically connected is mounted. Ten lamps 14eca are arranged vertically in a row as the third stage on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec, and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. The top-view type lamp 14eca, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting color light, has a light-emitting surface parallel to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec. The emitted light is directed in a direction perpendicular to the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ec (that is, toward the player side), and brightly illuminates the cover body 14eb.

Ten lamps 14eca in the third stage are managed as a third lamp group. A connector 14ecb is arranged on the upper side of the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec.

A light guide portion 14eaa having a sawtooth shape in the vertical direction is formed on the front surface of the upper portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea that is elongated in the horizontal direction. The light emitted from the side-view type lamp 14ccba of the decorative substrate 14ccb attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left/right moving body 14cc is reflected downward by the lower reflecting portion formed inside the front side of the cover body 14ccc, as described above. When the light is reflected toward the left and right moving body 14cc, it is incident on the upper portion of the decorative light emitting portion 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. The incident light brightly illuminates the entire light guide portion 14eaa and emits light forward, that is, toward the player side. Hereinafter, the light emitting mode for illuminating the cover body 14ccc, the light emitting mode for illuminating the cover body 14eb, and the light emitting mode for illuminating the light guide portion 14eaa may be simply referred to as "the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14".

A connector 14ccbb on the lower side of the decoration board 14ccb attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left/right moving body 14cc, and a T-shaped base body 14ea in the decoration light emitting part 14e are attached to the front surface of the vertically elongated portion. Since the flexible flat cable 14ccbf electrically connects the connector 14ecb of the decoration board 14ec and the connector 14ecb of the decoration board 14ec is arranged in front of the light guide portion 14eaa, it straddles the light guide portion 14eaa, and the light guide portion 14eaa is connected to the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. Due to forward light emission, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is brightly illuminated from behind by the light guide portion 14eaa.

Here, the method of assembling the first movable accessory 14 will be briefly described. pass through. Subsequently, the stepping motor 14b for lateral movement is attached to the left supporting member 14ca, and the drive gear 14cab is attached to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for lateral movement so as to mesh with the transmission gear 14cad. Subsequently, the left support member 14ca is attached to the base body 14a. Subsequently, the cantilever shaft 14cda is attached to the driven moving body 14cd, and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb is inserted through the cantilever shaft 14cda. Subsequently, the shaft 14cdc with locking holes is attached to the driven moving body 14cd.

Subsequently, one end of the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, which are two metal guide shafts, are pushed into the left side support member 14ca attached to the base body 14a, and the two metal guide shafts are fitted. After first inserting the left-right moving body 14cc through the guide shaft, the driven moving body 14cd is inserted, and then to the other ends of two metal guide shafts, the front side guide shaft 14cg and the back side guide shaft 14cg, to the right side. The right support member 14cb is attached to the base member 14a by pushing in the support member 14cb.

Subsequently, the toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac of the left support member 14ca, and then the toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed driven pulley 14cdb of the right support member 14cb. Subsequently, one end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted into and locked to the shaft 14cdc with locking hole of the right support member 14cb, and the other end of the tension spring 14cf is provided on the front side of the base body 14a on the right end side. It is inserted into the locking hole and locked. Thereby, appropriate tension can be applied to the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed driving pulley 14cac and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb.

Subsequently, the belt fixing member 14cca is attached to the left/right moving body 14cc with the toothed belt 14ce sandwiched between the lower side of the left/right moving body 14cc, and the toothed belt 14ce is connected to the lower side of the left/right moving body 14cc and the belt fixing member 14cca. It is in a state of being sandwiched and fixed.

Subsequently, the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d is attached to the front side of the bent metal base body 14a. Subsequently, on the rear side of the base body 14a, three left, center, and right optical left-right moving body position detection sensors 14az are attached.

Subsequently, the decoration board 14ccb is attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left/right moving body 14cc, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is placed on the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d, and one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is lifted upward to form an arc. is electrically connected to the connector 14ccbb on the upper side of the decoration board 14ccb so as to draw .

Subsequently, the decoration substrate 14ec is attached to the front surface of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base member 14ea of the decoration light-emitting portion 14e so as to cover the decoration substrate 14ec, that is, the top and bottom of the T-shaped base member 14ea. The cover body 14eb is attached to the front side of the portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea that is elongated vertically so as to cover the entire front surface of the portion that is elongated vertically. Subsequently, the upper back surface of the T-shaped base body 14ea is pulled so that the upper surface of the T-shaped base body 14ea is flush with the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc to which the decorative substrate 14ccb is attached (so that they are on the same plane). It is attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc.

Subsequently, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the connector 14ccbb on the lower side of the decoration board 14ccb, and the other end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the connector 14ecb of the decoration board 14ec. Subsequently, the cover body 14ccc is attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left/right moving body 14cc so as to cover the decorative substrate 14ccb.

When the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b rotates clockwise when the first movable accessory 14 assembled in this way is viewed from the front, this clockwise rotation causes the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b to rotate. Since the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are integrally formed, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are cantilevered. It rotates counterclockwise around the shaft 14caa. As the toothed driving pulley 14cac rotates counterclockwise, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed driving pulley 14cac also rotates counterclockwise. As a result, since the toothed belt 14ce is fixed to the lower side of the lateral moving body 14cc by the belt fixing member 14cca, the toothed belt 14ce rotates in the counterclockwise direction, thereby moving the two metal guide shafts. The left-right moving body 14cc inserted through the guide shaft 14cg on the front side and the guide shaft 14cg on the back side moves smoothly (smoothly) horizontally to the right (guided) along the two metal guide shafts. Then, the decoration light-emitting portion 14e attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc moves (sliding) to the right side.

When the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, this counterclockwise rotation is transmitted to mesh with the driving gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b. By transmitting to the gear 14cad, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are integrally formed, so that the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate clockwise around the cantilever shaft 14caa. It will be done. As the toothed driving pulley 14cac rotates clockwise, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed driving pulley 14cac also rotates clockwise. As a result, since the toothed belt 14ce is fixed to the lower side of the left-right moving body 14cc by the belt fixing member 14cca, the toothed belt 14ce rotates in the clockwise direction, thereby moving the two metal guide shafts. The left-right moving body 14cc, which is inserted through the guide shaft 14cg on the front side and the guide shaft 14cg on the back side, smoothly (smoothly) moves leftward along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts. A moving (sliding) operation is performed, and the ornamental light-emitting portion 14e attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc moves (sliding) to the left.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 112(A), (C), and (D), from the front, the cable housing gutter unit 14d made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the left-right moving body made of a transparent synthetic resin material, Through the 14cc cover body 14ccc, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (which has white as a whole, but has gray close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) can be easily visually recognized when the lamp 14ccba is turned off. , the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb can be easily visually recognized, the decoration board 14ccb of the horizontal moving body 14cc can be easily visually recognized, and the decoration board 14ccb can emit multicolor light. A total of 8 lamps 14ccba, which are full color LEDs, are easily visible. In addition, in the state where the lamp 14eca is extinguished, the flexible flat cable is passed through the cover body 14ccc of the lateral moving body 14cc made of a transparent synthetic resin material and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e made of a transparent synthetic resin material. 14ccbf (although having an overall white color, gray near white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf) is readily visible. Further, in a state where the lamp 14eca is turned off, the decorative substrate 14ec of the decorative light-emitting portion 14e can be easily visually recognized through the cover body 14eb of the decorative light-emitting portion 14e made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A total of 10 lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, can be easily seen.

In addition, as described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is in a state in which the arcuately raised portion protrudes from the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d (a state in which a portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is exposed). Therefore, it can be visually recognized. Further, as described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf straddles the light guide portion 14eaa formed on the front surface of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea in the decorative light emitting portion 14e. Therefore, it can be visually recognized.

The movable accessory 14 is placed on a predetermined member provided on the rear side of the game board 2 above the image display device 7 so as not to interfere with various units of the second movable accessory 15. . Subsequently, by inserting a screw (not shown) into the mounting hole of the base body 14a and screwing it into a screw hole formed in a predetermined member provided on the rear side of the game board 2, the movable accessory 14 is attached to the game board. 2 is fixed behind. After the movable accessory 14 is fixed to a predetermined member provided on the rear side of the game board 2, the image display device 7 is attached to the predetermined member.

In the present embodiment, the cover body 14ccc of the left/right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decoration light-emitting portion 14e are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a part of the front surface and part of the side surface of the cover body 14ccc of the lateral moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e may be provided with a plated layer having metallic luster. , it may be configured to have a three-dimensional design and be painted with colored paint. Even with this configuration, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbe are transmitted through the transparent regions of the cover 14ccc of the laterally moving body 14cc and the cover 14eb of the decorative light emitting portion 14e in the state where the lamp 14ccba and the lamp 14eca are extinguished. 14ccbf is readily visible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 14ccc of the left/right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting portion 14e are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the cover body 14ccc of the left/right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting portion 14e may be formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored materials include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are visible through the colored transparent region when the lamp 14ccba and the lamp 14eca are turned off.

[Structure of fixed winning device 19]
Next, the structure of the fixed winning device 19 will be described with reference to FIG. A fixed prize winning device 19 is arranged below the image display device 7, and a first start port 20 is provided so that the ease with which a game ball can enter is always the same. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the lottery (jackpot lottery) of the first special symbol, and is a gaming device that triggers the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination. there is In addition, since the fixed winning device 19 is capable of emitting multicolor light, it is a game device capable of emitting multicolor light.

As shown in FIGS. 113(A) to 113(D), the fixed winning device 19 includes a plate-shaped base body 19a made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material attached to the front surface (surface) of the game board 2, and a base body 19a. A bulging portion 19b, which is attached to the front surface (surface) of the body 19a and which bulges forward and is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic member in which the first starting port 20 is arranged, and the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a. ) and a first starting port 20 attached to the rear surface (rear surface) of the base body 19a and placed above the bulging portion 19b and falling into the bulging portion 19b. and a ball gutter portion 19d made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material that guides the played game ball backward.

A rectangular through hole (not shown) is formed in the upper part of the rear side (rear surface) of the base body 19a at a position corresponding to the first starting port 20 arranged in the upper part of the bulging part 19b. A pair of guide pieces 19aa made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material are provided in the left-right direction. A first starting hole sensor 20a for detecting a game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is mounted on the inner side of the upper part of the rear side (rear surface) of the base body 19a and a pair of guide pieces 19aa of the base body 19a. Guide grooves (not shown) are formed to guide the insertion from the rear toward the bulging portion 19b.

When the first starting opening sensor 20a is pushed along this guide groove to the guide groove on the inner surface of the bulging portion 19b, a hook-shaped hook piece 19ab formed on the upper rear surface (rear surface) of the base body 19a is pushed. The first starting sensor 20a can be fixed by being automatically engaged with the rear surface of the first starting sensor 20a. As a result, the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 passes through the first starting hole sensor 20a, so that the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 can be detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. can. The first starting opening sensor 20a is made of a colored and opaque member.

In addition, at a position corresponding to the ball gutter portion 19d attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a, the ball enters the first starting port 20 arranged on the upper part of the bulging portion 19b, and the inside of the bulging portion 19b. An opening 19ac having a rectangular shape is formed for communicating the space of the ball gutter portion 19d with the inner space of the ball gutter portion 19d.

The bulging portion 19b has a box-like shape with its upper and rear faces opened. A sloped portion 19ba is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen as a result to the rear. Although the bulging portion 19b is closed by attaching the front surface (surface) of the base body 19a to the rear surface of the bulging portion 19b, the internal space of the bulging portion 19b communicates with the opening 19ac.

Wiring processing pieces 19da for processing electrical wiring to the decorative substrate 19c are formed on both outer walls of the ball gutter portion 19d. The left wiring treatment piece 19da and the right wiring treatment piece 19da are also made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material.

As shown in FIG. 113(F), a plurality of top-view type lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c. Two lamps 19ca are arranged substantially horizontally on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, as the first stage, which is the lowest stage. As the second stage arranged above the stage, four lamps 19ca are arranged substantially horizontally at a second predetermined distance dimension (the second predetermined distance dimension is a shorter distance dimension than the first predetermined distance dimension). ) above the second tier, and four lamps 19ca as the third tier, which is the highest tier, are arranged substantially horizontally at a third predetermined distance dimension (the third predetermined distance dimension is substantially the second tier). The distance dimension is shorter than the predetermined distance dimension.). The top-view type lamp 19ca, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting color light, has a light-emitting surface that is parallel to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c. The emitted light is directed in a direction perpendicular to the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 19c (that is, toward the player side), and brightly illuminates the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b. Hereinafter, the light emitting mode for illuminating the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b may be simply referred to as "light emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19".

Two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are managed as a first lamp group, four lamps 19ca in the second stage are managed as a second lamp group, and a third lamp, which is the top stage, is managed as a first lamp group. The four lamps 19ca in the tier are managed as a third lamp group.

In this way, a total of ten lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c.

As shown in FIGS. 113(C) and 113(D), a plurality of connectors 19cb to which electrical wiring is connected are provided on the LED non-mounting surface, which is the rear surface side opposite to the front surface side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c. An LED control IC 19cc capable of gradation lighting of a total of 10 lamps 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is mounted on the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 19c, is arranged.

The left connector 19cb is arranged on the lower left side and the right connector 19cb is arranged on the lower right side on the LED non-mounting surface, which is the rear surface side opposite to the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 19c. .

The LED control IC 19cc is assigned an identification ID by a plurality of resistors (not shown), receives serial data from the outside based on a clock signal, and includes an identification ID for identifying itself in the input serial data. In some cases, input serial data is captured, and based on the captured serial data, currents output from a plurality of channels are adjusted, thereby enabling gradation control of a total of ten lamps 19ca. .

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to the two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage. The two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. . A second channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to the four lamps 19ca in the second stage. The four lamps 19ca in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to the four lamps 19ca in the third stage, which is the uppermost stage. The four lamps 19ca in the third stage are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed.

In addition to the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the ground (GND) line and the power supply line are input through the lamp control board 107 to the connector 19cb on the right side. are electrically connected to the right electrical wiring 19cd. The left connector 19cb has a left electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to a decoration board (not shown) for gradation lighting of the normal variable winning device 22 arranged below the fixed winning device 19 (first starting port 20). are electrically connected.

Like the fixed prize winning device 19, the normal variable prize winning device 22 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. The normal variable winning device 22 has a second starting port 21 . The normal variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 serves as a trigger for the lottery (jackpot lottery) of the second special pattern, and the gaming device serves as a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and judging the jackpot. there is Further, the normal variable prize winning device 22 is capable of emitting multicolor light similarly to the fixed prize winning device 19, so that it is a game device capable of emitting multicolor light.

The left connector 19cb receives control signals (serial data, clock signals), a ground (GND) line, and a power supply line from the right connector 19cb through the left electrical wiring 19cd. It is a connector for transmitting the ordinary variable winning device 22 to a decoration board (not shown) for gradation lighting.

The right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd are composed of four electric wirings, the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electric wiring having white. The first to fourth electric wires have a part number and a name different from their own color (for example, black because the first electric wire is gray close to white), and the second to fourth electric wires is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Since the first electric wire is gray close to white, the gray close to white, which is the color of the first electric wire, is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electric wires.

A first electric wire having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, a second electric wire having a white color is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and a third electric wire having a white color is , a line for transmitting a clock signal among control signals, and a fourth electric wiring having a white color is a power supply line.

The right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb are both white connectors, and have the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wires. The right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb may be ivory. Since ivory is a color close to white, it is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings.

An electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to a connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. The electric wiring 20ab is composed of two electric wirings, the first electric wiring being a pink electric wiring, and the second electric wiring being a yellow electric wiring. For the first and second electric wires, the part numbers and names of the respective electric wires are colored differently from their own colors (for example, white because the first electric wire is pink, and yellow because the second electric wire is yellow). For example, it is printed in white). Pink is a color close to red and is of the same family as red.

The signal output from the first start sensor 20a is input to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88, and the game control microcomputer 81 is based on the signal from the input first start sensor 20a. , controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to the program.

The right wiring processing piece 19da includes an electric wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting opening sensor 20a, a right electric wiring 19cd electrically connected to the right connector 19cb, are engaged, whereas the left electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the left connector 19cb is engaged with the left wiring processing piece 19da.

In this embodiment, a green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 19c. A solder resist is an insulating protective film that protects circuit patterns from dust, moisture, heat, and the like. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decoration board 19c is inexpensive, and the main control board 80, relay board 88, payout control board 110 shown in FIG. 4 are also coated on the front side (surface side) and the rear side of various boards such as the sub-control board 90, the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board board 107, the relay board 108, and the like. However, instead of the green solder resist on the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 19c, the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wirings of the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd is applied. may be applied respectively. A through hole 19ce is formed in the decorative substrate 19c at a position corresponding to a mounting boss (not shown) formed on the rear surface side of the base body 19a.

Here, the method of assembling the fixed winning device 19 will be briefly described. A bulging portion 19b is attached to the front side of 19a. Subsequently, the first starting opening sensor 20a is inserted from the rear of the base body 19a toward the bulging portion 19b and pushed along a guide groove (not shown) to the guide groove on the inner side surface of the bulging portion 19b. A hook-shaped hook piece 19ab formed on the upper portion of the rear surface (rear surface) of the body 19a is automatically engaged with the rear surface of the first starting opening sensor 20a. Subsequently, a screw (not shown) is screwed into a mounting boss hole (not shown) provided in both front walls of the ball gutter portion 19d to attach the ball gutter portion 19d to the rear surface side of the base member 19a. to install.

Subsequently, the right electrical wiring 19cd is electrically connected to the right connector 19cb of the decorative substrate 19c, and the left electrical wiring 19cd is electrically connected to the left connector 19cb of the decorative substrate 19c. Subsequently, the LED mounting surface, which is the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 19c, is arranged so as to face the rear surface (rear surface) of the base body 19a, and the through holes 19ce of the decorative substrate 19c are placed on the rear surface side of the base body 19a. The ornamental substrate 19c is fixed to the base body 19a by inserting it into the formed mounting bosses (not shown) and screwing screws (not shown) from the rear surface of the ornamental substrate 19c.

Subsequently, the electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a, and the electrical wiring 20ab is bent and locked by the right wiring processing piece 19da. Subsequently, the right electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the right connector 19cb of the decoration board 19c is locked by the right wiring processing piece 19da, and electrically connected to the left connector 19cb of the decoration board 19c. The left electric wiring 19cd is locked by the left wiring processing piece 19da.

As shown in FIGS. 113(A), (B), and (E), the fixed prize winning device 19 assembled in this manner includes, from the front, a bulging portion 19b formed of a transparent synthetic resin material and a base body 19a. through the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having white), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color). wiring, the second electric wiring having a yellow color), the electric wiring 19cd on the left side (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color) can be easily seen, and the decoration The substrate 19c can be easily visually recognized, and a total of 10 lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, can be easily visually recognized.

The fixed winning device 19 is inserted into a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 from the front side (surface side) of the game board 2 toward the rear of the game board 2, and is attached to the left and right ends of the base body 19a. The fixed winning device 19 is fixed to the game board 2 by screwing screws (not shown) from the two mounting pieces 19ad thus formed.

In this embodiment, the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a part of the front surface and a part of the side surface of the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b may be configured to have a plated layer with metallic luster, or may have a three-dimensional design. It may be configured as if it were painted with colored paint. Alternatively, a sticker printed with a colored paint may be affixed to a portion of the front surface of the bulging portion 19b. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 19ca is extinguished, the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the first electrical wiring having a white color, and second to fourth electrical wires), electrical wire 20ab (first electrical wire having pink color, second electrical wire having yellow color), left electrical wire 19cd (first electrical wire having gray color close to white, white color second to fourth electrical wirings) can be easily visually recognized.

Further, in this embodiment, the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b may be made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored materials include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 19ca is extinguished, the right electric wiring 19cd (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color) passes through the colored transparent region. , electric wiring 20ab (first electric wiring having pink color, second electric wiring having yellow color), left electric wiring 19cd (first electric wiring having gray color close to white, second to fourth electric wiring having white color, ) is visible.

[Wiring Visibility Suppression Effect of Decorative Portion 10a Arranged in Lower Right of Center Decorative Portion 10]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 111A, 111B, and 111E, the decorative portion 10a is connected from the front through a cover body 10ac made of a transparent synthetic resin material to an upper electrical wiring 10aad (close to white). the first electric wiring having gray color, the second to fourth electric wiring having white color) and the lower electric wiring 10aad (the first electric wiring having gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having white color) can be visually recognized. Therefore, the player may feel that the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

In addition, the upper electric wiring 10aad receives the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the ground (GND) line, and the power line through the lamp control board 107. The lower electric wiring 10aad is a wiring for inputting, and the lower electric wiring 10aad is a wiring electrically connected to a decorative substrate (not shown) for gradation lighting of the stage portion 11 under the center decorative portion 10. FIG.

In the present embodiment, the decorative portion 10a is configured as a game device capable of emitting multicolor light, and the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, has, as described above, the lowermost stage. As a first stage, two lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally with a predetermined distance, and as a second stage above the first stage, three lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally. Four lamps 10aaa are spaced apart by a distance dimension and arranged above the second tier as a third tier. Two lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally at the fourth stage, which is the uppermost stage, separated by a predetermined distance.

In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface, which is the rear surface side opposite to the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 10aa, a total of 11 LEDs are arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 10aa. An LED control IC 10aac capable of gradation lighting of the lamp 10aaa is arranged. The LED control IC 10aac can control the gradation of a total of 11 lamps 10aaa by adjusting currents output from multiple channels.

The two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are controlled in gradation as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. By adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 10aac, the three lamps 10aaa in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group and the light emission mode is managed. By adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 10aac, the lamps 10aaa are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group and the light emission mode is managed. The lamps 10aaa are gradation-controlled as a fourth lamp group by adjusting the current output from the fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), selects the upper connector 10aab and the lower The first lamp group and/or the second lamp group near the connector 10aab of the lamp are set to emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group emit white light. The light emission mode is a light emission mode that emits light in a color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Thus, the upper electrical wiring 10aad is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white color, and the lower electrical wiring 10aad is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white. 1 electric wiring, and the second to fourth electric wirings having a white color. The electrical wiring 10aad can be made inconspicuous. Of course, as the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group always emit white light (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting). ), instead of appropriately including a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, a light emission mode that emits white light and white In addition to a light emission mode in which light is emitted in different colors and a light emission mode in which the light emission mode changes alternately, for example, when the light emission mode in which light is emitted in a color different from white is changed a plurality of times, a light emission mode in which white light is emitted is among them. ), the visibility of the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad is suppressed, thereby suppressing the visibility of the upper electric wiring 10aad. and the electrical wiring 10aad on the lower side can be made inconspicuous.

As described above, the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are both white connectors, and the second to fourth electrical wires in the upper electrical wire 10aad and the lower electrical wire 10aad are white. Since it has the same color as that of the decorative portion 10a, the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a is a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), or a white light emission mode (lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). including flashing and gradation lighting), the visibility of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab can be suppressed to make the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab inconspicuous. can. Even if the color of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab is ivory, as described above, ivory is a color close to white. The color is the same as the white color of the fourth electrical wiring, and the decorative portion 10a may emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), or may emit white light. By including the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), the visibility of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab is suppressed, and the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are conspicuous. can be prevented.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), as the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a, the light emission mode of all the lamp groups of the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group is a single color (single-color emission), and the visibility of the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad is suppressed by adopting a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light. Thus, the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be made inconspicuous.

The white light emitted by the lamps 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the upper electrical wiring 10aad. , and the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wires in the lower electric wire 10aad. In addition, the white light emitted by the lamps 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, is a white-based color that is close to white and which the first electrical wiring of the upper electrical wiring 10aad has. It is also a white-based color of gray close to white that the first electrical wiring in the lower electrical wiring 10aad has.

For example, the upper electrical wiring 10aad is composed of the first electrical wiring having white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having yellow, and the electrical wiring 10aad at the lower side is composed of the first electrical wiring having white and yellow. of the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group, the first lamp group near the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab and/or The second lamp group is in a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group are in a white light emission mode (lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). ) (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) may be used, or the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group may emit light. is in a yellow light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group are in a yellow light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). may be in a light emission mode in which different colors (for example, blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc. may be mentioned). Even with this configuration, it is possible to make the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad inconspicuous by suppressing the visibility of the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad. Of course, as the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first to fourth lamp groups always emit white or yellow light (lighting, blinking, floor lighting, etc.). (including dimmed lighting.), but appropriately include a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (e.g., light emission that emits white or yellow light In addition to alternately changing the light emission mode and the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white or yellow, for example, when the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white or yellow is changed only a plurality of times , and a light emission mode that changes such that a light emission mode that emits light in white or yellow is incorporated (sandwiched) therein.) By suppressing the visibility, it is possible to make the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad inconspicuous.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), as the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a, the light emission mode of all the lamp groups of the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group is a single color (single-color light emission) in either white or yellow light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), so that the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric The visibility of the wiring 10aad can be suppressed to make the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa, respectively, as described above. However, instead of the green solder resist on the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa, the same white color as the second to fourth electric wirings in the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad is applied. A colored solder resist may be applied to each. In this way, the decorative part 10a can emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) as the light emitting mode, thereby suppressing the visibility of the decorative board 10aa. can be made inconspicuous.

[Wiring Visibility Suppression Effect of First Movable Accessory 14]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 112(A), (C), and (D), the first movable accessory 14 includes, from the front, a cable housing gutter unit 14d formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, a transparent synthetic resin material Through the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc formed by Also, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (having a white color as a whole) is passed through the cover body 14ccc of the lateral moving body 14cc made of a transparent synthetic resin material and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e made of a transparent synthetic resin material. However, a nearly white gray) can be visually recognized along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. Therefore, the player may feel that the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

In addition to the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe receives a ground (GND) line and a power line through the lamp control board 107. The flexible flat cable 14ccbf includes a decoration board 14ccb arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the left/right moving body 14cc, a decoration board 14ec of the decoration light emitting part 14e attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc, It is a wiring that electrically connects between substrates.

In this embodiment, the decoration board 14ccb is arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the left/right moving body 14cc of the first movable accessory 14, and the decoration board 14ec is arranged on the decoration light emitting part 14e attached to the front side of the left/right moving body 14cc. The various lamps are configured as a game device capable of emitting multicolor light. As described above, four side-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged on the front side as the first stage on the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 14ccb arranged on the left/right moving body 14cc. They are horizontally spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and four top-view type lamps 14ccba are placed substantially horizontally by a predetermined distance as the second stage on the far side. As described above, ten lamps 14eca are arranged vertically in a row as the third stage on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ec arranged in the decoration light-emitting portion 14e, and are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. spaced apart by a dimension.

Further, on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 14ccb arranged on the left/right moving body 14cc, eight LED mounting surfaces which are arranged on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 14ccb are mounted. An LED control IC 14ccbc capable of gradation lighting of the lamps 14ccba and 10 lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec on the side of the decorative light emitting portion 14e is arranged. . The LED control IC 14ccbc can control the gradation of a total of 18 lamps by adjusting currents output from multiple channels.

The four lamps 14ccba in the first stage of the left/right moving body 14cc are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. The four lamps 14ccba in the second stage of the left/right moving body 14cc are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. The 10 lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decoration light emitting part 14e are gradation controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. there is

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 selects the upper connector 14ccbb of the first lamp group to the third lamp group as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). and the four side-view type lamps 14ccba in the first stage, which is the first lamp group, near the connector 14ccbb on the lower side and in a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), A color (e.g., blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the second lamp group and the third lamp group emit white light. can be used). As a result, since the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf are entirely white, the visibility of the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf is suppressed to make the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf inconspicuous. can be made Further, since the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is arranged in front of the light guide portion 14eaa, it straddles the light guide portion 14eaa. The light from the lamp 14ccba of the light guide part 14eaa emits white light in front of the light guide part 14eaa (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). The flat cable 14ccbf can be made inconspicuous.

Of course, as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14, the first lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group always emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Instead, a light emission mode including a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light (for example, a light emission mode that emits white light and a light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white) In addition to the light emission mode in which the light emission mode alternately changes between the ), the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are made inconspicuous by suppressing the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. can be made

In addition, the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb of the decoration board 14ccb arranged on the left/right moving body 14cc are both white connectors, which is the color of the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbe, as described above. It has the same color as white (the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe), and the same color as the white that is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). (same color as the white color of the second to fifth electric wirings), the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 is white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Alternatively, by including a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light, the visibility of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb is suppressed, and the upper connector 14ccbb and The lower connector 14ccbb can be made inconspicuous. Even if the color of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb is ivory, as described above, ivory is a color close to white. 14ccbe's 2nd to 4th electric wires are white), and the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is white (flexible flat cable 14ccbf's 2nd to 5th electric wires are white). , and the first movable accessory 14 can emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), or can emit white light ( including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) suppresses the visibility of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb to make the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb inconspicuous. be able to.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). Suppress the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf by making the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light as a single color (single-color light emission). As a result, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf can be made inconspicuous.

Eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface serving as the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ccb on the side of the left/right moving body 14cc and the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ec on the side of the decoration light emitting unit 14e. The white light emitted by the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface is the same color as the white color of the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). ) and the same color as the white that is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). In addition, eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface serving as the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb on the side of the left and right moving body 14cc, and the front side (surface side) of the decorative light emitting portion 14e on the side of the decorative light emitting portion 14e. ), the white light emitted by the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface that becomes ) is the gray color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the first electrical wiring). gray), and the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a white color of gray (close to white of the first electrical wiring). be.

For example, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is configured as one package, but may be configured as individual electrical wiring. In this case, the first electrical wiring has a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wirings have a white color. The first to fifth electric wires have a different color (for example, black because the first electric wire is gray close to white), the second to fifth electric wires is white, it is printed in black, for example. Even with this configuration, as described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is entirely white, and one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is colored in gray, which is close to white. Even if each of the flexible flat cables 14ccbf is configured as individual electric wiring instead of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 may be a white light emission mode (lighting, blinking, floor lighting, etc.) as in the case of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. ), or by including a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), the visibility of each individual electrical wiring is suppressed, and each individual electrical wiring Wiring can be made invisible.

In addition, when individual electric wirings are used instead of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, for example, the first electric wiring is white and the second to fifth electric wirings are yellow. In this case, the first lamp group has a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the second lamp group and the third lamp group have a white light emission mode (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting). (including dimmed lighting)) (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) may be used, or the first lamp group may emit light in yellow. The light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the color (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the second lamp group and the third lamp group emit yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) For example, blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc. can be cited.) may be used. Even with this configuration, it is possible to make each individual electric wiring inconspicuous by suppressing the visibility of each individual electric wiring. Of course, as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14, the first lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group always emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). ), instead of appropriately emitting white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (e.g., white or yellow light emitting mode and white light emitting mode) Alternatively, in addition to a light emission mode that alternately changes between a light emission mode that emits light in a color different from yellow, for example, if the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white or yellow is changed only a plurality of times, A light emission mode that changes to incorporate (sandwich) a light emission mode that emits light in white or yellow can be mentioned. Wiring can be made invisible.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). By making the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits light in either white or yellow as a single color (monochromatic light emission), each individual electric wiring can be visually recognized It is possible to suppress each individual electric wiring so as to make each individual electric wiring inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the front side (front side) and rear side of the decoration board 14ccb arranged on the left/right moving body 14cc, and the front side (front side) and rear side of the decoration board 14ec arranged on the decoration light emitting portion 14e. are coated with a green solder resist as described above. However, the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decoration board 14ccb arranged on the left/right moving body 14cc and the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decoration board 14ec arranged on the decoration light emitting part 14e are colored green. Instead of the solder resist of , the white that is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (white for the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and the white that is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (flexible A solder resist having the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flat cable 14ccbf may be applied. In this way, the lighting mode of the first movable accessory 14 includes the lighting mode of emitting white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), so that the decorative substrate 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc , and the decorative substrate 14ec arranged in the decorative light-emitting portion 14e, by suppressing the visibility of the decorative substrate 14ccb arranged in the left-right moving body 14cc, the decorative substrate 14ec arranged in the decorative light-emitting portion 14e, can be made inconspicuous.

[Wiring Visibility Suppression Effect of Fixed Winning Device 19]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed winning device 19 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 113(A), (B), and (E), the fixed winning device 19 is connected from the front through a bulging portion 19b made of a transparent synthetic resin material and a base body 19a. Wiring 19cd (first electric wiring having gray color close to white, second to fourth electric wiring having white color), electric wiring 20ab (first electric wiring having pink color, second electric wiring having yellow color), left side The electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be visually recognized. Therefore, the player may feel that the right electric wiring 19cd, the electric wiring 20ab, and the left electric wiring 19cd, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

In addition to the control signals (serial data, clock signal) from the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the ground (GND) line and the power supply line are transmitted through the electric wiring 19cd on the right side through the lamp control board 107. The electric wiring 20ab is the wiring that is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starter sensor 20a, and the electric wiring 19cd on the left is the fixed winning device 19 (the first starter 20) is a wiring electrically connected to a decorative substrate (not shown) for gradation lighting of the normal variable prize winning device 22 arranged below 20).

In this embodiment, the fixed prize winning device 19 is configured as a game device capable of emitting multicolor light, and as described above, the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 19c, has the lowest As the first stage, two lamps 19ca are arranged substantially horizontally with a first predetermined distance dimension, and as the second stage, four lamps 19ca are arranged substantially above the first stage. The lamps 19ca are horizontally spaced apart by a second predetermined distance, and above the second tier, four lamps 19ca as the third tier, which is the uppermost tier, are substantially horizontally spaced apart by a third predetermined distance. ing.

In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface, which is the rear surface side opposite to the front side (front side) of the decoration board 19c, a total of 10 LEDs are arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (front side) of the decoration board 19c. An LED control IC 19cc capable of gradation lighting of the lamp 19ca is arranged. The LED control IC 19cc can control the gradation of a total of ten lamps 19ca by adjusting currents output from a plurality of channels.

The two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are controlled in gradation as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. The four lamps 19ca in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. The lamps 19ca are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, among the first lamp group to the third lamp group, the connector 19cb on the right side and the connector 19cb on the left side The first lamp group and/or the second lamp group near the connector 19cb of the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) to emit white light, and the third lamp group to emit white light ( (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, and rainbow). As a result, the right electrical wiring 19cd is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white color, and the electrical wiring 19cd on the left side is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white. Since the electrical wiring is composed of the second to fourth electrical wirings having white color, the visibility of the right electrical wiring 19cd and the left electrical wiring 19cd is suppressed by suppressing the visibility of the right electrical wiring 19cd and the left electrical wiring 19cd. can be made inconspicuous. Of course, as the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group always emit white light (lighting, blinking, gradation). (including lighting), but instead include a lighting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light (e.g., a lighting mode that emits white light and a light emitting mode that emits white light). In addition to the light emission mode that emits light in different colors and the light emission mode that alternately changes, for example, when the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white is changed multiple times, the light emission that emits white light ), the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd are suppressed in visibility, thereby reducing the visibility of the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd. and the left electrical wiring 19cd can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting opening sensor 20a as the lighting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). Since the electrical wiring 20ab connected to the first lamp is bent and locked by the right wiring treatment piece 19da, the first lamp near the right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb among the first lamp group to the third lamp group The group and/or the second lamp group are in a red light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group is in a red light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). ) (for example, blue, green, white, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.), or the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group are made yellow. A light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits light, and a color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.). The pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab is the same color (red-based color) as the red emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c. As a result, the electric wiring 20ab is composed of the first electric wiring having a pink color and the second electric wiring having a yellow color, so that it is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting opening sensor 20a. It is possible to make the electric wiring 20ab inconspicuous by suppressing the visibility of the electric wiring 20ab. Of course, as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group always emit red or yellow light (lighting, blinking, Including gradation lighting.), instead of appropriately emitting red or yellow light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, gradation lighting) (e.g., emitting red or yellow light In addition to alternately changing the light emission mode and the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from red or yellow, for example, when the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from red or yellow is changed only a plurality of times (2) a light emission mode that changes such that a light emission mode that emits light in red or yellow is incorporated (sandwiched) can be mentioned.) By suppressing the visibility of the electrically connected electrical wiring 20ab, the electrical wiring 20ab can be made inconspicuous. Instead of red, the color emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c may be the pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, light emission of all the lamp groups of the first lamp group to the third lamp group The visibility of the right electrical wiring 19cd and the left electrical wiring 19cd is suppressed by adopting a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light as a single color (single-color light emission). Thus, the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, the light emission of all the lamp groups of the first lamp group to the third lamp group By adopting a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits light in red as a single color (single-color light emission), it is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting door sensor 20a. It is possible to suppress the visibility of the electric wiring 20ab which is connected to the electric wiring 20ab so as to make the electric wiring 20ab inconspicuous. The pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab is the same color (red-based color) as the red emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c. Of course, the single color (single-color light emission) emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c may be the pink color of the first electric wire of the electric wire 20ab instead of red.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal), as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, the light emission of all the lamp groups of the first lamp group to the third lamp group By setting the mode to a yellow light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) as a single color (monochromatic light emission), it is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting door sensor 20a. It is possible to suppress the visibility of the electric wiring 20ab which is connected to the electric wiring 20ab so as to make the electric wiring 20ab inconspicuous.

The white color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the right electrical wiring 19cd. However, it is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wires in the electric wire 19cd on the left side. In addition, the white color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, is a white-based color of gray close to white that the first electric wiring of the electric wiring 19cd on the right side has. It is also a white-based color of gray close to white that the first electric wiring in the electric wiring 19cd on the left side has.

Further, the red color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, is the pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab, which is a red-based color. The yellow color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the substrate 19c, is the same color as the yellow color of the second electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab.

The light emission modes of all the lamps 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, that is, the light emission modes of the first lamp group to the third lamp group, are set to a single color (single color). By controlling the light emission to white, red, and yellow, the fixed winning device 19 can be set to emit white, red, or yellow light. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation by means of the lighting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, and to inform the player of the degree of expectation for winning by the lighting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 as a look-ahead effect. can suggest. The variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B in the production button operation effects A to C in FIGS. Expectations for winning are high. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B.

Therefore, when suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation to the player by the lighting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, or when suggesting the degree of expectation for winning to the player by the lighting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 as a look-ahead effect, As the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, similar to the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for winning increases in the order of white light emission mode→red light emission mode→yellow light emission mode. . Lighting modes include lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting, and even if the same color is used in the order of lighting→blinking→gradation lighting, the expectation of winning may be high. Specifically, when the degree of expectation for winning is suggested to the player by the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 is changed from white lighting mode→white flashing mode→white gradation lighting mode. → red lighting mode → red blinking mode → red gradation lighting mode → yellow lighting mode → yellow blinking mode → yellow gradation lighting mode, thus suggesting that the degree of expectation for winning increases in this order.

In this way, the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 can indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the variation and the degree of expectation of winning as a look-ahead effect. can raise interest. As interest in the fixed prize winning device 19 increases, even if the fixed prize winning device 19 is watched closely by the player, the bulging portion 19b and the base body 19a, which are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material and constitute the fixed prize winning device 19, will be removed. through, the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having gray close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having white), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having pink, the second electrical wiring having yellow Wiring), the left electric wiring 19cd (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having white), etc. are visible, but as described above, the fixed winning Since the visibility of various electric wirings can be suppressed by the light emission mode of the device 19 itself, the various electric wirings can be made inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 19c, respectively, as described above. However, instead of the green solder resist on the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 19c, the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wirings of the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd is applied. may be applied respectively. In this way, the fixed prize winning device 19 includes a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) as the light emission mode, thereby suppressing the visibility of the decoration board 19c. can be made inconspicuous.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative portion 10a (device capable of emitting light) arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 in FIG. Upper electrical wiring 10aad and lower electrical wiring 10aad electrically connected to the fixed winning device 19 (device capable of emitting light) of 113, the decorative portion 10a (device) of FIG. 111, and the first movable role of FIG. Flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) electrically connected to object 14 (device), flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), right side electricity electrically connected to fixed winning device 19 (device) in FIG. A game board 2 is provided with wiring 19cd, left electric wiring 19cd, electric wiring 20ab, and a production control microcomputer 91 (production executing means) of a sub-control board 90 capable of executing a plurality of types of production. The control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) is a decoration part 10a (device) arranged in the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 capable of emitting light in the same color as the color of the electric wiring or a color containing the same color. The first movable accessory 14 (device) capable of emitting light and the fixed winning device 19 (device) capable of emitting light emit light in multiple colors (the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10). , wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14, and wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed winning device 19).

Specifically, in the decorative portion 10a (device capable of emitting light) arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 in FIG. It is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wires in the lower electric wire 10aad. In addition, it is a white-based color such as gray that is close to white that the first electric wiring in the upper electric wiring 10aad has, and it is a white-based color that is close to white that the first electric wiring in the lower electric wiring 10aad has. be. Therefore, in the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10, the lamp 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa emits white light. can emit light in the same color as the colors of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad or in a color containing the same system of colors.

Also, in the first movable accessory 14 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. It is the same color as the white color of the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). In addition, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a white color such as gray close to white (gray close to white of the first electrical wiring), and the color along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf It is also a white-based color in which the color attached to is gray close to white (gray close to white that the first electrical wiring has). For this reason, in the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14, the eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decoration substrate 14ccb on the side of the left and right moving body 14cc and the decoration The white color emitted by the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec on the side of the light emitting portion 14e, is the same as the color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. The light can be emitted in a color of the same color or a color containing colors of the same system.

In addition, in the fixed prize winning device 19 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. 113, the color is the same as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wires of the right electrical wire 19cd, and the second white color of the left electrical wire 19cd It is also the same color as the white color of the fourth electrical wiring. In addition, it is a white-based color such as gray close to white that the first electric wiring of the right electric wiring 19cd has, and it is also a white-based color of gray close to white that the first electric wiring of the left electric wiring 19cd has. . For this reason, in the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed prize winning device 19, the white light emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 19c is the electric wiring 19cd on the right side and the white color on the left side. It can emit light in the same color as the color of the electric wiring 19cd or in a color containing the same system of colors.

According to this configuration, the device can emit light in multiple colors in the same color as the color of the electric wiring electrically connected to the device, or in a color including the same series of colors, thereby suppressing the visibility of the electric wiring. By doing so, the electrical wiring can be made inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the electrical wiring, which is completely unrelated to the performance, is an eyesore. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 (effect executing means) has the same color or the same color as that of the electrical wiring, and is arranged in the lower right part of the center decorative portion 10 in FIG. It is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative portion 10a (device) and the fixed prize winning device 19 (device) of FIG. 113 emit light in a single color. According to this configuration, the decoration part 10a (device) arranged in the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 in FIG. Since the fixed prize winning device 19 (device) in FIG. 113 emits monochromatic light, the visibility of the electrical wiring can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring less conspicuous.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative portion 10a (device) arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 in FIG. 111 and the fixed winning device 19 (device) in FIG. (a cover body 10ac formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material of the decorative portion 10a in FIG. 111, a plate-like base body 19a formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material of the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. and bulging portion 19b), the transparent portion is arranged on the front side of the game board 2, the upper electrical wiring 10aad electrically connected to the decorative portion 10a (device) of FIG. 111, part of the lower electrical wiring 10aad are visible through the transparent portion, and a portion of the right electrical wiring 19cd, the left electrical wiring 19cd, and the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the fixed winning device 19 (device) of FIG. It is made visible. According to this configuration, although a part of the electric wiring that is completely unrelated to the performance is visible to the player through the transparent portion, the color of the electric wiring is the same as the color of the electric wiring, or the color of the same system. By emitting light, the visibility of the electric wiring can be suppressed and the electric wiring can be made inconspicuous.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 (device) shown in FIG. It has a moving body 14cc (movable body) and a decoration light-emitting portion 14e (movable body), and the left-right moving body 14cc (movable body) and the decoration light-emitting portion 14e (movable body) are arranged on the front side of the game board 2, as shown in FIG. A part of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) electrically connected to the first movable accessory 14 (device) is arranged on the front side of the game board 2 and is visible. It is said that According to this configuration, a part of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), which are completely unrelated to the performance, are arranged on the front side of the game board 2 so that they can be visually recognized by the player. However, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) emit light in the same color or the same system color, so that the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) wiring) and the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) can be suppressed to make the electric wiring inconspicuous.

[Modification]
A modification of the wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine is shown below.
[Modification 1]
111 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 shown in FIG. 112, the fixed winning device 19 shown in FIG. device), a plurality of various lamps, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, were provided. Since the full-color LED can emit multicolor light, it can of course emit white light. However, as a lamp that emits white light, a single-color LED that emits white light may be used instead of a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, or a single-color LED that emits white light may be used in addition to the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light. A plurality of them may be mixed and arranged on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the various electrical wirings in the decorative portion 10a arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable accessory 14 in FIG. 112, and the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. It was not held together by a binding band. However, a binding band may be used to bundle various electrical wirings. In this case, when the binding band is arranged to be visible through the transparent area of the gaming device (device of the present invention) such as the decorative portion 10a, the first movable accessory 14, and the fixed prize winning device 19, like various electrical wiring, , The color of the binding band shall be the same as the color of the various electrical wiring (one of white, gray close to white, pink, and yellow). In this way, even if the game device (the device of the present invention) emits light, it is possible to make the binding band inconspicuous together with the various electric wires by suppressing the visibility of the binding band together with the various electric wires.

[Modification 3]
An electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting opening sensor 20a in the fixed winning device 19 of FIG. 113 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment. The electric wiring 20ab was composed of two electric wirings, the first electric wiring being an electric wiring having a pink color, and the second electric wiring being an electric wiring having a yellow color. However, the first electrical wiring may be an electrical wiring having a yellow color, and the second electrical wiring may be an electrical wiring having a pink color. Also, the pink color may be a pink fluorescent color, and the yellow color may be a yellow fluorescent color.

[Modification 4]
111 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 shown in FIG. 112, the fixed winning device 19 shown in FIG. In the wiring visibility suppression effect in the game device (device of the present invention), a plurality of lamps in the game device (device of the present invention) emit light in any one of white, red, and yellow, so that the wiring visibility of the game device (device of the present invention) is reduced. Therefore, the wiring in the game machine (the device of the present invention) is made inconspicuous. However, the light emission mode of the gaming machine (the device of the present invention) may shift to a multicolor light emission mode so that the light emission mode includes any one of white, red, and yellow light. For example, a plurality of lamps in a game device (the device of the present invention) can emit white light, then change to a rainbow color light emission mode, and then return to a white light emission mode. Then, the plurality of lamps in the game device (the device of the present invention) emits white light, then blue→green→red→purple→yellow, and then returns to the white light emission mode again. Aspects can be mentioned.

[Modification 5]
Visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) in the first movable accessory 14 (device of the present invention) in FIG. 112 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be suppressed. The configuration may be applied to the second movable accessory 15 as well. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is configured to be vertically movable by an arm member. Normally, the image display device 7 is stationary at a retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to reach the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. It can stand still, and covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. The arm member is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. A rectangular member (decorative portion) marked with "OARO" is provided with a decorative substrate in which a plurality of lamps, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged. The above-described LED control IC capable of gradationally lighting a plurality of lamps is arranged on the decoration board, and the connector is also arranged on the decoration board. In addition to the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the connector also carries a ground (GND) line and a power line along the lamp control board 107 and the arm member. The twisted electrical wiring is electrically connected.

The electric wires are composed of four wires, the first electric wire having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electric wires having a white color. The first to fourth electric wires have a part number and a name different from their own color (for example, black because the first electric wire is gray close to white), and the second to fourth electric wires is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Since the first electric wire is gray close to white, the gray close to white, which is the color of the first electric wire, is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electric wires.

A first electric wire having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, a second electric wire having a white color is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and a third electric wire having a white color is , a line for transmitting a clock signal among control signals, and a fourth electric wiring having a white color is a power supply line.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses the control signal (serial data, clock signal) to change the light emission mode of the rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled "OARO", for example, the rectangular member ( (decorative part) and in the peripheral area connected to the arm member, the lamp has a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and is described as "OARO". A light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the lamps placed at the corresponding positions emit light in white color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) can be used). As a result, since the electric wiring is composed of the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electric wiring having white, the electric wiring routed along the arm member can be easily seen. By suppressing , the electrical wiring routed along the arm member can be made inconspicuous. Of course, the lamps arranged around the rectangular member (decorative portion) and in the peripheral area connected to the arm member always emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Instead, as appropriate, a light emission mode that includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, a light emission mode that emits white light and a light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white In addition to the alternately changing light emission mode, for example, when the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white is changed only a plurality of times, the light emission mode that emits white light is incorporated (sandwiched). The light emission mode can be changed.), the visibility of the electric wiring routed along the arm member is suppressed, thereby reducing the visibility of the electric wiring routed along the arm member. Wiring can be made invisible.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses the control signal (serial data, clock signal) to change the rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" as the light emission mode of the rectangular member ( By making the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light as a single color (single-color light emission), The visibility of the electric wiring routed along the arm member can be suppressed to make the electric wiring routed along the arm member inconspicuous. The white color emitted by the lamps arranged on the decorative substrate is the same as the white color of the second to fourth electric wires in the electric wires routed along the arm member. In addition, the white light emitted by the lamp arranged on the decorative substrate is also a white-based color of gray, which is close to white, of the first electrical wiring in the electrical wiring routed along the arm member.

A part of the front surface or a part of the side surface of the arm member may be configured to have a plated layer with metallic luster, or may be painted with a colored paint with a three-dimensional design. may be configured. Also, the electric wiring may be housed inside the arm member and routed. Even with this configuration, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color can be easily connected through the transparent region of the arm member in the state where the lamp is extinguished. visible. Moreover, the arm member was formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the arm member may be made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored materials include red, blue, and green. When the electric wiring is accommodated and routed inside the arm member, it is easy to arrange the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color when the lamp is turned off. is visible to

[Modification 6]
The decorative portion 10a (the device of the present invention) arranged in the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10 in FIG. 111 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment emits multicolor light. By controlling the luminous mode of the decoration part 10a as a single color (single-color luminescence) such as white, red, and yellow, the luminescence mode of the decoration part 10a is changed to white, red, and yellow. A light emission mode may be used. The variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B in the production button operation effects A to C in FIGS. Expectations for winning are high. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B. As a result, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the variation by the lighting mode of the decorative portion 10a. Even in this way, the lighting mode of the decoration part 10a changes from white to red or yellow depending on the degree of expectation of winning. The visibility of the electrical wiring in the portion 10a can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring inconspicuous.

[Modification 7]
The configuration that can suppress the visibility of various wirings in the fixed prize winning device 19 (device of the present invention) in FIG. ) 28, the first big winning device (first attacker) 31, and the second big winning device (second attacker) 36, respectively. By doing this, various electric wirings in the normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, the gate (through chucker) 28, the first big winning device (first attacker) 31, and the second big winning device (second attacker) 36 can be visually recognized. It is possible to make various electrical wiring inconspicuous by suppressing the resistance.

[Modification 8]
Wiring visibility suppression effect of the decoration part 10a arranged in the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 of FIG. 111, wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14 of FIG. The sex suppression effect may not include some of the described effects, or may be added with other effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine comprising a game board on which a device capable of emitting light, electrical wiring electrically connected to the device, and effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects are arranged,
The production executing means is
It is possible to perform an effect that causes the device to emit multicolor light in the same color as the color of the electric wiring or a color containing the same series of colors.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute an effect that causes the device to emit monochromatic light in the same color or the same series of colors as the color of the electric wiring.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2,
The device has a transparent part in which a transparent area is formed, the transparent part is arranged on the front side of the game board,
A portion of the electrical wiring is visible through the transparent portion,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2,
The device has a movable body that performs a predetermined operation by the operation of an electric drive source, the movable body is arranged on the front side of the game board,
A part of the electric wiring is arranged on the front side of the game board and is visible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

114 to 116, the ball-entering suggestion effects 1 to 7 will be described below. The ball-entering suggestion productions 1 to 7 are executed in the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to display the image.

[Entering ball suggestion production 1]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pitch-entering suggestion effect 1. FIG. In the ball entry suggestion effect 1, the game ball enters the starting port (one or both of the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the same applies in FIGS. 114 to 116) while the decorative symbols are changing on the display screen 7a. When the player enters the ball, an image representing that the player has entered the ball and a pending icon are displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the pending icon moves as the pending process is completed, but the image representing that the player has entered the ball does not move. be. Further, when the suspended icon 9A1 (suspended first) is displayed when the image indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed, the image indicating that the player has entered the ball disappears. The timing at which the image indicating that the ball has entered disappears is when the suspended icon held when the image indicating that the ball has entered is displayed becomes the suspended icon 9A1 and the variation ends.

FIG. 114(A) is in the process of changing, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. There is a possibility that four pending icons 9A are displayed, and the four pending icons 9A are also referred to as pending icon 9A1, pending icon 9A2, pending icon 9A3, and pending icon 9A4 in order of completion. Also, the variation icon 9C may not be displayed. Also, the pending icon 9B may be displayed (similarly in FIGS. 114 to 116).

Next, FIG. 114(B) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. A pending icon 9A4 (fourth pending, displayed in black) is displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole. It is in Hold 4 state. Further, when the game ball enters the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the game ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed at a position near the start opening on the display screen 7a. In addition, it does not have to be at a position close to the starting port. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered is in a state of being superimposed on the variation icon 9C, the suspension icon 9A1, and the suspension icon 9A2. The image NSE representing that the player has entered the ball does not overlap the pending icon 9A3 and the pending icon 9A4. The suspended icon (displayed in black) when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed is the suspended icon 9A4.

Next, FIG. 114(C) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 3 status. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the hold icon. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2 and 9A3 are displayed. The image NSE representing that the player has entered the ball is superimposed on the new variation icon 9C, suspension icon 9A1, and suspension icon 9A2. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the state does not overlap with the new hold icon 9A3. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A3.

Next, FIG. 114(D) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 2 status. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A2 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A1, and the pending icon 9A3 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The image NSE representing that the player has entered the ball is superimposed on the new variation icon 9C, suspension icon 9A1, and suspension icon 9A2. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A2.

Next, FIG. 114(E) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 1 status. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A2 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. The image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is in a state of being superimposed on the new variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A1. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A1.

Next, in FIG. 114(F), when the suspended icon (displayed in black) is the suspended icon 9A1 when the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed, the state slightly before the end of the variation ( before the image control microcomputer 101 receives the fixed stop command). The variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. At this time, an image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed.

Next, FIG. 114(G) shows the change end state when the suspended icon (displayed in black) is the suspended icon 9A1 when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed. When the change ends (when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the fixed stop command), the change icon 9C disappears. At this time, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered disappears. It should be noted that the timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered may disappear after a certain period of time has elapsed since the image control microcomputer 101 received the confirmation stop command.

Next, in FIG. 114 (H), it is the state of the change start of the special figure lottery that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed. Here, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is not displayed. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. No hold status. At the start of fluctuation, the holding icon 9A1 moves to the position of the fluctuation icon 9C. In the new state after the movement, the variation icon 9C is displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed becomes the variable icon 9C.

Next, in FIG. 114 (I), the change of the special figure lottery held when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed is the variable icon 9C. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is not displayed.

[Invitation Suggestion 2]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effects 2, 3, and 4. FIG. FIGS. 115A to 115D are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 2. FIG. In the ball entry suggesting production 2, when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative symbols are changing on the display screen 7a, an image indicating that the ball has entered and a pending icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and then , The hold icon moves as the hold is digested, but the image indicating that the ball has entered does not move. Further, when the suspended icon that is held when the image indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed becomes the variable icon 9C, the image that indicates that the player has entered the ball disappears.

FIG. 115(A) shows the change end state when the suspended icon (displayed in black) is the suspended icon 9A1 when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed. In the ball-entry suggestion production 2 as well, the production of displaying the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered and the subsequent production of the holding digestion are the same as the ball-entry suggestion production 1 (FIGS. 114(A) to (F)). omitted here. In FIG. 115A, the variation icon 9C disappears at the end of variation (when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the confirmation stop command). At this time, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered does not disappear.

Next, in FIG. 115(B), it is the state of the change start of the special figure lottery suspended when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed. Here, too, an image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. No hold status. At the start of fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the fluctuation icon 9C. In the new state after the movement, the variation icon 9C is displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed becomes the variable icon 9C.

Next, in FIG. 115 (C), when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed, the change of the special figure lottery that has been suspended is started, and when the image NSE that indicates that the ball has been entered is displayed The suspended pending icon (displayed in black) is immediately before becoming the variable icon 9C. Here, too, an image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 115 (D), when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed, the change of the special figure lottery that has been suspended is started, and when the image NSE that indicates that the ball has been entered is displayed The suspended icon (displayed in black) has become the variable icon 9C. Here, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered disappears. The timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been hit disappears may be during movement when the suspended icon that was suspended when the image NSE indicating that the ball was hit was displayed becomes the variable icon 9C.

[Invitation Suggestion 3]
FIG. 115(E) is a diagram for explaining the entry suggestion effect 3. FIG. The ball-entering suggestion performance 3 is a production in which the image representing the ball-entering does not disappear even if the reserved icon held when the image representing the ball-entering is displayed becomes the variable icon.

FIG. 115(E) shows that the variation of the special figure lottery that was suspended when the image NSE indicating that the ball was entered was displayed, and was suspended when the image NSE indicating that the ball was entered was displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) has become the variable icon 9C. In the ball-entry suggestion production 3, the production in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed, and the subsequent production of the pending digestion is the ball-entry suggestion production 1 (FIGS. 114 (A) to (F)) and the ball-entry suggestion production. Since it is the same as production 2 (FIGS. 115(A) to (C)), it is omitted here. In FIG. 115(E) as well, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been hit is still displayed. After that, it is displayed until the end of the fluctuation. It should be noted that the display of the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball may be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, until the reaching of the decoration pattern is established, or until the development of the super reaching.

[Entering Suggestion Production 4]
115(F) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 4. FIG. In the ball entry suggesting effect 4, when the game ball enters the start hole while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a, an image representing that the ball has entered and a pending icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the It is a production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery with the image representing that the ball has been entered, and also suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery with the pending icon.

FIG. 115(F) is in the process of changing, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 115(G) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. A pending icon 9A4 (fourth pending) is displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole. It is in Hold 4 state. The pending icon 9A4 displayed here is blue (hatching 1). The color of this pending icon suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. Details will be described later. Further, when the game ball enters the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the game ball has entered is displayed. For the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball, the same effects as the above-described "entering suggestive effect 1", "entering suggestive effect 2", and "entering ball suggestive effect 3" are performed. Description is omitted here. The suspended icon 9A4 is suspended when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed.

For the pending icon, red is the strongest, green is the second strongest, blue is the third strongest, and white is the fourth strongest (weakest). As shown in FIG. 115(L), white is indicated by no hatching, blue is indicated by hatching 1, green is indicated by hatching 2, and red is indicated by hatching 3. Also, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) of a big win is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG.

Next, in FIG. 115(H), it is the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 3 status. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the hold icon. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2 and 9A3 are displayed. The suspended icon that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is blue (hatching 1) and becomes the suspended icon 9A3. The expected jackpot is 20. Also, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes to blue (with hatching) at the start of the variation. The color of the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball suggests the degree of expectation for the big win. Before the change, the color is white (expectation for jackpot is 10), and by changing to blue (expectation for jackpot is 20), the expectation for jackpot is increased. Details will be described later.

As for the colors of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball, red is the strongest, green is the second, blue is the third, and white is the fourth (weakest). White is not hatched, and blue, green, and red are hatched. Also, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) of a big win is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG.

Next, in FIG. 115(I), it is the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 2 status. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A2 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A1, and the pending icon 9A3 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The suspended icon that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is green (hatching 2) and becomes the suspended icon 9A2. At the start of this variation, the hold icon that was held when the image NSE indicating that the player had entered the ball was displayed changed from blue to green. The expected jackpot has increased from 20 to 30. Also, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes to green (with hatching) at the start of the fluctuation. Before the change, the color is blue (expectation for jackpot is 20), and by changing to green (expectation for jackpot is 30), the expectation for jackpot is increased.

Next, FIG. 115(J) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 1 status. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A2 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. The suspended icon that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is red (hatching 3) and becomes the suspended icon 9A1. At the start of this variation, the hold icon that was held when the image NSE indicating that the player had entered the ball was displayed changed from green to red. The expected jackpot has increased from 30 to 50. Also, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes to red (with hatching) at the start of the fluctuation. Before the change, the color is green (expectation for jackpot is 30), and the change to red (expectation for jackpot is 50) increases the expectation for jackpot.

Next, in FIG. 115(K), the change of the special figure lottery held when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed. The red (hatching 3) suspended icon that is suspended when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed is the variable icon 9C. Also, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball has disappeared.

[Invitation Suggestion 5]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effects 5, 6, and 7. FIG. FIGS. 116A to 116E are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 5. FIG. In the ball entry suggesting effect 5, when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative symbols are changing on the display screen 7a, an image representing that the ball has entered and a pending icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the It is a production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery with an image that shows that the ball has been entered.

FIG. 116(A) is in the process of changing, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 116(B) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. A pending icon 9A4 (fourth pending, displayed in black) is displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole. It is in Hold 4 state. Further, when the game ball enters the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the game ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed at a position near the start opening on the display screen 7a. The image NSE representing that the ball has hit the ball at this time is an image of relatively small size, that is, an image of "small" size. Expectation is 10. It should be noted that the size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered suggests the degree of expectation for the big win. Details will be described later.

The image NSE representing that the ball has been hit has the strongest size "extra large", the second strongest size, the third strongest size "medium", and the fourth strongest size "small". 3rd strongest (1st weakest). In addition, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) of the jackpot is 10 in the case of "small" size, 20 in the case of "medium" size, and 30 in the case of "large" size. , and 50 for size "extra large". The same applies to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG.

Next, FIG. 116(C) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. The image NSE representing that the ball has been hit at this time is an image of a relatively medium size, that is, an image of "medium" size. The size of the image NSE representing that the ball has been hit changes from "small" to "medium". Expectations are 20. Moreover, it will be in the state of Hold 3. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the hold icon. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2 and 9A3 are displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A3. It should be noted that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has hit the ball changes at the start of fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 116(D) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. The image NSE representing that the ball has hit the ball at this time is an image of a relatively large size, that is, an image of a "large" size. The size of the image NSE representing that the ball has been hit changes from "medium" to "large". Expected level is 30. Moreover, it will be in the state of hold 2. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A2 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A1, and the pending icon 9A3 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A2. It should be noted that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has hit the ball changes at the start of fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 116(E) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. The image NSE indicating that the ball has hit the ball at this time is an image of a relatively extra-large size, that is, an image of an "extra-large" size. The size of the image NSE representing that the ball has been hit changes from "large" to "extra-large". Expectations are 50. Moreover, it will be in the state of hold 1. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A2 moves to the position of the pending icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A1. It should be noted that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has hit the ball changes at the start of fluctuation.

[Entering ball suggestion production 6]
116(F) to (H) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 6. FIG. In the ball entry suggesting production 6, when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative symbols are changing on the display screen 7a, an image representing that the ball has entered and a pending icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the It is a production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special lottery with an image that shows that the ball has been entered. However, the image indicating that the player has entered the ball disappears before the suspended icon that was suspended when the image indicating that the player entered the ball was displayed becomes the suspended icon 9A1.

FIG. 116(F) is in the process of changing, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Suspension is a state in which the game ball enters the starting port when there are 3 pieces. A pending icon 9A4 (fourth pending, displayed in black) is displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole. It is in Hold 4 state. Further, when the game ball has entered the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the game ball has entered is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116(G) shows the state during fluctuation. One hold has been fulfilled, and it is in the state of hold 3. The suspended icon (displayed in black) when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed is the suspended icon 9A3. An image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 116(H), it is in a fluctuating state. In addition, one hold has been consumed, and it is in the state of hold 2. The suspended icon (displayed in black) when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed is the suspended icon 9A2. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered has disappeared. In other words, the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball disappears before the suspended icon held when the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is displayed becomes the suspended icon 9A1. The timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has hit the ball disappears may be at the start of the variation, during the variation, or at the end of the variation. For example, it may be during the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern or at the end of the fluctuation.

[Invitation Suggestion 7]
116(I) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 7. FIG. In the ball entry suggesting production 7, when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative symbols are changing on the display screen 7a, an image indicating that the ball has entered and a pending icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the It is a production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special drawing lottery of the variation with an image that shows that the ball has been entered.

FIG. 116(I) is in the process of changing, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 116(J) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. A pending icon 9A4 (fourth pending, displayed in black) is displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole. It is in Hold 4 state. Further, when the game ball enters the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the game ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has hit the ball at this time is an image of a relatively extra-large size, that is, an image of an "extra-large" size. Expectation is 50. The size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has hit the ball indicates the degree of expectation for the big win of the variation at the time when the image NSE indicating that the ball has hit the ball is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116(K) shows a state in which an image NSE representing that the game ball has entered the game ball is out of the state of being displayed. The left decorative design 8L is "6", the middle decorative design 8C is "5", and the right decorative design 8R is "6". It means that it has deviated. The suspended icon (displayed in black) when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered is displayed is the suspended icon 9A4. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered disappears. Note that the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered may disappear after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variation, at a specific timing of reach establishment or final stop, or after a certain period of time has elapsed since it was displayed.

Next, FIG. 116(L) shows the state of start of fluctuation. Holds are consumed to initiate fluctuations. Hold 3 status. An image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is not displayed. At the end of the previous variation, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the hold icon. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2 and 9A3 are displayed. The suspended icon (displayed in black) that is suspended when the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered is displayed as the suspended icon 9A3. Henceforth, the pending icon (displayed in black) that was suspended when the image NSE indicating that the player entered the ball was displayed also moves along with the shift movement of the pending icon each time the variation starts.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of the ball-entry suggesting productions 1 to 7 are shown below.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in the "entering suggestion effect 1", and one of the plurality of types of images indicates that the player has entered a ball. One of the plurality of types of images is the holding icon 9A, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered and the holding icon 9A are displayed. After the first effect (Fig. 114(B)) and the first effect (Fig. 114(B)), the holding icon 9A moves each time the change starts, and the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered changes. A second effect (FIGS. 114C to 114F) that does not move regardless of the start, and after the second effect (FIGS. 114C to 114F), the suspended icon 9A moves to the suspended icon 9A1. A third effect (FIG. 114(G)) in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been hit disappears when the position is reached can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the player's sense of expectation can be aroused, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in "Entering Suggestion Effect 1", in the second effect (FIGS. 114(C) to 114(F)), the image NSE representing that the ball has entered and the holding icon 9A 114(B) and (C)) to a state in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered and the suspension icon 9A overlap (FIGS. 114(D) and (C)). E)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the player's sense of expectation can be aroused, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in "entering suggestive effect 4" and "entering suggestive effect 5", in the second effect, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered and the holding icon 9A are displayed in a large size. Depending on the size and color, there are cases where the degree of expectation for winning in the special lottery is suggested (FIGS. 116(B) to (E), FIGS. 115(G) to (K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the player's sense of expectation can be aroused, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "entering suggestive effect 7", and one of the plurality of types of images indicates that the player has entered a ball. One of the plurality of types of images is the holding icon 9A, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered and the holding icon 9A are displayed. After the first effect (Fig. 116 (J)) and the first effect (Fig. 116 (J)), the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered disappears without moving, and the second effect (Fig. 116 (K) ), and after the second effect (Fig. 116(K)), a third effect (Fig. 116(L)) in which the hold icon 9A moves each time a change starts, can be executed. The size of the image NSE representing that suggests the degree of expectation for winning the special figure lottery in the variation at the time when it is newly displayed (Fig. 116 (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the player's sense of expectation can be aroused, thereby improving interest.

[Modification]
Modifications of the ball entry suggesting productions 1 to 7 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the display form of the image NSE indicating that the ball has been hit at the start of the variation and the hold icon 9A are changed, but it does not have to be at the start of the variation. For example, when reach is established, after a certain period of time has passed since the start of fluctuation, it may be the time of fluctuation end.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the image NSE, the variation icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A, which indicate that the ball has entered, indicate the degree of expectation for winning in the special lottery, respectively. You can do it.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the image NSE representing that the ball has been entered overlaps the variation icon 9C and the hold icons 9A1 and 9A2, but the number of the hold icons 9A that overlap does not have to be two. For example, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 may overlap, or the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 may overlap. Further, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball does not have to overlap the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Furthermore, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball may overlap the variation icon 9C and all the pending icons 9A. Also, one pending icon 9A may change from overlapping state to non-overlapping state during fluctuation.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, in the "entering suggestive effect 1" and "entering suggestive effect 2", when the pending icon held when the image indicating that the ball entered is displayed becomes the pending icon 9A1, It is assumed that the image indicating that the ball has entered the ball disappears when the change icon 9C is reached. When reaching a position between where the icon 9C is displayed, the image representing the hit may disappear.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the color of the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball is changed at the start of the change in the "entering ball suggestion effect 4", but it may be changed at the end of the change. Alternatively, the change may be made after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation. For example, it may change when the left symbol is stopped.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the size of the image NSE indicating that the player has entered the ball changes at the start of the change in the "entering ball suggestion effect 5", but it may be changed by animation from the start of the change. Alternatively, the change may occur after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation. For example, it may change 1 second after the start of fluctuation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the first image and the second image are displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, the second image moves each time the variation starts, and the first image does not move regardless of the start of the variation;
a third effect in which the first image disappears when the second image reaches a specific position by movement after the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1,
In the second effect, from a state in which the first image and the second image do not overlap, a state in which the first image and the second image overlap by moving the second image. become,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or aspect G3-2,
In the second effect, the first image and the second image, depending on the display mode, may suggest the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing or normal drawing drawing, respectively.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G3-4]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the first image and the second image are displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole;
a second effect in which the first image disappears without moving after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the second image moves each time a change starts, and
The first image, depending on the display mode, suggests the degree of expectation of winning the special figure lottery or the normal figure lottery in the fluctuation at the time when it is newly displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as operation units to be operated by the player. , triggers, etc. may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start opening 20 First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub-display screen 69 Frame movable accessory 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Production control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (5)

A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of displaying a pending icon image indicating the pending number on a display screen,
The display control means can execute an icon display effect in which a predetermined number of icon images representing the same object as the object represented by the pending icon image are displayed on the display screen regardless of the number of pending.
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The display control means is capable of executing the icon display effect multiple times during one variation.
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The display control means changes the display color of the icon image displayed in the icon display effect a plurality of times during one variation.
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The display control means switches from a display state in which the suspended icon image is displayed to a non-display state in which the suspended icon image is not displayed during execution of the icon display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The display control means is configured such that at least one icon image among a predetermined number of icon images displayed in the icon display effect is equal to or larger than the image size of the pending icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by

Images